INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING
               Jacqueline Peters-Richardson
Course Name – Introduction to Accounting
         Course Author - Jacqueline Peters-Richardson, Ministry of Education, Trinidad and Tobago
         Commonwealth of Learning
         Edition 1.0

         ____________________



         Commonwealth of Learning ©September 2011
         Any part of this document may be reproduced without permission but with attribution to
         the Commonwealth of Learning using the CC-BY-SA (share alike with attribution).

         http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0




                                                                      Commonwealth of Learning
                                                             1055 West Hastings Street, Suite 1200
                                                                     Vancouver, British Columbia
                                                                                  Canada V6E 2E9
                                                                     Telephone: +1 604 775 8200
                                                                            Fax: +1 604 775 8210
                                                                               Web: www.col.org
                                                                             E-mail: info@col.org




Introduction to Accounting                                                              Page | 1
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

          The Commonwealth of Learning wishes to acknowledge the contributions of the course
          authors and the support of the University of Lesotho in the creation of this course.




 Introduction to Accounting                                                             Page | 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ................................................................................................................................. 2
COURSE OVERVIEW....................................................................................................................................... 6
   Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 6
   Course Goals ............................................................................................................................................. 6
   Course Structure ....................................................................................................................................... 7
   Required Readings .................................................................................................................................... 7
   Assignments and Projects ......................................................................................................................... 8
   Assessment Methods ................................................................................................................................ 8
   Time Required ........................................................................................................................................... 8
   Course Schedule........................................................................................................................................ 8
STUDENT SUPPORT ....................................................................................................................................... 9
   Academic Support ..................................................................................................................................... 9
   How to Submit Assignments ..................................................................................................................... 9
   Technical Support ..................................................................................................................................... 9
UNIT ONE – INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING .......................................................................................... 10
   Unit Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 10
   Unit Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 10
   Unit Readings .......................................................................................................................................... 10
   Assignments and Activities ..................................................................................................................... 10
   Topic 1.1 Definition Of Accounting And Accounting Terms.................................................................... 11
   Topic Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 17
   Topic 1.2 The Accounting Cycle .............................................................................................................. 18
   Topic 1.3 Business Accounting Process And Procedures ........................................................................ 22
   Topic 1.4 The Accounting Equation And Balance Sheet ......................................................................... 26
   Unit References....................................................................................................................................... 32
   Unit Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 33
   Unit 1 Suggested Answers ...................................................................................................................... 35




    Introduction to Accounting                                                                                                                 Page | 3
UNIT TWO – DOUBLE ENTRY SYSTEM OF ACOUNTING .............................................................................. 37
  Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 37
  Objectives ............................................................................................................................................... 37
  Unit Readings .......................................................................................................................................... 37
  Assignments and Activities ..................................................................................................................... 37
  Topic 2.1 Books Of Original Entry ........................................................................................................... 38
  Unit Assignment ...................................................................................................................................... 57
  Topic 2.2 Recording Business Financial Transactions ............................................................................. 58
  Unit Assignment ...................................................................................................................................... 75
  topic Summary ........................................................................................................................................ 75
  Topic 2.3 Balancing Off Accounts............................................................................................................ 76
  Topic 2.4 Trial Balance ............................................................................................................................ 81
  Unit Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 83
UNIT THREE – FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................... 85
  Unit Readings .......................................................................................................................................... 85
  Assignments and Activities ..................................................................................................................... 85
  Topic 3.1 Depreciation And Disposal Of Assets ...................................................................................... 86
  Topic 3.2 Adjustments For Financial Reporting ...................................................................................... 97
  Topic 3.3 Bad Debts And Provision For Bad Debts................................................................................ 102
  Topic 3.4 Inventory Accounting ............................................................................................................ 109
  Topic 3.5 Final Accounts for Sole Trader .............................................................................................. 113
  Unit Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 122
UNIT FOUR – ANALYSING/INTERPRETING FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS ............... 123
  Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 123
  Objectives ............................................................................................................................................. 123
  Unit Readings ........................................................................................................................................ 123
  Assignments and Activities ................................................................................................................... 123
  Topic 4.1 Accounting Ratios .................................................................................................................. 124
  Topic 4.2 Correction of Errors ............................................................................................................... 130
  Topic 4.3 Payroll .................................................................................................................................... 137
  Topic 4.4 Bank Reconciliation Statement ............................................................................................. 144
  Topic 4.5 Petty Cash Book And The Imprest System ............................................................................ 150

   Introduction to Accounting                                                                                                                 Page | 4
Topic 4.6 Control Accounts ................................................................................................................... 155
  Unit Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 159
UNIT FIVE – FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF OTHER ORGANIZATIONS ......................................................... 160
  Unit Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 160
  Unit Objectives ...................................................................................................................................... 160
  Unit Readings ........................................................................................................................................ 160
  Assignments and Activities ................................................................................................................... 160
  Topic 5.1 Single Entry And Incomplete Records ................................................................................... 161
  Topic 5.2 Receipts And Payments Account ........................................................................................... 165
  Topic 5.3 Partnership Accounts ............................................................................................................ 169
  Topic 5.4 Company Accounts ................................................................................................................ 174
  Unit References..................................................................................................................................... 179
  Unit Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 180
  FINAL ASSIGNMENT/PROJECT............................................................................................................... 181
  COURSE SUMMARY............................................................................................................................... 182




   Introduction to Accounting                                                                                                              Page | 5
COURSE OVERVIEW

    INTRODUCTION
          This course is designed to teach you the “language of business” to create a better
          understand of the terms and concepts used in business decisions. The course Introduction
          to Accounting prepares entrepreneurs to manage the financial aspects of their businesses.
          In order for any entrepreneurship business to be successful there should be proper financial
          recording and management of the business finances. During this course you will be
          exposed to financial terms and concepts to proper financial control of your business. The
          Introduction to Business Accounting course will provide future entrepreneurs with basic
          skills and knowledge required to establish and maintain business accounts, read and
          interprets financial reports and returns. You will explore the process and procedures of
          business accounting and its role in establishing and managing a successful business venture.
          You will also analyse and interpret final accounts of different forms of business.

    COURSE GOALS
          Upon completion of the Introduction to Business Accounting you should be able to:
               1.    Define accounting and accounting terms
               2.    Appreciate the differences between bookkeeping and accounting
               3.    State and illustrate the accounting cycle
               4.    Describe the different types of accounts
               5.    Examine the concepts and best practices of business accounting
               6.    Record and interpret entries in the books of original entry
               7.    Transfer information from the books of original entry to the ledgers
               8.    Generate trial balance from the balances in the ledgers
               9.    Analyse financial reports and returns
               10.   Calculate equity rations
               11.   Explain cash flow
               12.   Prepare bank reconciliation statements
               13.   Calculate payroll documents
               14.   Prepare cash flow, financial statements, income statements and balance sheets
               15.   Prepare final accounts for other forms of businesses
               16.   State the basic accounting equation
               17.   Describe the relationship between the accounting equation and the balance sheet




 Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 6
COURSE STRUCTURE
         This course is divided into five units:

         Unit One – Introduction to Accounting
                    Topic 1         Definition of Accounting and key accounting terms.
                    Topic 2         The Accounting Cycle.
                    Topic 3         Business accounting process and procedures.
                    Topic 4         The Accounting Equation and the Balance Sheet.

         Unit Two – Double Entry System of Accounting
                    Topic 1        Source Documents and the Books of original entry
                    Topic 2        Recording Business Financial Transactions
                    Topic 3        Balancing Off of Accounts
                    Topic 4        The Trial Balance

         Unit Three - Financial Accounting and Adjustments
                    Topic 1          Assets Disposal and Depreciation
                    Topic 2          Adjustments for financial Reporting
                    Topic 3          Bad Debts and Provision for Bad Debts
                    Topic 4          Inventory Accounting
                    Topic 5          Prepare Cash Flow, Financial Statements, Income Statements
                                     and Balance Sheets for Sole Trader

         Unit Four - Analysing and Interpreting of Financial Statements and Control Systems
                     Topic 1         Accounting Ratios
                     Topic 2         Correction of Errors
                     Topic 3         Payroll
                     Topic 4         Bank Reconciliation Statements
                     Topic 5         Petty Cash Book and Imprest System
                     Topic 6         Control Accounts

         Unit Five - Financial Statements of other organizations
                     Topic 1         Single Entry and Incomplete Records
                     Topic 2         Receipts and Payments Accounts
                     Topic 3         Partnership Accounts
                     Topic 4         Company Accounts

   REQUIRED READINGS
         The institution and instructor delivering the course will identify specific readings to support
         the course. Below is a list of online ebooks that could be used to support this course.

         Taylor, P. (2008). Book-Keeping and Accounting for the Small Business. How to Books. (E-
         Book). Available at: http://www.e-booksdirectory.com/details.php?ebook=2188

         Wlather, L.M. (2001). Principles of Accounting. Principlesofaccounting.com. (E-Book).
         Available at: http://www.e-booksdirectory.com/details.php?ebook=2910

Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 7
ASSIGNMENTS AND PROJECTS
         You will be provided detailed instructions for your final project by your instructor. Ideally
         the final project for this course will require you to prepare final accounts for a sole trader
         from a list of transaction and source documents. The course has been designed to provide
         your guidance and activities that will prepare you to complete the final project assigned by
         your instructor.

   ASSESSMENT METHODS
         Assessments will take the form of responding to activities, as well as coursework
         assignments and a final project and examinations as determined from time to time by the
         institution. In cases where coursework, assignments, projects and examinations are used in
         combination, percentage rating for each component will be communicated to you at the
         appropriate time. Your instructor will provide you with guidance on how he or she will
         grade and provide feedback re: all graded activities.

   TIME REQUIRED
         The course is worth 14 credits, and each credit is equivalent to 10 notional hours. You are,
         therefore, advised to spend not less than 140 hours of study on this course. The notional
         time includes:
         • Going over activities embedded in the study material
         • Peer group interaction (where necessary)
         • Face-to-face tutorials (where necessary)
         • Working on tutor-marked assignments
         • Preparing and sitting examinations (where that is required)

         COURSE SCHEDULE
         The institution and instructor will provide a specific schedule to guide students.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 8
STUDENT SUPPORT
          Note: This section should be customized by the institution delivering the course. Some
          suggestions for content are provided in the heading below.

    ACADEMIC SUPPORT
          <Insert the following information if relevant>

                   How to contract a tutor/facilitator (Phone number, email, office hours, etc.).
                   Background information about the tutor/facilitator if he/she does not change
                   regularly. Alternatively provide a separate letter with the package describing your
                   tutor/facilitator’s background.
                   Description of any resources that they may need to procure to complete the course
                   (e.g. lab kits, etc.).
                   How to access the library (either in person, by email or online).

    HOW TO SUBMIT ASSIGNMENTS
           <If the course requires that assignments be regularly graded, then insert a description of
          how and where to submit assignments. Also explain how the learners will receive
          feedback.>

    TECHNICAL SUPPORT
          <If the students must access content online or use email to submit assignments, then a
          technical support section is required. You need to include how to complete basic tasks and
          a phone number that they can call if they are having difficulty getting online>.




 Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 9
UNIT ONE – INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING
    UNIT INTRODUCTION
           In order for any business to be successful, there should be proper control of its finances. In
           this unit you will begin by understanding basic accounting terms and principles that will get
           you started to proper financial control of your business.

    UNIT OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this unit you should be able to:

               1.  Define Accounting and Accounting terms
               2.  Appreciate the difference between bookkeeping and accounting
               3.  State the main purpose of accounting
               4.  Describe the different types of accounts
               5.  Identify different types of business
               6.  State and illustrate the accounting cycle
               7.  Examine the concepts and best practices of business accounting
               8.  Identify users of accounting information
               9.  Distinguish between financial and management accounting
               10. Examine accounting assumptions, principles and conventions and how they are
                   used
               11. State the accounting equation
               12. Describe the relationship of the accounting equation and the balance sheet
               13. Understand what is meant by assets, liabilities and owners’ equity

    UNIT READINGS
           The instructor will provide a list of readings.

    ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES
           The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions.




 Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 10
TOPIC 1.1 DEFINITION OF ACCOUNTING AND ACCOUNTING TERMS
          TOPIC INTRODUCTION
          We will begin by taking and look at the definition for accounting and some accounting
          terms. As you have increase knowledge of various accounting terms it will enable you to
          analyze and interpret the accounting records of your business.

          TOPIC OBJECTIVES
          Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

              1.   Define accounting and accounting terms
              2.   Appreciate the difference between bookkeeping and accounting
              3.   State the purpose of accounting
              4.   Identify users of accounting information
              5.   Identify different types of businesses
              6.   Distinguish between Financial and Management Accounting

          WHAT IS BOOKKEEPING?
          Let us begin this unit by defining two important terms in accounting: bookkeeping and
          accounting.

                                                   Activity 1 – A

             From your knowledge of accounts what would be your define of

             Bookkeeping ____________________________________________________________



             _______________________________________________________________________



             Accounting _____________________________________________________________



             _______________________________________________________________________


         Great start! Now let us look at these definitions

                   Bookkeeping is defined as concerned with the recording of business data. “It is the
                   process of recording the business transactions and the relations between the
                   transactions. The process of bookkeeping is mainly mechanical and does not
                   require any analysis. Instead of the analyzing, the bookkeeping relies only on the
                   recording of the information”. (difference between 2001)

Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 11
Accounting is concerned with the design, interpretation of data and the preparation
                  of financial reports. “Accounting is also the systematic recording of business
                  transactions but it includes additional reports and further financial analysis of the
                  transactions. Accounting is also the systematic recording of business transactions
                  but it includes additional reports and further financial analysis of the transactions”.
                  (difference between 2001)

         As you can see, accounting is made up of two elements:
             1. Recording business transactions - Book keeping
             2. Presenting the information

          DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BOOKKEEPING AND ACCOUNTING
          Now that we have defined both bookkeeping and accounting we can now look at the
          difference between them. Bookkeeping is a part of the accounting process that records the
          financial transactions. Accounting takes the recorded financial transactions entered by a
          bookkeeper and prepares financial statements, liabilities of the assets and the various
          results of the whole business. The accounting process uses the bookkeeping information,
          interprets the financial data of the business and compiles it into reports in a format that
          business managers can use to judge the financial health of the business based on their
          projected financial plan.

          Bookkeeping is simply the recording of monetary transactions of a business, whereas
          accounting allows a business to record, analyse and retrieve critical financial information
          that can be used to determine a business financial status and provide reports and insights
          needed to make sound financial decisions.

          PURPOSE OF ACCOUNTING
          The purpose of accounting is to provide a means of recording, reporting, summarizing and
          interpreting economic data.

              “The primary purpose of accounting is to identify and record all activities that
              impact the organization financially. All activities, including purchases, sales, the
              acquisition of capital and interest earned from investments, can be classified in
              monetary terms and posted to a specified account as an accounting record.
              These transactions typically are recorded in ledgers and journals and are part of
              the process known as the accounting cycle.” (ehow 1999-2001)

          TYPES OF ACCOUNTING INFORMATION
          An accounting information system provides data to help decision makers both outside and
          inside the business. Decision makers outside the business are affected in some way by the
          performance of the business. Decision makers inside the business are responsible for the
          performance of the business. For this reason, accounting is divided into two categories:


Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 12
financial accounting for those outside; and
                  managerial accounting for those inside.

          MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTS
          Management accounting refers to the processes and procedures implemented for internal
          decision making and reporting within an organization. It provides information that is useful
          in running a business by internal users, usually accomplished through custom designed
          reports. These are produced as often as a business wants them (usually monthly). They
          can be prepared using the business’s own internal policies and bookkeeping/financial
          management system. Internal users, Senior and middle Management use accounting
          information to run business. Employees utilize accounting information to determine a
          business’s profitability and profit sharing.

          Management account information or reports should:

                  Relate to the part of the business for which the manager is responsible. For
                  example, a Production Manager wants information on costs of production but not
                  on advertising.
                  Involve planning for the future. For instance, a budget would show financial plans
                  for the coming year.
                  Meet two tests:
                       o the accounting information must be useful and relevant; and
                       o it must not cost more to gather and process than it is worth.

          Managerial accounting generates information that managers can use to make sound
          decisions. The four major types of internal management decisions are:

              1. Financial Decisions—determine what amount of capital (funds) are needed to run
                 the business and whether to secure these funds from owners or creditors. In this
                 sense, capital means money used by the business to purchase resources such as
                 machinery and buildings and to pay expenses of conducting the business.
              2. Resource Allocation Decisions—identify how the total capital of a business is to be
                 invested, such as the amount of machinery to be purchased in any one year.
              3. Production Decisions—decides what products are to be produced, by what means,
                 and when.
              4. Marketing Decisions—establishes selling prices and advertising budgets;
                 determining the location of a business's markets and how to reach them.

          FINANCIAL ACCOUNTS
          Financial accounting refers to the fundamental guidelines, polices, procedures and
          regulations mandated by the General Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP), which was
          established by the Financial Standards Board (FASB) and/or government regulators. It
          provides information designed to satisfy the needs of external users. This reporting is done


Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 13
in the form of financial statements. These accounts are usually produced annually. They
          are based on historical information and are rarely used internally. Financial accounts are
          used by external users for several reasons.

          The external users of accounting information fall into six groups; each has different
          interests in the business depending on how you are financially structure and thus will want
          answers to unique questions. The groups and some of their possible questions are:

                  Owners and Prospective Owners. Has the business earned satisfactory income on
                  its total investment? Should an investment be made in this business? Should the
                  present investment be increased, decreased, or retained at the same level? Can
                  the business install costly pollution control equipment and still be profitable?
                  Creditors and Lenders. Should a loan be granted to the business? Will the business
                  be able to pay its debts as they become due?
                  Employees and their Unions. Does the business have the ability to pay increased
                  wages? Is the business financially able to provide long-term employment for its
                  workforce?
                  Customers. Does the business offer useful products at fair prices? Will the business
                  survive long enough to honour its product warranties?
                  Governments. Is the business, such as a local public utility, charge a fair rate for its
                  services? How much tax does the business owe?
                  The General Public. Is the business providing useful products and gainful
                  employment for the local citizens without causing serious environmental problems?




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 14
Activity 1 – B

         Complete the illustration below to demonstrate your understanding of the types of
         accounting and the users of the accounting information using examples.




         Were you able to complete the diagram above with the correct information? Now that you
         have distinguished between management and financial accounting and there users lets now
         look at the different types of account.

          CLASSIFICATION OF ACCOUNTS
         An 'account' is a specific location for recording transactions of a like kind. The dual aspect of
         treating each transaction is then recorded in an account. An account shows us the
         'history' of a particular business transaction.

         Accounts can be divided into three categories:

         1. Personal Accounts – these are the accounts of your creditors (accounts payable) and
            debtors (accounts receivable)
         2. Real Accounts – are your tangible and intangible assets
         3. Nominal Accounts – these are income and expense accounts of your business




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 15
Type          Represent                            Examples
          Personal      Accounts related to individuals,   Individuals; partnership firms; corporate
                        firms, organizations, or companies entities; non-profit organizations; any
                                                           local or statutory bodies including
                                                           governments at the country, state or
                                                           local levels
          Real          Accounts related to assets of a              Tangibles – Plants and
                        tangible or intangible nature                machinery, furniture and
                                                                     fixtures, computers and
                                                                     information processing
                                                                     equipment
                                                                     Intangibles – Goodwill, patents,
                                                                     copyrights, trademarks

          Nominal       Temporary income and                 Sales, purchases, utilities, dividends
                        expenditure accounts for
                        recognition of the implications of
                        financial transactions during each
                        fiscal term till finalization of
                        accounts at term end
                                               Table 1.1

         Accounts can be further divided into five types. The basic types of accounts are:

              1. 'Assets:' items of value that the business owns or has rights to. Examples include:
                 cash, real estate, equipment, money or services that others owe you (accounts
                 receivables), and even intangible items such as patents and copyrights.
              2. 'Liabilities:' obligations that are owed to other parties (accounts payables).
                 Examples include: wages payable, taxes due, and borrowed money (also called
                 debt).
              3. 'Equity:' the ownership value of a business. It is the investment by an owner in the
                 business.
              4. 'Revenues:' the mechanisms where income enters the business (note that revenue
                 and income is not the same thing--they are used here to describe each other in basic
                 terms only. This will be explained later).
              5. 'Expenses:' the costs of doing business. Examples include: salary expense, rent,
                 utilities expense, and interest on borrowed money.

          We have now identified the different types of accounts for a business but do you know
          what a business is? Let’s explore this concept.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 16
WHAT IS A BUSINESS?
          A business can be defined as a commercial organisation, which exists with a view to making
          a profit. A business will generally fall into one of the following categories (depending on
          the country you are establishing the business):

              Sole Trader - This is a business that is owned and operated by one person. He or
              she is solely liable for all business debts but when successful, takes all the profits.

              Partnership - This type of business is owned by several individuals, some of which
              will actively be involved in the business.

              Companies (or Public Corporations) - This type of business is owned by
              shareholders and is operated on their behalf by a nominated board of directors.

              Non-Trading Organisations (or Non-Profit Corporations) - Clubs, associations and
              other non-profit-making organisations are normally run for the benefit of their
              members to engage in a particular activity and not to make a profit. Their financial
              statements will take the form of income and expenditure accounts.

              Cooperative Society - A legally constituted business entity formed for the explicit
              purpose of furthering the economic welfare of its members and that of the wider
              society by providing them with goods or services.

   TOPIC SUMMARY
          You just had your first insight of an operation of a business. You have distinguished
          between bookkeeping and accounting, management and financial accounting and you have
          also looked at the classification and types of accounts and forms of business entities.

          We will now look at the Accounting Cycle.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 17
TOPIC 1.2 THE ACCOUNTING CYCLE
          TOPIC INTRODUCTION
         We are now moving on to the accounting cycle. This is a series of steps that are repeated
         ever reporting period. The process starts with making accounting entries for each
         transaction and goes through closing the books. This is the name given to the collective
         process of recording and processing the accounting events of a business. It is a methodical
         set of rules to ensure the accuracy and conformity of financial statements.

          TOPIC OBJECTIVES
         Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

              1. State and explain the steps in the accounting cycle
              2. Illustrate the accounting cycle in the form of a diagram

          STEPS IN THE ACCOUNTING CYCLE
          The accounting cycle is a series of steps that is followed to ensure that the records of a
          business are true and fair. Each business transaction goes through these steps. Let’s have a
          look at these steps in detail.

                                                        1. collecting &
                                                           analyzing
                                                            source
                                                         documents
                                9. Post Cloisng                                2. Journalizing
                                 Trial Balance                                  Transactions




                   8. Closing                                                                3. Post to the
                    Entries                                                                     Ledgers
                                                        Accounting
                                                           Cycle



                      7. Financial                                                      4. Unadjusted
                      Statemtents                                                       Trial Balance




                                          6. Adjusted Trial            5. Prepare
                                              Balance                 Adjustments




Introduction to Accounting                                                                                    Page | 18
Step 1 - Collecting and analyzing data from source documents.

          When a transaction occurs, a document is produced. Most of the time, these documents
          are external to the business (e.g. purchase orders, sales slips, etc.), however, they can also
          be internal documents, such as inter-office sales, cheques, bills from providers, etc. These
          documents are referred to as source documents. Some additional examples of source
          documents include:

                  The receipt you get when you purchase something at the store.
                  Interest you earned on your savings account which is documented in your monthly
                  bank statement.
                  The monthly electric utility bill that comes in the mail.
                  The telephone bill.
                  Invoices from other service providers, contractors, etc.

          Step 2 – Journalizing transactions.

          The source documents are recorded in a Journal. This is also known as a book of first entry.
          The journal records both sides of the transaction recorded by the source document. These
          write-ups are known as Journal entries.

          Step 3 – Post to the Ledgers.

          The Journal entries are then transferred to a Ledger. The group of accounts (described
          earlier) is called ledger. A ledger is also known as a book of accounts. The purpose of a
          Ledger is to bring together all of the transactions for a similar activity. For example, if a
          business has one bank account, then all transactions that include cash would then be
          maintained in the Cash Ledger. This process of transferring the values is known as a
          posting.

          Once the entries have all been posted, the Ledger accounts are added up in a process called
          Balancing. Balancing implies that the sum of all Debits equals the sum of all Credits.

          Step 4 – Unadjusted Trial Balance.

          A particular working document called an unadjusted trial balance is created. This lists all
          the balances from all the accounts in the Ledger. Notice that the values are not posted to
          the trial balance, they are merely copied.

          At this point accounting happens. The accountant produces a number of adjustments,
          which make sure that the values comply with accounting principles. These values (such as
          depreciation of equipment) are then passed through the accounting system resulting in an
          adjusted trial balance. This process continues until the accountant is satisfied.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 19
Steps 5 – Prepare adjustments.

          Period-end adjustments (usually quarterly) are required to bring accounts to their proper
          balances after considering transactions and/or events not yet recorded. Under accrual
          accounting, revenue is recorded when earned and expenses when they are incurred. An
          entry may be required at the end of the period to record revenue that has been earned but
          not yet recorded on the books. Similarly, an adjustment may be required to record expense
          that may have been incurred but not yet recorded.

          Step 6 – Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

          This step is similar to the preparation of the unadjusted trial balance but this time the
          adjusting entries are included. Correction of any errors must be made.

          Step 7 - Prepare Financial Statements.

          Financial statements are drawn from the trial balance and are presented in the following
          forms:

                  Income statement: prepared from revenue, expenses, gains and losses
                  Balance sheet: prepared from assets, liabilities and equity accounts
                  Statement of retained earnings: prepared from net income and dividend
                  information
                  Cash flow statement: derived from the other financial statement using either the
                  direct or indirect method.

          Finally, all the revenue and expense accounts are closed.

          Step 8 – Closing entries.

          Revenues and expenses are accumulated and reported by period, monthly, quarterly, or
          yearly. To prevent them not being added to or co-mingled with revenues and expenses of
          another period, they need to be closed out- that is, given zero balances at the end of each
          period. Their net balances, which represent the income or loss for the period, are
          transferred into owners’ equity. Once revenue and expense accounts are closed, the only
          accounts that have balances are the asset, liability, and owners’ equity accounts. These
          balances are carried forward to the next period.

          Step 9 – Prepare post-closing trial balance.

          The purpose of this final step is two-fold: to determine that all revenue and expense
          accounts have been closed properly and to test the equality of debit and credit balances of
          all the balance sheet accounts, that is, assets, liabilities and owners’ equity.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 20
TOPIC SUMMARY
            You have just looked at the accounting cycle and the steps in the accounting cycle. As you
            continue with the other topics in this unit you will examine the accounting cycle in more
            detail. We will now continue and look at the business accounting processes and
            procedures.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 21
TOPIC 1.3 BUSINESS ACCOUNTING PROCESS AND PROCEDURES
          TOPIC INTRODUCTION
          Accounting processes and procedures are usually based on the basic accounting cycle. The
          accounting process outlines how financial information flows through a business. It also
          identifies which individuals are responsible for the information. In order for the owners of
          a business to make sound decisions, they will need financial information that accurately
          reflects the "true and fair view" of the financial performance and position of the business.

          TOPIC OBJECTIVES
         Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

         1. examine accounting assumptions principles and conventions; and
         2. identify how these assumptions, principles and conventions are used.

          ACCOUNTING ASSUMPTIONS, PRINCIPLES AND CONVENTIONS
          Accounting is used to communicate financial information. It is based on twelve
          fundamental concepts that form the basis for all the General Accepted Accounting
          Principles (GAAP). Once these concepts are used as the foundation, readers of financial
          statements and other accounting information do not need to make assumptions about
          what the number means. The concepts and conventions were adopted to support the
          “true and fair view” approach of preparing financial statement for a business.

          The table 1.2 indicates the accounting assumptions, principles and conventions.

            Assumptions               Principles                  Conventions

            Separate Entity           Historical Cost             Materiality

            Going Concern             Matching                    Cost Benefits

            Money Measurement         Realization of Income       Conservatism

            Time Period               Full Disclosure             Consistency

                                      Dual Aspect

                                                    Table 1.2

          Let’s look further at these assumptions, principles and conventions.

          ACCOUNTING ASSUMPTIONS
          Separate Entity – this convention states that the business is an entity separate from its
          owner. Therefore, business records should be separated from the records of the owner.
          (Knol, 2009)


Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 22
Going Concern – assumes that the entity will continue to operate indefinitely. It implies
          that the business will continue to operate for an indefinite period of time in the foreseeable
          future. This concept allows business to spread (amortize) the cost of fixed assets over its
          expected useful life. (Knol, 2009)

          Money Measurement - assumes that items are not accounted for unless they can be
          quantified in monetary terms. (Knol, 2009) Financial statements shows only a limited
          picture of the business. They do not consider the business’s other valuable resources
          (workforce, brand recognition, quality of management) because they cannot be quantified
          in monetary terms.

          Time Period – allows the performance evaluated of a “Going Concern” business to be
          broken up into specific period of time such as month, a quarter or a year. (Knol, 2009)

          ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES
          Historical Cost – requires that business assets be recorded at the actual price paid to
          acquire them. No account is made for the changing value of these assets. (Knol, 2009)
          Transactions are recorded at cost and not at its market value.

          Matching – to avoid overstatement of income in any one period, the matching principle
          requires that revenue and related expenses be recorded in the same accounting period
          (moneyinstructor.com). Accountants should prepare accruals at the end for the reporting
          period to account for expenses incurred but for which there is no source document.

          Realization of Income – revenue are recognized when they are earned. This occurs when
          the seller received cash or claim to cash in exchange for goods and services.
          (moneyinstructor.com)

          Full disclosure – requires financial statements provide sufficient information to assist users
          of the information make knowledgeable and informed decisions about the business. (Knol,
          2009)

          Dual Aspect – is based on the accounting equation. All transactions must meet the
          equation in balance. Financial transactions are allocated both a debit and credit entry in
          the accounts. (Knol, 2009)

          ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS
          Materiality – events are only recorded if it’s significant enough to justify the usefulness of
          the information. (Moneyinstructor.com)

          Cost Benefits – since the value of assets change over time it would be impossible to
          accurately record the market value for the assets. There it is recorded at the price paid to
          acquire it. (Moneyinstructor.com)



Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 23
Conservatism – requires that profit should not be taken into account unless it’s actually
          realized in cash while all possible losses must be fully provided for. This ensures that you
          financial statement does not overstate the business financial position.
          (Moneyinstructor.com)

          Consistency – The same method of reporting should be used to ensure that any differences
          in the financial position between reporting periods is as a result of change in operating and
          not changes in the way items are accounted for. (Moneyinstructor.com)

          The accounting process consists of the following groups of functions listed in illustration 1.2




                                                  Illustration 1.2

          Accountants observe many events (or activities) and identify and measure in financial terms
          (dollars) those events considered evidence of economic activity. (Often, these three
          functions are collectively referred to as analyse.) The purchase and sale of goods and
          services are economic events.

          Next, the economic events are recorded, classified into meaningful groups, and
          summarized.

          Accountants report on economic events (or business activity) by preparing financial
          statements and special reports. Often accountants interpret these statements and reports
          for various groups such as management, investors, and creditors. Interpretation may


Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 24
involve determining how the business is performing compared to prior years and other
          similar businesses.

          TOPIC SUMMARY
          In this unit we dealt with accounting assumptions, principles and conventions. These form
          the basis of the General Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and support the true and
          fair view approach of preparing financial statements.




Introduction to Accounting                                                               Page | 25
TOPIC 1.4 THE ACCOUNTING EQUATION AND BALANCE SHEET
          INTRODUCTION
         The whole of accounting is based a very simple idea called the accounting equation. It
         sounds complicated, but in fact it is easy to understand. This equation is expressed in the
         Balance Sheet and states the following:

                                    Assets = Liability + Owners Equity

          OBJECTIVES
         Upon completion of this topic, you should be able to:

         1. State the basic accounting equation
         2. Describe the relationship of the accounting equation to the balance sheet.
         3. understand what is meant by assets, liabilities and owners’ equity

         The balance sheet, sometimes called the statement of financial position, lists the business’s
         assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity (including dollar amounts) as of a specific moment in
         time. That specific moment is the close of business on the date of the balance sheet. A
         balance sheet is like a photograph; it captures the financial position of a business at a
         particular point in time. As you study about the assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity
         contained in a balance sheet, you will understand why this financial statement provides
         information about the solvency of the business.

                                               Catina’s Beauty Saloon
                                                    Balance Sheet
                                              As at 31st December 2010

                             Assets (in $)                            Liabilities & Equity (in $)
         Cash                                     10,000    Accounts Payable (Creditors)             1,600
         Accounts Receivables (Debtors)            1,700    Notes Payable                            2,000
         Motor Vehicle                            20,000    Total Liabilities                        3,600
         Equipment                                 3,500    Equity
         Cash at Bank                             15,000    Capital                                 25,600
                                                            Retained Income                         21,000
                                                  50,200                                            50,200

                                             Illustration 1.3

         Let’s examine the items in the Balance Sheet in illustration 1.3. It shows that the total assets
         should equal the total liabilities and owners’ equity.

         Assets as stated in Topic 1.1 are things of value owned by the business. They are also called
         the resources of the business. Assets have value because a business can use or exchange
         them to produce the services or products of the business. Assets are the economic
         resources of the entity, and include such items as cash, accounts receivable (amounts owed
         to a firm by its customers), inventories, land, buildings, equipment, and even intangible

Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 26
assets like patents and other legal rights and claims. Assets are presumed to entail probable
         future economic benefits to the owner.

         In illustration 1.3 the assets of Catina’s Beauty Salon amount to USD 50,200. Her assets
         consist of cash, accounts receivable (amounts due from customers for services previously
         rendered), Motor Vehicle, equipment and cash at bank.

         Liabilities are the debts owed by a business. Typically, a business must pay its debts by
         certain dates. A business incurs many of its liabilities by purchasing items on credit.
         Liabilities are amounts owed to others relating to loans, extensions of credit, and other
         obligations arising in the course of business.

         Catina’s Beauty Saloon liabilities consist of accounts payable (amounts owed to suppliers for
         previous purchases) and notes payable (written promises to pay a specific sum of money)
         totalling USD 3,600.

         Catina’s Beauty Saloon is a sole proprietorship. The owners’ interest in the business is
         referred to as Owners equity. Owners' equity is the owner's "interest" in the business. It is
         sometimes called net assets, because it is equivalent to assets minus liabilities for a
         particular business.

         Catina’s equity consists of (1) USD 25,600 capital investment and (2) retained income of
         USD21, 000. Capital stock shows the amount of the owners’ investment in the business.

         We will discuss these items later in the course. At this point, simply note that the balance
         sheet heading includes the name of the organization and the title and date of the statement
         (notice that the dollar amount of the total assets is equal to the claims on or interest in
         those assets). The balance sheet shows these claims under the heading “Liabilities and
         Equity”.

          THE ACCOUNTING EQUATION
          The fundamental accounting equation is the backbone of the accounting and reporting
          system. It is central to understanding a key financial statement known as the balance sheet
          (sometimes called the statement of financial position). The accounting equation states:

                               Assets = Liabilities + Owners' Equity

                                                Activity 1 – C
            Using the accounting equation can you calculate the missing figures below
                 1                $25,200                                            $10,100
                 2                                         $17,350                   $21,750
                 3                $71,350                  $29,100




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 27
From activity 1 – C above, you should have determined that the accounting equation can
           be expressed in different forms. Let’s have a look. The accounting equation can be
           expressed as:

                                       Liabilities = Assets – Owner’s Equity

           So if we use question 1 in the activity above then your liabilities figure should be $15, 100

                                 $25, 200 (Assets) – $10,100 (Owner’s Equity)

           The accounting equation could also be expressed as:

                                       Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity

           In question 2 above, your Asset figure should be $39,100

                                  17,350 (Liabilities) + 21, 750 (Owner’s Equity)

           Another method of expressing the accounting equation is:

                                      Owner’s Equity = Assets – Liabilities

          From the question 3 (in the activity above) you should have calculated $42, 250

                                      71, 350 (Assets) - 29, 100 (Liabilities)

          HOW TRANSACTIONS IMPACT THE ACCOUNTING EQUATION
          Each passing transaction or event brings about a change in the overall financial condition.
          Business activity will impact various asset, liability, and/or equity accounts; but, they will
          not disturb the equality of the accounting equation. So, how does this happen? To reveal
          the answer to this question, let's look at four specific transactions for Catina’s Beauty
          Saloon. You will see how each transaction impacts the individual asset, liability, and equity
          accounts, without upsetting the basic equality of the overall balance sheet.

          Business transactions are measurable events that affect the financial condition of a
          business.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 28
1. Purchase an Asset by Cash

          On 12 January 2011, Catina purchased addition equipment valued $2,000 by cash.

                                            Catina’s Beauty Saloon
                                                 Balance Sheet
                                           As at 31st December 2010

                        Assets (in $)                              Liabilities & Equity (in $)
         Cash                                   8,000    Accounts Payable (Creditors)             1,600
         Accounts Receivables (Debtors)         1,700    Notes Payable                            2,000
         Motor Vehicle                         20,000    Total Liabilities                        3,600
         Equipment                              5,500    Equity
         Cash at Bank                          15,000    Capital                                 25,600
                                                         Retained Income                         21,000
                                               50,200                                            50,200

                                            Illustration 1.4
         In illustration 1.4, you can see that the cash account has reduced by $2000 and the
         equipment increased by the same amount. However, the balance sheet still remained
         balanced.

         2. Purchase stock on Credit

         On 17th January 2011, she purchased stock for use in the Saloon on credit from Hair
         Suppliers Ltd $5,000.

                                            Catina’s Beauty Saloon
                                                 Balance Sheet
                                           As at 31st December 2010

                        Assets (in $)                              Liabilities & Equity (in $)
         Cash                                   8,000    Accounts Payable (Creditors)             6,600
         Accounts Receivables (Debtors)         1,700    Notes Payable                            2,000
         Motor Vehicle                         20,000    Total Liabilities                        3,600
         Equipment                              5,500    Equity
         Cash at Bank                          15,000    Capital                                 25,600
         Stock                                  5,000    Retained Income                         21,000
                                               55,200                                            55,200

                                          Illustration 1.5

         Observe the difference in Accounts Payable and inclusion of Stock in illustration 1.5 above
         but the balance sheet still remain equal.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 29
3. Payment of a Liability

         On the 21st January, 2011 Catina made a payment to her suppliers $1,000 by cheque.

                                              Catina’s Beauty Saloon
                                                   Balance Sheet
                                             As at 31st December 2010

                             Assets (in $)                            Liabilities & Equity (in $)
         Cash                                      8,000    Accounts Payable (Creditors)             5,600
         Accounts Receivables (Debtors)            1,700    Notes Payable                            2,000
         Motor Vehicle                            20,000    Total Liabilities                        3,600
         Equipment                                 5,500    Equity
         Cash at Bank                             14,000    Capital                                 25,600
         Stock                                     5,000    Retained Income                         21,000
                                                  54,200                                            54,200

                                                   Illustration 1.6

         Changes have been made to the Accounts Payable and the Cash at Bank account to reflect
         the transaction, however, the Balance still remains balanced.

         4. Collection of an Asset

         On the 28th January 2011, J Brown one of Catina’s debtors paid her amount owning $500 by
         cash.
                                           Catina’s Beauty Saloon
                                                Balance Sheet
                                          As at 31st December 2010

                        Assets (in $)                                 Liabilities & Equity (in $)
         Cash                                      8,500    Accounts Payable (Creditors)             5,600
         Accounts Receivables (Debtors)            1,200    Notes Payable                            2,000
         Motor Vehicle                            20,000    Total Liabilities                        3,600
         Equipment                                 5,500    Equity
         Cash at Bank                             14,000    Capital                                 25,600
         Stock                                     5,000    Retained Income                         21,000
                                                  54,200                                            54,200

                                             Illustration 1.7

         The cash at Bank is affected whenever payment is made by cheque. Since the cheque is a
         means of depositing or withdrawing from your bank account. Again adjustments are made
         to the accounts affected by the transaction and the Balance Sheet.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 30
Self-Reflection Question

              Take this opportunity to review the topics in this unit and ask yourself the
              following questions.

              1. Do I understand how a transaction affects items on the Balance Sheet?

              2. Do I understand the various methods in which the accounting equation can be
              expressed?

               3. Am I able to make adjustments to my Balance Sheet after business
              transactions?




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 31
UNIT REFERENCES
              1. Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.).
                 England, Pearson Education Limited.
              2. Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations.
                 Macmillan Publishers Ltd.
              3. http://www.differencebetween.net/business/difference-between-accounting-and-
                 bookkeeping-2/#ixzz1GfqZ4iSs
              4. http://knol.google.com/k/nowmaster-accounting/what-are-the-accounting-
                 concepts-and/y2cary3n6mng/11#
              5. http://www.moneyinstructor.com/lesson/accountingconcepts.asp
              6. http://www.scribd.com/doc/9295030/Accounting-Concepts-and-Conventions
              7. http://docs.globaltext.terry.uga.edu:8095/anonymous/webdav/Accounting%20Prin
                 ciples/Accounting%20Principles%20Vol.%201.pdf
              8. http://www.principlesofaccounting.com/chapter%201.htm
              9. http://www.ehow.com/about_4679149_purpose-accounting_.html




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 32
UNIT SUMMARY
          ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES

                                               Unit Assignment

                                             Catina’s Beauty Saloon
                                                  Balance Sheet
                                             As at 28th January, 2011

             Assets                           $  Liabilities and Equity                          $
             Cash                          8,500 Accounts Payable (Creditors)                  5,600
             Account Receivables (Debtors) 1,200 Notes Payable                                 2,000
             Motor Vehicle                20,000 Total Liabilities                             7,600
             Equipment                     5,500 Equity
             Cash at Bank                14,000 Capital                                       25,600
             Stock                         5,000 Retained Income                              21,000
                                          54,200                                              54,200

            Catina’s Beauty Saloon had the following business transactions in the month of
            February 2011. Make the necessary adjustment to the accounts and update her
            Balance Sheet as at 28th February 2011.

            Feb 1    Catina deposited $5,000 cash into her Cash at bank account

            Feb 3    she purchased stock $2,500 by cheque

            Feb 7    paid a cheque of $500 to a creditor'

            Feb 12 A debtor paid Catina $300 by cheque

            Feb 15 Received a Loan from L. Stennett $10,000 by cheque

            Feb 20 bought equipment $8,000 by cheque


          SUMMARY
          If you understand how accounting information is prepared, you will be in an even stronger
          position when faced with a management decision based on accounting information. The
          accounting process provides financial data for a broad range of individuals whose objectives
          in studying the data vary widely. Reliable information is necessary before you can make a
          sound decision involving the allocation of scarce resources. Accounting information is
          valuable because it is used to evaluate the financial consequences of various alternatives.

          Accountants can reduce uncertainty by using professional judgment to quantify the future
          financial impact of taking action or delaying action. Although accounting information plays
          a significant role in reducing uncertainty within your business, it also provides financial data

Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 33
for persons outside the business. This information tells how management has discharged its
          responsibility for protecting and managing the business's resources.

          Accounting is often confused with bookkeeping (discussed earlier). Bookkeeping is a
          mechanical process that records the routine economic activities of a business. Accounting
          includes bookkeeping but goes well beyond it in scope. Accountants analyse and interpret
          financial information, prepare financial statements, conduct audits, design accounting
          systems, prepare special business and financial studies, prepare forecasts and budgets, and
          provide tax services.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 34
UNIT 1 SUGGESTED ANSWERS
                                            Activity 1 – B

Complete the illustration below to demonstrate your understanding of the types of accounting and the
users of the accounting information using examples.




                                                     Activity 1 – C

            Using the accounting equation can you calculate the missing figures below

                  Assets                      Liabilities                Owners Equity

                        $                        $                            $

            1.     25, 200                    15,100                         10,100

            2.     39,100                     17,350                         21,750

            3.    71, 350                     29,100                         42,250




  Introduction to Accounting                                                              Page | 35
UNIT 1 – ASSIGNMENT ANSWERS


              Cash 8,500 – 5,000 = 3500

              Bank 14,000 + 5,000 - 2,500 – 5,00 + 300 + 10,000 – 8,000 = 18, 300

              Stock 5,000 + 2, 500 = 7,500

              Accounts Payable 5,600 – 500 = 5,100

              Accounts Receivable 1,200 – 300 = 900

              Notes Payable 2, 000 + 10, 000 = 12,000

              Equipment 5,500 + 8,000 = 13,500



                                              Catina’s Beauty Saloon

                                                   Balance Sheet

                                             As at 28th February 2011



           Assets                          $      Liabilities and Equity                 $
           Cash                          3,500    Accounts Payable (Creditors)         5,100
           Account Receivables (Debtors) 900       Notes Payable                      12,000
           Motor Vehicle                20,000    Total Liabilities                   17,100
           Equipment                    13,500    Equity
           Cash at Bank                18,300     Capital                             25,600
           Stock                       _7,500     Retained Income                     21,000
                                        63,700                                        63,700




          NEXT STEP
          You have come to the end of Unit One. In Unit Two we will look at the Double Entry
          System of Accounting.




Introduction to Accounting                                                              Page | 36
UNIT TWO – DOUBLE ENTRY SYSTEM OF ACOUNTING

    INTRODUCTION
           In Unit One, we illustrated the accounting cycle, we also examined the accounting equation
           and how each transaction affects items in the Balance Sheet. In Unit Two we will expand
           on the steps in the accounting cycle. We will begin by journalizing the information
           gathered from our source documents then continue with an exploration of the double
           entry system of bookkeeping.

           There are two basic kinds of bookkeeping: single entry bookkeeping and double entry
           bookkeeping. In the case of single entry bookkeeping each transaction is carried to the
           debit column or the credit column. In the case of double entry bookkeeping we can find
           two entries for each transactions carried to the Ledger. One entry is carried to the credit
           side and the other to the debit side. This is done in the way that the two entries can be
           checked. Double entry bookkeeping is the fundamental concept underlying accountancy.
           All accounting transactions should be recorded using the double entry system.

           After recording your business transactions in your ledger accounts, the different accounts
           will be balanced and the balances used to generate your trial balance for the period.

    OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

           1. Demonstrate the use of double-entry and accounting systems.
           2. Record transactions and events.
           3. Apply double entry bookkeeping to a list of transactions.
           4. Use the account as the basic classifying and storage unit for accounting information.
           5. Express the effects of business transactions in terms of debits and credits to different
              types of accounts.
           6. Record the effects of business transactions in a journal.
           7. Post journal entries to the accounts in the ledger.
           8. Prepare a trial balance to test the equality of debits and credits in the journalizing and
              posting process.

    UNIT READINGS
           The instructor will provide a list of readings.

    ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES
           The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions.




 Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 37
TOPIC 2.1 BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY
          INTRODUCTION
          As we take a more in depth look at the accounting cycle we will examine various source
          documents and how the information in these documents are transferred to the books of
          original entry. You will also have looked at the different books of original entry.


          OBJECTIVES
          Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

              1.   Identify different forms of source documents.
              2.   Transfer information from the source document to the books of original entry.
              3.   Examine the various books of original entry.
              4.   State the use of the books of original entry.

          SOURCE DOCUMENTS
          Before we look any further at the books of original entry, let us look at the source
          documents that provide the information to be recorded in the books of original entry.

          A source document describes all the basic facts of the transaction, such as the amount of
          the transaction; to whom the transaction was made; the purpose of the transaction and the
          date of the transaction. Some source documents include:

          Source Document 1 - Invoices

          Let us look at the invoice in illustration 2.1 below. An invoice is a document that contains a
          detailed description of the item sold, unit price and the terms and conditions of the sale.

          The invoice is numbered and gives a detailed description of the item(s) sold or purchased:
          the quantity, the list price per unit, trade discounts allowed and the net cost of the item.
          Also, included on the invoice will be the terms of payment and the name and address of the
          customer and the name and address of the issuing firm. A number of copies are usually
          made and routed to different departments within the issuing firm.

          There are two types of invoices:

              1. Purchases Invoices - reflects credit purchases of stock (Holdip and Lamorell 2010)
              2. Sales Invoices - reflects credit sales of stock (Holdip and Lamorell 2010)




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 38
Your Purchase Order 12/B/124
                                                                   AJ Wholesale
                                                                     Factory Road           Name and address of
                                                                        St. John's        supplier (seller)

                                                                          Antigua

                                                                                          Date of transaction
                                                                         7-Sep-06
           To:               MJ Retailers
           Buyer             Hilda Davis Drive
                             St. John's
                                                                                                    Invoice number
                                      INVOICE NO. 1654
           Quantity                                    Per Unit          Total
                                                            $                $
                      7      cases fruit juices              35.00          245.00
                      4      cases ideal milk                24.00           96.00

                                                                            341.00                  Sub-Total
                             less 20% Trade Discount                          68.20
                                                                                                    Total
                                                                            272.80
                                                                  Discount given to encourage person to buy in bulk


                                                  Illustration 2.1

          Discounts

          A discount is a reduction in the price of an item. In order to encourage prompt payment by
          customers, cash discounts may be offered. Customers are allowed a specified percentage
          off the amount payable if paid within a stated time period. Discount Received is an
          allowance you receive for making prompt payment for the goods and services you receive
          from your suppliers. Discount Allowed is the allowance you give to your customers for
          making prompt payment for the goods and services they received from your business.

          Trade discounts are reductions in the invoice price of the goods and are given to encourage
          trade and increase the volume of good purchased. Trade discounts are not recorded in the
          ledger accounts although they may be noted in the relevant day book. Cash discounts are
          recorded in the accounting records

          Source Document 2 - Debit Notes

          A Debit Note is sent by the business to the supplier giving details of a claim for an allowance
          in respect to goods returned. (Wood and Robinson 2007) (Illustrated below).




Introduction to Accounting                                                                              Page | 39
MJ Retailers
                                                                               Hilda Davis Drive
                                                                                      St. John's
                                                                                        Antigua

                                                                                          26-Sep-06
                         To:                A.M Bryden
                                            Fort Road
                                            St. John's

                                                DEBIT NOTE NO. 237
                         Quantity                              Per Unit                    Total
                                                                    $                          $
                                        2   cases fruit juices          35.00                 70.00
                                        1   case ideal milk             24.00                 24.00
                                                                                              94.00


                                                     Illustration 2.2

          Source Document 3 - Credit Notes

          The supplier will issue a credit note to the customer (debtor) showing the amount of the
          agreed reduction (Wood and Robinson 2007) (Illustration 2.3)

                                                                             MJ Retailers
                                                                        Hilda Davis Drive
                                                                               St. John's
                                                                                 Antigua

                                                                              23-Sep-06
                   To:              Malika Diantha
                                    Green Bay
                                    St. John's

                                        CREDIT NOTE NO. 1235
                   Quantity                            Per Unit             Total
                                                           $                        $
                               2    case ideal milk        24.00                        48.00
                               1    case tomato paste      32.00                        32.00
                                                                                        80.00
                                    Less 10 % trade
                                    discount                                             8.00
                                                                                        72.00



                                            Illustration 2.3




Introduction to Accounting                                                                            Page | 40
Source Document 4 - Cash Receipts

          The cash receipt is a simple document of a transaction that is often issued at the time of the
          completion of a sale. Many businesses issue cash receipt as a matter of course. While the
          printed document is normally a simple record of the transaction, some examples of the cash
          receipt can be very detailed. (www.wisegeek.com) (Illustrated below 2.4)

                                                                                Number 00125
                                                                               Date 21 Sept 2006


                                           Cash Sales Receipt
                       Name          ___________Makayla Adora______________________
                       Address      _____________12 Old Road_______________________
                                    _______________Urlings__________________________

                                                                     On
                        Sold By     Cash    C.O.D      Charge      Account           Paid Out

                        Quantity           Description                 Price         Amount
                        2                   Cases milk                 24.00          48.00


                                                                  Subtotal            48.00
                                     Received by                  Tax
                             __________________________           Total               48.00


                                                    Illustration 2.4

          Source Document 5 - Cheque Stubs

          A cheque instrument (usually a piece of paper) that orders a payment of money. The
          person writing the cheque, the drawer, usually has a chequing account where their money
          was previously deposited. The drawer writes the various details including the money
          amount, date, and a payee on the cheque, and signs it, ordering their bank, known as the
          drawee, to pay this person or company the amount of money stated. (Source: Wikipedia)




Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 41
1.   drawee, the financial institution where the cheque can be presented for payment
          2.   payee
          3.   date of issue
          4.   amount of currency
          5.   drawer, the person or entity making the cheque
          6.   signature of drawer
          7.   Machine readable routing information

          Other Source Documents

          Below are some additional examples of source documents:

               1. Petty Cash Vouchers – records of claims of small expenditures (Holdip and Lamorell
                  2010).
               2. Time Cards – record of hours worked by employees (Holdip and Lamorell 2010).
               3. Stock Cards – records of materials etc. Purchased (Holdip and Lamorell 2010).
               4. Bank Statements – records of transactions with the bank (Holdip and Lamorell
                  2010).
               5. Cash Bills/Invoices – given to customers and received from suppliers as proof of
                  purchase. (Holdip and Lamorell 2010).

          BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY
          Now that you know what source documents are you can now move on to the books of
          original entry.

          The books of original entry consist of five Journals or Day Books and the Cash Book.

          1. Sales Journal (Day Book) is used to record the credit sales of goods normally traded by
             the business. The information from the sales invoices is transferred to the sales day
             book. It is a list of all of your Accounts Receivables (Debtors).

          2. Purchase Journal (Day Book) is used to record the credit purchases of goods normally
             traded by the business. The information from the purchases invoice is transferred to
             the purchases journal or day book. It is a list of the Accounts Payable (creditors).

Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 42
3. Purchases Return Journal (Day Book) records all of the purchased returned to your
             suppliers. These may be returned for various reasons (wrong size, colour, damaged
             etc.). To indicated that goods were returned to the suppliers a debit note is used the
             information from the debit note is then transferred to the Purchased Return Day Book.

          4. Sales Return Day Book records all your sales that have been returned to you by your
             customers. Your customer is issued a credit note to indicate what was returned and
             the allowance given for the return. This information is then transferred to the sales
             return day book.

          5. The General Journal has several uses these include entries for the following
                 opening entry - this is a list of assets, liabilities, and capital used to open a new set
                of accounting books
                the purchase and sale of fixed assets for cash and on credit
                writing-off bad debts
                 the correction of errors
                 the creation of provision for bad and doubtful debits
                the creation of provision for depreciation
                adjusting entries for accruals and prepayments
                closing entries
                unusual one-of-a-kind transactions

          6. Cash Book records all the cash transactions of your business. This includes transactions
              paid for by cash or by cheque. It also records an allowance given or received as a cash
              discount.

          The journals generally contain the following columns:

              1. Date - day, month, year
              2. Details/Particulars - account titles
              3. Folio - this is a reference code showing the ledger page to which the entry will be
                 posted.
              4. Amount - the net monetary amount shown invoice or other source on the
                 document.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 43
Books of Original Entry        Source Documents            Types of Transactions

              Sales Journal                  Sales Invoice               Credit sales of stock

              Purchases Journal              Purchases Invoice           Credit purchases of stock

              Purchases Return               Debit Note                  Stock returned to suppliers

              Sales Return                   Credit Note                 Stock returned by customers

              General Journal                Invoices, bills, vouchers   All other types of transactions

              *Cash Book                     Receipts, bills, cheque     All cash and bank transactions

              *Petty Cash Book               Petty Cash Vouchers         Small payments and receipts

              *These books/journals all have the same format or layout with the exception of the cash
              and petty cash book.
                                                      Table 2.1
                                             (Holdip and Lamorell 2010)

          Table 2.1 above shows the link between the books of original entry and the source
          documents. You can now have a further look at the links between the source documents
          and the books of original entry.

          PURCHASE ORDER AND PURCHASE INVOICE
          A purchase invoice is a document that is issued from a seller to a buyer. It is sent to the
          customer who has purchased a product or service. This can also be called a bill or a billing
          statement and it is generally a document that details the services that have been or will be
          provided (or the items purchased), quantity, price, and other details. By accepting an
          invoice, a buyer is basically making a contractual agreement to make the purchase.

          A purchase order is a document that is issued from a buyer to a seller. A buyer who is
          interested in making a purchase of products or services sends the document to the seller. A
          purchase order will also detail the services or the items to be ordered or purchased,
          including the quantity, price and other details. A purchase order also serves as a contractual
          agreement. The buyer is agreeing to make the purchase, and the seller, upon accepting the
          purchase order, is agreeing to provide the goods or services according to the specifics in the
          purchase order.

          After placing an order with the selected supplier, the supplier sends the purchasing firm a
          copy of the purchase invoice. This is then used to record the transaction in the Purchases
          Journal. The purchase invoice is then filed for future reference. The suppliers listed in the
          Purchases Journal are called creditors, because the business owes them money.


Introduction to Accounting                                                                       Page | 44
SALES ORDER AND SALES INVOICE
          Sales orders indicate that the seller of the goods or services needs to take action (i.e., to
          complete the order). Usually this involves finding the product, packaging it, etc., or setting
          up a meeting so that services can be rendered.

          Sales Invoices indicate that buyer needs to take action. This typically means that the buyer
          needs to compensate the business monetarily for the products or services received.


                                                 Sales Journal
                                                              Folio
              Date                   Details                   No.       Invoice No.       Amount




          GENERAL JOURNAL
          The General Journal is one of the first books in which a transaction is recorded. In some
          cases, all transactions are first recorded in the General Journal. In larger firms, where other
          books or original entry are used, the General Journal is restricted to only recording specific
          kinds of transactions. The General Journal is used to record transactions which cannot be
          recorded in any other book of original entry, or unusual one -time transactions. The process
          of entering transaction in the General Journal is called journalising.

          The journals generally contain the following columns:

          1. Date - day, month, year
          2. Details/Particulars - account titles
          3. Folio - this is a reference code showing the ledger page to which the entry will be
             posted.
          4. Debit – the monetary amount to be debited is shown,
          5. Credit - the monetary amount to be credited is shown.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 45
General Journal
              Date                         Details                    Folio No.       Debit          Credit
             2006                                                                       $              $
                           Name of account to be debited
                           Name of account to be credited
                           Narrative
                              A Narrative is a brief description of an entry in the journal.

                 CASH BOOK
                 There are often several cash accounts because they serve different purposes. The Cash
                 in Bank account represents the checking account that processes deposits, checks and
                 memorandum items. The Cash Short and Over account is used to record any variance
                 by sales clerks. The Cash on Hand Fund is used to provide change to conduct business
                 with customers. The Petty Cash Fund is used to pay for small items with cash. Each of
                 these cash accounts needs to be strictly controlled to prevent mishandling. The cash
                 book replaces the need to have a separate cash account and cash at bank account since
                 they both merged to form the cash book.


                                                     Cash Book

Date   Details    Folio     Discount    Cash    Bank        Date   Details   Folio   Discount   Cash    Bank

2006                             $         $         $     2006                         $        $         $




           WORKED EXAMPLE
           Let us now look at the source documents and books of original entry at work by examining
           the worked example.

           MJ Retailers started business on 1 September 2006 with the following assets and liabilities

                          Cash                        $ 150

                          Bank                        $ 800

                          Motor Van                   $ 2 500

                          Loan from J Smith           $ 1 500

                          Stock of Goods              $ 1 200


 Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 46
He also had the following source documents:

          Purchase Invoices


                             Your Purchase Order 12/B/124
                             AJ Wholesale
                             Factory Road
                             St. John's
                             Antigua

                             7-Sep-06
                             To:      MJ Retailers
                                      Hilda Davis Drive
                                      St. John's
                             INVOICE NO. 1654
                             Quantity                              Per Unit Total
                                                                   $        $
                             7         cases fruit juices            35.00 245.00
                             4         cases ideal milk              24.00 96.00

                                                                            341.00
                                       less 20% Trade Discount               68.20
                                                                            272.80
                       7 September - Purchase goods on credit form AJ Wholesale $272.80

                      Your Purchase Order 12/B/123
                                                                             A M Byden
                                                                              Fort Road
                                                                              St. John's
                                                                                Antigua

                                                                              09-Sep-06
                      To:            MJ Retailers
                                     Hilda Davis Drive
                                     St. John's
                                                INVOICE NO. 234
                      Quantity                                    Per Unit    Total
                                                                       $          $
                                 5 cases fruit juices                   35.00    175.00
                                 3 cases ideal milk                     24.00     72.00
                                 2 cases tomato paste                   32.00     64.00
                                                                                 311.00
                                     less 20% Trade Discount                      62.20
                                                                                 248.80

                       9 September - Purchased goods on credit from A M Byden $248.80


Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 47
Sales Invoices
                        Your Sales Order 12/B/123
                        MJ Retailers
                        Hilda Davis Drive
                        St. John's
                        Antigua

                        25-Sep-06
                        To:              Malika Diantha
                                         Green Bay
                                         St. John's

                        INVOICE NO. 5324

                        Quantity                                  Per Unit          Total
                                                                  $                 $
                        6                cases fruit juices       36.50             219.00
                        3                cases ideal milk         23.95             71.85
                        4                cases tomato paste       33.00             132.00
                                                                                    422.85


                            25 September - Sold goods on credit to Malika Diantha $422.85

                        Your sales Order 12/B/124
                                                                                        MJ Retailers
                                                                                   Hilda Davis Drive
                                                                                          St. John's
                                                                                            Antigua

                                                                                         27-Sep-06
                        To:                Oren Peters
                                           Pigotts
                                           St. John's
                                                      INVOICE NO. 249

                            Quantity                                    Per Unit           Total
                                                                           $                 $

                                 3         cases fruit juices                35.00           105.00
                                 2         cases ideal milk                  24.00            48.00
                                 3         cases tomato paste                32.00            96.00
                                                                                             249.00

                               27 September - Sold goods on credit to Oren Peters $249.00




  Introduction to Accounting                                                                       Page | 48
Debit Notes

                                                                                    J Retailers
                                                                             Hilda Davis Drive
                                                                                     St. John's
                                                                                       Antigua
                                                                                    16-Sep-06

                  To:            A.M Byden
                                 Fort Road
                                 St. John's

                                               DEBIT NOTE NO. 236


               Quantity                                  Per Unit               Total

                                                                    $                   $
                      2          cases fruit juices                     35.00               70.00
                      1          case ideal milk                        24.00               24.00
                                                                                            94.00



                  7 September - MJ Retailers returned goods to AM Byden $94

                                                                                    J Retailers
                                                                             Hilda Davis Drive
                                                                                     St. John's
                                                                                       Antigua
                                                                                    16-Sep-06

                To:                           AJ Wholesale
                                              Long Street
                                              St. John's

                                               DEBIT NOTE NO. 237

                Quantity                                                Per Unit         Total
                                                                              $            $
                             1                cases fruit juices                   35.00 35.00
                             1                case ideal milk                      24.00 24.00
                                                                                         59.00


                      25 September - MJ Retailers returned goods to AJ Wholesale $59




Introduction to Accounting                                                                          Page | 49
Credit Notes
                                                                             MJ Retailers
                                                                        Hilda Davis Drive
                                                                                St. John's
                                                                                  Antigua
                                                                               23-Sep-06
                 To:             Malika Diantha
                                 Green Bay
                                 St. John's

                                        CREDIT NOTE NO. 1235

                 Quantity                                    Per Unit      Total

                                                                 $                 $
                         2       case ideal milk                  24.00                48.00
                         1       case tomato paste                32.00                32.00
                                                                                       80.00
                                 Less 10 % trade
                                 discount                                               8.00
                                                                                       72.00


               23 September - A customer Malika Diantha returned goods to MJ Retailers $72.00

                                                                             MJ Retailers
                                                                        Hilda Davis Drive
                                                                                St. John's
                                                                                  Antigua
                                                                               29-Sep-06
                   To:            Oren Peters
                                  Pigotts
                                  St. John's
                                         CREDIT NOTE NO. 1236

                   Quantity                                    Per Unit   Total
                                                                   $            $
                               3 cases fruit juices                 35.00      105.00
                               2 case ideal milk                    24.00        48.00
                                                                               153.00
                                  Less 10 % trade discount                       15.30
                                                                               137.70

                   29 September - Oren Peters returned goods $137.70 to MJ Retailers




  Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 50
Cash Receipt

                                                                      Number 00125
                                                                     Date 21 Sept 2006

                                      Cash Sales Receipt

         Name                  ___________Makayla Adora______________________
         Address              _____________12 Old Road_______________________
                              _______________Urlings__________________________

           Sold By       Cash     C.O.D        Charge   On Account          Paid Out

          Quantity               Description               Price            Amount
          2                       Cases milk               24.00             48.00


                                                        Subtotal              48.00
                       Received by                      Tax
               __________________________               Total                 48.00


                                          21 September - Cash Sales $48

                                                                      Number 00105
                                                                     Date 30 Sept 2006

                                      Cash Sales Receipt
        Name                  ___________Prosper Thomas______________________
        Address               ___________10 anchorage Road __________________
                              _____________Point Edge________________________

          Sold By      Cash      C.O.D         Charge   On Account           Paid Out

        Quantity              Description                  Price             Amount
        3             Cases milk                           24.00              72.00
        1             Cases Tomato Paste                   32.00              32.00

                                                        Subtotal              104.00
                      Received by                       Tax
              __________________________                Total                 104.00


                                          30 September - Cash Sales $104


Introduction to Accounting                                                               Page | 51
Cheques


          Dollar Bank
          High Street
          St. John’s
          Antigua                                                   Date 25 September 2006


          PAY                             A M Byden                                $ 100.00

                              One Hundred

          MJ Retailers
          Hilda Davis Drive
          St. John’s
          Antigua                                                               MJohn              .
          O00-0009-00987-0124


                               25 September - Paid A M Byden $100 by cheque


          Dollar Bank
          High Street
          St. John’s
          Antigua                                                   Date 27 September 2006


          PAY                             AJ Wholesale                               $ 75.00

                              Seventy-Five                                                     .

          MJ Retailers
          Hilda Davis Drive
          St. John’s
          Antigua                                                               MJohn              .
          O00-0009-00987-0125


                              27 September - Paid AJ Wholesale $75 by cheque.

          Record the above source documents in the Books of Original Entry for MJ Retailers.


          General Journal

Introduction to Accounting                                                               Page | 52
Let us begin with the General Journal. Remember that one of uses of the General Journal is
          to record opening entries of the business. The opening entries for MJ Retailers are
          recorded in the Journal below


                                                   General Journal
            Date                         Details                   Folio No.      Debit          Credit
            2006                                                                      $              $
           1Sept         Cash                                      CB            150.00
                       Bank                                        CB            800.00
                       Motor Van                                   GL          2 500.00
                         Loan: J Smith                             PL                         1 500.00
                       Equipment                                   GL          1 200.00
                       *Capital                                    GL                         3 150.00
                       Assets and Liabilities as at 1 Sept 2006                4 650.00       4 650.00
                       *The capital figure is calculated by using the accounting equation.

        The figures in this general journal will be transferred as the opening balances in the
        respective accounts in the ledgers.

         Sales Journal

         The Sales Journal records the information from the sales invoice. It is a list of our customers
         who purchase our goods and services on credit. The total of the sales journal is transferred
         to the sales account in the general ledger.


                                                    Sales Journal
                                                                  Folio
              Date                       Details                   No.    Invoice No.     Amount
             2006                                                                                $

             Sept 25      Malika Diantha                          SL           5324          422.85

             Sept 27     Oren Peters                              SL           249           249.00

                          Total Credit Sales for the month        GL                         671.85




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 53
Purchase Journal

          The Purchases Journal is used to record all stock or inventory purchased on credit for
          resale. It lists our suppliers we purchase goods and services from on credit. The total of the
          purchases journal is transferred to the purchases account in the general ledger.


                                                 Purchases Journal
              Date                          Details               Folio No. Invoice No.           Amount
            2006                                                                                     $

            Sept 7           AJ Wholesale                                           1654            272.80

            Sept 9           A M Byden                                              234             248.80

                         Total Credit Purchases for the month                                       521.60

         Sales Return Journal

         Information from your credit notes is recorded in your sales return journal. The total of this
         journal is then transferred to the sales return account in the general ledger.


                                              Sales Return Journal
              Date                    Details               Folio No.    Note No.          Amount
             2006                                                                             $

            Sept 23     Malika Diantha                      SL              1235                   72.00

            Sept 29     Oren Peters                         SL              1236                  137.70

                        Total Sales Return                  GL                                    209.70




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 54
Purchases Return Journal

          The debit note information is recorded in the purchases return journal and the total is
          transferred to the purchases return account in the general ledger.


                                              Purchase Return Journal
               Date                      Details            Folio No.      Note No.        Amount
                                                                                               $

              Sept 17    A M Byden                          PL                236                    94.00

              Sept 25    AJ Wholesale                       PL                237                    59.00

                             Total Purchases Returns        GL                                      153.00



          Cash Book

         The Cash Book is special in a number of ways:

              1. All cash and bank transactions are recorded in the cash book.
              2. Entries are made in the cash book on almost a daily basis and therefore these
                 entries are similar to journal entries.
              3. The cash book acts as a book of original entry or journal and is also part of the
                 double entry system.
              4. The cash book has its own particular format, which is a columnar T-Account format.
              5. Cash discounts allowed and received are recorded in the cash book put posted to
                 accounts in the general ledger.
              6. The cash book is used strictly for transactions that involve the immediate transfer of
                 cash, which makes it easier to track the inflows and outflows of cash.

          The Cash Book is written up from information provided by several source documents, which
          include

                  Cash bills and receipts
                  cheques
                  cash vouchers
                  credit and debit card receipts




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 55
Bank Statement Cash Book

 Date     Details    Folio   Discount   Cash      Bank     Date       Details      Folio   Discount   Cash   Bank

 2006                           $         $        $       2006                               $        $          $

01 Sept   Balance    b/d                150.00   800.00   25 Sept   A M Byden                                100.00

21 Sept   Sales                          48.00            27 Sept   AJ Wholesale                              75.00

30 Sept   Sales                         104.00




                  TOPIC SUMMARY
                  In this topic, you studied source documents and the information contained and also the
                  books of original entry their content and uses. You learned to identify different source
                  documents and transfer the information from these source documents to the relevant
                  books of original entry.




     Introduction to Accounting                                                                       Page | 56
UNIT ASSIGNMENT
                                              Unit 2 Assignment A

          A sole trader has the following opening balances at the beginning of November 2008

                                                          $
                                Motor Van                1 500
                                Bank                     2 910
                                Cash                     2 600
                                Premises                 2 000
                                Fixtures                   600
                                Stock                    1 289
                                Debtors: H. Woods          120
                                          J Benjamin        40
                                          H Ross           180
                               Creditors: A. Jackson      200
                                          L Luke            60
                             Loan: R. Richardson         4 000

          During the month of September the following transactions occurred.
          Nov 1 Receipt for rent paid by Cheque $15
              2 Bought good on credit from A. Jackson $20, L Luke $38, C Harris $56, F. Walker $69
              3 Paid motor expenses in cash $13
              4 Antigua Commercial Bank Deposit slip for $1000
              5 Sold good on credit to J Benjamin $56, H. Ross $78, A Lewis $98, J Jacobs $118
              6 Good returned to A. Jackson $15, F. Walker $12
              7 Paid staff by cheque $150
              8 Bought a motor van on credit from Hadeed Motors $500
              9 Goods returned to us by A Lewis $14
             10 Sales Invoices A Lewis $25, J Benjamin $15
             11 Credit notes: J Benjamin $10, J Jacobs $25
             15 Debit note C Harris $10
             16 Repaid R Richardson $175 by cheque
             18 Cash Sales $250
             19 Purchase goods by cheque $300 receiving a 5% cash discount
             20 Receipt for rent paid by cheque $100
             21 Antigua Commercial Bank deposit slip for $500
             22 Paid carriage $218 by cash
             23 H. Ross paid us in cash $150 receiving a 2% cash discount
             24 The proprietor brought equipment $600 from his personal money for the business.
             25 Cash Sales $ 300

          Prepare the relevant books of original entry from the transactions of MMR Retail Store for
          the month ended 30 November 2008.



Introduction to Accounting                                                              Page | 57
TOPIC 2.2 RECORDING BUSINESS FINANCIAL TRANSACTIONS
          INTRODUCTION
         In this topic, we will examine how to identify business transactions and how to record the
         transactions in the financial records of your business.

          The raw data of accounting are the business transactions. We learned how to record the
          transactions in Unit One, based on the increases or decreases in the assets, liabilities, and
          owners' equity items of the accounting equation. This procedure illustrated how various
          transactions affect the accounting equation. When working through the sample
          transactions, you should have noted that listing all transactions as increases or decreases in
          the balance sheet would be too cumbersome in practice. Most businesses, even small
          ones, enter into many transactions every day. Unit Two will demonstrate how to actually
          record business transactions in the accounting process.

          We will learn how to post the information from the journal to the ledgers. The ledger will
          then be balanced and a Trial Balance extracted.

          OBJECTIVES
          Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

          1.   Identify business transactions.
          2.   Record transactions in a double entry set of books.
          3.   Define an account.
          4.   State the steps in the recording business transactions.
          5.   Identify the effects of business transactions.
          6.   Identify the information to transfer to the different ledgers.
          7.   Record merchandising transactions in the ledgers.
          8.   Record accounts receivable and accounts payable transactions.
          9.   Record transactions for assets, liabilities and owners’ equity.

          BUSINESS TRANSACTIONS
          To explain the dual procedure of recording business transactions with debits and credits,
          you need to understand how to use the following new tools: the T-account, the journal, and
          the ledger. Using these tools, you can follow your business through its various business
          transactions. Like accountants, you can use a trial balance to check the equality of your
          recorded debits and credits. Understanding this system enables you to better understand
          the content of financial statements so you can use the information provided to make
          informed business decisions.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 58
THE ACCOUNT AND RULES OF DEBIT AND CREDIT
          A business may engage in thousands of transactions during a year. An accountant classifies
          and summarizes the data in these transactions to create useful information. Business
          transactions are measurable events that affect the financial condition of a business.

          Illustration 2.1 – The Steps in Recording and Posting the Effects of a Business Transaction




          Look at illustration 2.1 and observe the steps in recording and posting the effects of a
          business transaction. Note that source documents provide the evidence that a business
          transaction occurred. These source documents include such items as bills received from
          suppliers for goods or services received, bills sent to customers for goods sold or services
          performed and cash register tapes. The information in the source document serves as the
          basis for preparing a journal entry. Then a firm posts (transfers) that information to
          accounts in the ledger. You can see from the illustration that after you prepare the journal
          entry, you post it to the accounts in the ledger.

          However, before you can record a journal entry, you must understand the rules of debit
          and credit. To understand these rules, you must first understand the nature of an account.

          Most business transactions are repetitive. This makes the task of accountants somewhat
          easier because they can classify the transactions into groups having common
          characteristics. For example, a business may have thousands of receipts or payments of
          cash during a year. Part of every cash transaction must be recorded and summarized in a
          single place called an account.

          AN ACCOUNT
          An account is a part of the accounting system used to classify and summarize the increases,
          decreases, and balances of each asset, liability, owners' equity, revenue, and expense
          items. Businesses set up accounts for each different business element, such as cash,
          accounts receivable, and accounts payable. Every business has a Cash account in its
          accounting system because knowledge of the amount of cash on hand is useful information.

          Accountants may differ on the account title (or name) they give the same item. For
          example, one might name an account Notes Payable and another might call it Loans

Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 59
Payable. Both account titles refer to the amounts borrowed by the business. The account
          title should be logical to help the accountant group similar transactions into the same
          account. Once you give an account a title, you must use that same title throughout the
          accounting records.

          The number of accounts in a business's accounting system depends on the information
          needs by those interested in the business. The main requirement is that each account
          provides information useful in making decisions. Thus, one account may be set up for all
          cash rather than having a separate account for each form of cash (coins on hand, currency
          on hand, and deposits in banks). The amount of cash is useful information; the form of cash
          often is not.

          To illustrate recording the increases and decreases in an account, texts use the T-account,
          which looks like a capital letter T. The name of the account, such as Cash, appears across
          the top of the T. We record increases on one side of the vertical line of the T and decreases
          on the other side. A T-account appears as follows:

                                    Debit (Dr)           Cash            Credit (Cr)




         Dr                                           Cash                                              Cr
         Date        Details             Folio   Amount Date             Details           Folio   Amount




                       o     D
                       o
                       o     Date - day, month, year.
                       o     Details – account titles are written here.
                       o     Folio - this is a reference column showing the journal page to which each
                             entry is transferred from.
                       o     Amount - the monetary amount is shown.

          Accountants use the term debit instead of saying, "Place an entry on the left side of the T-
          account". They use the term credit for "Place an entry on the right side of the T-account".
          Debit (abbreviated Dr) simply means left side; credit (abbreviated Cr) means right side.
          Thus, for all accounts a debit entry is an entry on the left side, while a credit entry is an
          entry on the right side.

          After recognizing a business event as a business transaction, you must analyse it to
          determine if it is an increase or decrease effect on the assets, liabilities owners’ equity

Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 60
items, revenues, or expenses of the business. Then you must translate these increase or
          decrease effects into debits and credits.

          The accounting requirement that each transaction be recorded by an entry that has equal
          debits and credits is called double-entry procedure, or duality. This double-entry
          procedure keeps the accounting equation in balance.

          The dual recording process produces two sets of accounts—those with debit balances and
          those with credit balances. The totals of these two groups of accounts must be equal.
          Then, some assurance exists that the arithmetic part of the transaction recording process
          has been properly carried out. Below is an example of how to record business transactions
          in T-accounts using debits and credits.

          While recording business transactions, remember that the foundation of the accounting
          process is the following basic accounting equation:

                                       Assets = Liabilities + Owners’ Equity

          Recording transactions into the T-accounts is easier when you focus on the equal sign in the
          accounting equation. Assets, which are on the left of the equal sign, increase on the left
          side of the T-accounts. Liabilities and owners' equity, to the right of the equal sign, increase
          on the right side of the T-accounts. Remember the left side of the T-account is the debit
          side and the right side is the credit side. So you should be able to fill in the rest of the rules
          of increases and decreases by deduction, such as:

                              Dr                     Assets                       Cr

                                    Increase                        Decrease

          Examples of Asset Accounts – Motor Vehicle Expenses, Equipment, Building, Goodwill,
          Copyrights, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Stock of Goods, Cash in Bank.

                              Dr                     Liabilities                       Cr

                                    Decrease                        Increase



          Examples of Liability Accounts – Accounts Payable, Notes Payable or Loans, Mortgage.

                              Dr                   Owners’ Equity                      Cr

                                    Decrease                        Increase

                              Dr                   Revenue Amounts                          Cr

                                    Decrease                        Increase


Introduction to Accounting                                                                       Page | 61
Examples of Revenue Accounts – Discount Received, Commission Received, Interest
          Received and Rent Received.

                                Dr              Expense Accounts                        Cr

                                     Increase                      Decrease

          Examples of Expense Accounts – Rent Payable, Salaries and Wages, Commission Payable,
          Interest Payable, Discount Allowed.

          To summarize:

                  Assets increase by debits (left side) to the T-account and decrease by credits (right
                  side) to the T-account.
                  Liabilities and owners' equity decrease by debits (left side) to the T-account and
                  increase by credits (right side) to the T-account.
                  Owners’ equity decrease by debits and increase by credits
                  Record increases in revenues on the right (credit) side of the T-account and
                  decreases on the left (debit) side. The reasoning behind this rule is that revenues
                  increase retained earnings, and increases in retained earnings are recorded on the
                  right side.
                  Record increases in expenses on the left (debit) side of the T-account and decreases
                  on the right (credit) side. The reasoning behind this rule is that expenses decrease
                  retained earnings, and decreases in retained earnings are recorded on the left side.
                  Applying these two rules keeps the accounting equation in balance. Now we apply
                  the debit and credit rules for assets, liabilities, and owners' equity to business
                  transactions.

           REMEMBER EVERY BUSINESS TRANSACTION SHOULD HAVE A DEBIT AND CREDIT ENTRY
                                      IN THE ACCOUNTS.

          Let’s record a list of transactions for ORE Retail for the month of February 2011 in their
          various accounts.

          Dr                                      Owners’ Equity                                     CR
          Date        Details        Folio      Amount Date            Details     Folio       Amount
          2011                                     $      2011                                     $
                                                          Feb 1        Cash        CB          15, 000




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 62
1 Feb - Started business with $15, 000 in cash

                         o   Debit             Cash Account
                         o   Credit            Owners’ Equity Account (Capital Account)

            Dr                                         Cash                                        CR
            Date          Details          Folio Amount Date            Details      Folio     Amount
            2011                                     $      2011                                 $
            Feb 1         Owners’ Equity   GL    15, 000



          The money invested to start a business is recorded in the Owners’ Equity Account. This will
          need an increase in that account and also an increase in the cash account. To increase the
          Cash (which is an asset account) you debit that account as illustrated above. To increase
          the owners’ equity account you credit that account.

          Feb 4          Bought a Motor Vehicle paying by cash $2,000

                         o   Debit             Motor Vehicle Account
                         o   Credit            Cash Account
    Dr                                          Motor Vehicle                                    CR
    Date          Details             Folio Amount     Date         Details           Folio Amount
    2011                                         $     2011                                    $
    Feb 4         Cash                CB    2, 000




    Dr                                              Cash                                          CR
    Date          Details             Folio Amount     Date         Details           Folio Amount
    2011                                         $     2011                                     $
    Feb 1         Owners’ Equity      GL    15, 000    Feb 4        Motor Vehicle     GL    2,000




          Because you have taken $2,000 out of your cash account to pay for the Motor Vehicle your
          cash amount has decreased. This is indicated by a credit entry in your cash account. By
          purchasing that motor vehicle you have increase your motor vehicle account. This is done
          by a debit entry in the Motor Vehicle accounts. Both the motor vehicle and the cash
          accounts are asset accounts.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 63
Feb 8       Deposited $5, 000 of the cash into a bank account

                           o   Debit             Cash at Bank Account
                           o   Credit            Cash Account
       Dr                                           Cash at Bank                                        CR
       Date            Details            Folio Amount      Date           Details           Folio Amount
       2011                                          $      2011                                      $
       Feb 8           Cash               CB    5, 000



       Dr                                              Cash                                          CR
       Date        Details              Folio Amount       Date        Details          Folio Amount
       2011                                         $      2011                                    $
       Feb 1       Owners’ Equity       GL     15, 000     Feb 4       Motor Vehicle    GL     2,000
         Y
                                                           Feb 8       Cash at Bank     CB     5,000
         o
         u
         r
          Cash Account is being further reduced by taking some of the cash in that account and
         depositing it into the cash at bank account, which is now being increased.

            Feb 12 He paid his supplier Bargain Wholesale owed $1200 by cheque.

                           o   Debit             Bargain Wholesale Account
                           o   Credit            Cash at Bank Account

    Dr                                              Cash at Bank                                        CR
    Date            Details             Folio Amount       Date      Details                Folio Amount
    2011                                           $       2011                                      $
    Feb 8           Cash                CB    5, 000       Feb 12    Bargain Wholesale      PL    1,200



    Dr                                          Bargain Wholesale                                      CR
    Date            Details             Folio Amount     Date           Details           Folio    Amount
    2011                                          $      2011                                        $
    Feb 12          Cash at Bank        CB    1,200


            Bargain wholesale is a supplier that you owed money that makes it a liability to you.
            Because you are paying them the liability is decreasing, therefore, a debit entry is needed in
            bargain wholesale account and a credit entry in the cash at bank account to reflect the
            payment being made from your cash at bank account by cheque.



Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 64
Feb 15         Paid rent $500 by cash

                         o   Debit                Rent Account
                         o   Credit               Cash Account
      Dr                                             Rent                                             CR
      Date          Details             Folio Amount    Date             Details           Folio Amount
      2011                                        $     2011                                        $
      Feb 15        Cash                CB    500



      Dr                                              Cash                                             CR
      Date          Details             Folio Amount     Date            Details           Folio Amount
      2011                                         $     2011                                        $
      Feb 1         Owners’ Equity      GL    15, 000    Feb 4           Motor Vehicle     GL    2,000
                                                         Feb 8           Cash at Bank      CB    5,000
                                                         Feb 15          Rent              GL      500



          Rent is an expense account, which should be debited to indicate that the expense has been
          paid. Your cash account is credited to indicate that funds were taken from the cash
          account to pay the rent.

          Feb 20         Received $150 interest on you cash at bank account

                         o    Debit               Cash at Bank Account
                         o    Credit              Interest Received Account

    Dr                                           Cash at Bank                                          CR
    Date       Details                 Folio Amount       Date       Details               Folio Amount
    2011                                          $       2011                                      $
    Feb 8      Cash                    CB    5, 000       Feb 12     Bargain Wholesale     PL    1,200
    Feb 20     Interest Received       GL       150

    Dr                                        Interest Received                                       CR
    Date       Details                 Folio Amount      Date          Details           Folio    Amount
    2011                                         $       2011                                       $
    Feb 12     Cash at Bank            CB    1,200       Feb 20        Cash at Bank      CB        150


          Interest Received is additional revenue received from your bank as an incentive for doing
          business with them. This account should be credited to indicate the receipt of the
          additional amount. Your cash at bank account is also increased by an additional $150
          indicated by the entry in the account.

Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 65
TYPES OF LEDGERS
          The information in the various Journals is transferred to the ledgers. There are three types
          of ledgers.

          1. Sales Ledger

              In the sales ledger are the individual accounts of your Accounts Receivable (Debtors).
              The information in these accounts are derived from the Sales Journal and the Sales
              Return Journal

          2. Purchases Ledger

              The individual accounts of your Accounts Payable (Creditors). The information in the
              Purchase Journal or Purchases Return Journal is transferred to this Ledger.

          3. General Ledger

              All other accounts not recorded in the Sales or Purchase Ledger is recorded in the
              General Ledger.

          MERCHANDISING TRANSACTIONS
          Merchandising Transactions requires that you understand how to record the asset of stock.
          The asset of stock is recorded in four different accounts. These accounts are purchases,
          sales, sales return and purchases accounts. Let us first look at a definition for these terms
          and then the use of the accounts.

          Purchases, in the accounting sense, are only those items of merchandise inventory that a
          firm buys to resell to customers in the normal course of business.

          Purchases Return – Merchandise purchased for resale would not always be as what the
          buyer expects. In this regard, buyers can return goods purchased due to a lot of reasons, for
          example, due to defects, wrong specifications, poor quality, etc. When merchandise bought
          is returned, or an allowance is requested, the buyer informs the seller in writing. The
          communication is done usually through the buyer’s printed business form called debit note.

          Sales, on the other hand, represent the selling price of merchandise previously bought and
          then sold. In the income statement, Sales is shown as an income item from which the cost
          of goods sold (consisting of merchandise inventory beginning and end and net cost of
          purchases), was deducted, the difference being the gross profit.

          Sales Return - When the customer returns goods to the seller or requests for a deduction
          from the price of the goods delivered to him, the seller accepts the return or grants the
          request through a credit note.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 66
The sale of merchandise may be for cash or on account. An invoice supports every sale. The
          seller’s sales invoice is the buyer’s purchase invoice. When a sale is for cash, the seller
          receives money in return for his merchandise. When the sale is made on credit, the seller
          acquires a receivable or right to collect from the buyer.

          The uses of the merchandising accounts are:

          1. Sales Account – Sales of merchandise are recorded in this account at selling prices. This
             is a temporary or nominal account representing income from selling of merchandise.
             This account has a normal credit balance.

          2. Purchases Account – This is a temporary account to which the cost of goods bought
             during the period is debited. This account usually has a debit balance at the end of the
             accounting period.

          3. Sales Return Account – This account is debited for all the merchandise returned by
             customers. The debit entry is at the original selling price of the merchandise. This
             account is also being used for all goods delivered to customers but is found to be
             defective or not as ordered and still the buyer desiring to retain the goods as is.
             The customer in this case is normally permitted to deduct a certain amount
             from the selling prices of the goods delivered.

          4. Purchases Return Account – Goods bought and returned to supplier, or goods bought
             and received as defective, or not as ordered, when not returned to the supplier but is
             subjected to a certain reductions from their acquisition prices. These deductions and
             returns of purchased goods are credited to this account. Purchase returns and
             allowances account is a deduction from the Purchases account.

          These accounts were briefly looked at above but let us now have a further look at these
          accounts as we take into account the double entries needed to record both credit and cash
          transactions in these accounts.

          Purchases Transactions
          Accounting Entries Used to Record the Purchase and Payment of Goods
          1) When goods are purchased with cash, the following entry is necessary:

              o   Debit       Purchases
              o   Credit      Cash

          2) When goods are purchased on credit, the following entry is necessary:

              o   Debit       Purchases
              o   Credit      Accounts Payable



Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 67
3) When goods are purchased on credit, but are paid back early due to a cash discount
             incentive, the following entry is necessary.

              o   Debit         Accounts Payable
              o   Credit        Cash
              o   Credit        Purchases Discount (discount received).

          Purchases Discounts (Discount Received)

          A seller will often offer a cash discount to the buyer for an early payment. Credit terms are
          the conditions for the payment agreed upon by the buyer and the seller. Cash discounts are
          stated in a fractional form with the percentage of discount in the numerator and the
          number of days in the denominator. The credit period, or number of days a buyer can pay
          without incurring a finance charge, is stated in NET days or n/days.

                                                Example

           Terms 3/15, n/60 means a buyer will receive a 3% cash discount if paid within 15 days of
          the invoice date, and the buyer has a maximum of 60 days to pay the entire debt amount.



          Purchases Returns Rules For Recording Returns For Goods Purchased On Credit

          1) If merchandise is returned or a price adjustment is necessary, the buyer should.

                  o    Debit           Accounts Payable
                  o    Credit          Purchases Returns account

          2) When the returned goods were purchased on credit, and a cash discount for early
             payment is available, the discount only applies to the price of the goods that are kept,
             (in addition, discounts are not taken on freight costs).

          SALES ACCOUNTING
          When goods are sold for cash or on credit, the Sales account should be credited. To
          encourage early payment of goods purchased on credit, the seller will often offer a cash
          discount. These discounts are recorded in the Sales Discounts Account (Discount Allowed).
          When goods are returned or an allowance is requested, the adjustment is made to the
          Sales Returns account. All sales discounts, returns, and allowances reduce sales revenues.

          Sales Accounting - Rules for Recording Sales Transactions

          1) When goods are sold and payment is made in cash.

                  o    Debit            Cash
                  o    Credit           Sales

Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 68
2) When goods are sold on credit.

                  o   Debit           Accounts Receivable
                  o   Credit          Sales

          Sales Accounting - Recording Sales Discounts

          3) When a buyer takes advantage of a cash discount.

                  o   Debit           Cash
                  o   Debit           Sales Discount (Discount Allowed)
                  o   Credit          Accounts Receivable

                                                    Example

           Invoice for $950 with terms 3/15, n/30 is paid early by the buyer.

                  o    Debit      Cash $921.50
                  o    Debit      Sales Discount $28.50
                  o    Credit     Accounts Receivable $950


          SALES ACCOUNTING - RECORDING SALES RETURNS

          When a seller grants a return or an allowance,

                  o   Debit           Sales Returns
                  o   Credit          Accounts Receivable


          A buyer of goods can only take a cash discount on the goods that are actually kept (cash
          discounts do not apply to freight either).

                                                    Example

            A seller issues a credit note for $70 of goods that were not ordered by ABC company. If
            the return is granted, the following entry is necessary.

                         Debit     Sales Returns $70
                         Credit    Accounts Receivable ABC company $70


          SALES ACCOUNTING
          Manufacturers and wholesalers often reduce catalogue list prices by allowing trade (or
          quantity) discounts. The discounts vary depending on customer and order size. Trade
          discounts permit flexible prices without having to print new catalogues. Trade discounts are



Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 69
not reflected in accounting records, only the agreed upon price between a buyer and seller
          is recorded.

          TRANSPORTATION COSTS
          Whenever goods are sold, the buyer and the seller must agree upon who pays shipping
          costs. When goods are shipped FOB shipping point, the buyer agrees to pay for shipping
          costs and ownership passes to the buyer when the merchandise is delivered to the shipper.
          When goods are shipped FOB destination, the seller agrees to pay for transportation costs
          and ownership of goods passes to the buyer when the goods are delivered.

                                                        ACTIVITY 2 - A

          A Local Book Shop ordered 600 copies of an introductory accounting textbook from a publisher on
          March 21, 2011. The books were delivered on September 12, at which time a bill was sent requesting
          payment of $60 per book. However, a 5% discount was allowed if the publisher received payment by
          October 15. Local Book Shop sent the proper payment, which was received by the Publisher on
          October 10. On December 18, Local Book Shop returned 60 books to the publisher for a full cash
          refund.


              1.    Prepare the journal entries (if any) for the publisher on
                    a. March 21
                    b. September 12
                    c. October 10
                    d. December 18. Include appropriate narratives.




          ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE AND ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
          These accounts deal with our debtors (customer who we sell our goods and service to on
          credit) and our creditors (suppliers we purchase our goods and services from on credit). The
          list of your accounts receivables account are recorded in your Sales Ledger and Accounts
          Payable accounts in your Purchases Ledger

          Let us now continue with our worked example from Topic 2.1 above. You now need to
          transfer the information in the various journals to the different ledgers and accounts.

          Begin with the Sales and Sales Return Journals. The information included in these two
          journals is transferred to the respective accounts in the sales ledger with the totals
          transferred to the general ledger.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                       Page | 70
Sales Journal
                                                                    Folio
              Date                         Details                   No.    Invoice No.      Amount
             2006                                                                                  $

             Sept 25        Malika Diantha                      SL             5324             422.85

             Sept 27        Oren Peters                         SL              249             249.00

                            Total Credit Sales for the month    GL                              671.85



                                                 Sales Return Journal
              Date                        Details              Folio No.     Note No.        Amount
             2006                                                                                  $

            Sept 23         Malika Diantha                     SL               1235                    72.00

            Sept 29         Oren Peters                        SL               1236                   137.70

                            Total Sales Return                 GL                                      209.70




                                                      Sales Ledger
                                                      Oren Peters
        Date           Details        Folio         Amount   Date           Details       Folio     Amount
        2006                                         $       2006                                     $
       Sept 27      Sales             SJ            249.99 Sept 29     Sales Returns      SRJ        137.70



                                                     Malika Diantha
        Date           Details        Folio         Amount   Date           Details       Folio     Amount
        2006                                         $       2006                                     $
       Sept 25      Sales             SJ            422.85 Sept 23     Sales Return       SRJ         72.00




Introduction to Accounting                                                                        Page | 71
Purchases Journal
        Date                       Details                Folio No. Invoice No.     Amount
       2006                                                                               $

       Sept 7       AJ Wholesale                                           1654       272.80

       Sept 9       A M Byden                                              234        248.80

                   Total Credit Purchases for the month                               521.60




                                     Purchase Return Journal
         Date                      Details                Folio No.     Note No.    Amount
                                                                                          $

       Sept 17      A M Byden                             PL               236            94.00

       Sept 25      AJ Wholesale                          PL               237            59.00

                    Total Purchases Returns               GL                          153.00


                                              Purchases Ledger
                                                A.M. Bryden
    Date             Details          Folio     Amount   Date             Details    Folio        Amount
    2006                                         $       2006                                       $
  Sept 17       Purchases Return      PRJ        59.00 Sept 9         Purchases      PJ            248.80
  Sept 25       Bank                  CB        100.00

                                               AJ Wholesale
    Date             Details          Folio     Amount   Date             Details    Folio        Amount
    2006                                         $       2006                                       $
  Sept 25       Purchases Return      PRJ        94.00 Sept 7         Purchases      PJ            272.80
  Sept 27       Bank                  CB         75.00

                                                  J Smith
    Date             Details          Folio     Amount      Date          Details    Folio        Amount
    2006                                         $          2006                                     $
                                                          Sept 1      Balance        b/d          1 500.00




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 72
General Journal
          Date                       Details                      Folio No.         Debit            Credit
          2006                                                                          $               $
     1 Sept          Cash                                         CB              150.00
                    Bank                                          CB              800.00
                    Motor Van                                     GL            2 500.00
                     Loan: J Smith                                PL                               1 500.00
                    Equipment                                    GL             1 200.00
                    *Capital                                     GL                                3 150.00
                    Assets and Liabilities as at 1 Sept 2006                    4 650.00           4 650.00


                                               General Ledger
                                                 Motor Van
   Date               Details         Folio       Amount        Date          Details         Folio         Amount
   2006                                             $           2006                                          $
  Sept 1             Balance           b/d      2 500.00

                                                     Capital
   Date               Details         Folio       Amount        Date          Details         Folio         Amount
   2006                                            $            2006                                            $
                                                               Sept 1         Balance         b/d           3 150.00

                                                  Equipment
   Date               Details         Folio       Amount        Date          Details         Folio         Amount
   2006                                             $           2006                                          $
  Sept 1             Balance           b/d      1 200.00

                                                Sales Account
   Date               Details          Folio      Amount        Date          Details         Folio          Amount
   2006                                            $            2006                                           $
                                                               Sept 21   Cash                 CB                 48.00
                                                               Sept 30   Cash                 CB                104.00
                                                               Sept 30   Total Credit Sales   SJ                671.85


                                             Purchases Account
   Date               Details          Folio      Amount        Date          Details         Folio          Amount
   2006                                            $            2006                                           $
                 Total Credit
Sept 30          Purchases            PJ           521.60


 Introduction to Accounting                                                                                 Page | 73
Sales Return Account
               Date                    Details           Folio            Amount          Date                Details           Folio         Amount
               2006                                                       $               2006                                                  $
     Sept 30                 Total Returns               SRJ              209.70




                                                  Purchases Return Account
               Date                    Details           Folio            Amount          Date                Details           Folio         Amount
               2006                                                       $               2006                                                  $
                                                                                        Sept 30     Total Returns               PRJ             153.00




                                                                      Cash Book
 Date          Details       Folio     Discount   Cash           Bank            Date               Details             Folio   Discount            Cash   Bank

 2006                                        $     $              $              2006                                                 $               $     $

Sept 1    Balance           b/d                    150.00        800.00         Sept 25      AM Byden                   PL                                 100.00

Sept 21   Sales             SL                      48.00                     Sept 27        AJ Wholesale               PL                                  75.00

Sept 30   Sales             SL                     104.00




                  Introduction to Accounting                                                                                              Page | 74
UNIT ASSIGNMENT
                                             Unit 2 Assignment B

          Using your answers from Unit 2 Assignment A, prepare the double entry accounts for MMR
          Retail Store for the month of November 2008.


   TOPIC SUMMARY
          You would have observed from the examples given in this unit that the accounts on the
          balance sheet are affected by business transactions. In this unit we looked at the entries
          required to record different business transaction in a business. You would have learnt that
          every transaction affects two accounts one account is debited and the other credited. You
          would have also looked at the necessary entries needed to increase and decrease each type
          of account.

          We have completed the double entry recording of different types of accounts and
          transactions. We can now continue by balance off these accounts to determine the balance
          on the accounts to be transferred to the trial balance.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 75
TOPIC 2.3 BALANCING OFF ACCOUNTS
          INTRODUCTION
          We will now continue from where we left off in topic 2.2. In order for us to generate a trial
          balance we first need to balance off the ledger accounts. Balancing the accounts simply
          means that both the debit and credit side of each account should be equal.

          OBJECTIVES
          Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

          1. State what balancing off means.
          2. list the steps of balancing off an account.
          3. identify what figures are transferred to the income statement and the balance sheet.

          BALANCING THE BOOKS
          At the end of the financial accounting period a business must balance its books – the first
          step to summarizing and analyzing the financial position and income of the business. You
          have identified two sides of a ledger – a debit and a credit. All of your debit entries must
          equal your credit entries. You must balance off an account by taking a figure to the
          financial statements. All ledger accounts must be balances at the end of a period. Revenue
          and expense accounts do not have a brought down balance, since they are closed off and
          the figure transferred to the income statement. Other types of accounts use a balance
          brought down in order to determine the opening balance of the account in the subsequent
          trading period.

          Steps to balancing off the accounts

          1. Calculate the total of both side of the account (one side in the case of revenue and
             expense accounts.
          2. The larger of the two totals are place in the total boxes on both side of the account
             (debit and credit totals). If the debit total is greater than the credit total then the
             account has a debit balance and vice versa for the credit balance.
          3. You balance your account by introducing your balancing figure (which the difference
             between the largest and smaller figure) on the side the smallest amount. This figure
             should be your balance carried down at the end of the period and would be brought
             down at the start of the next period. The balances carried down figures are those that
             affect the balance sheet.
          4. You bring down the balancing figure by going to the opposite side of the account and
             detailing the balance brought down, which is the same figure as the balance carried
             down figure. The balancing figure appears before the total boxes while the brought
             down figure appear under the total boxes on the opposite side to that of the balancing
             figure.



Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 76
5. For revenue and expense accounts the difference between both sides of the account is
             the figure to be transferred to the income statement.

          Balance sheet accounts have balancing figures, but revenue and expenses account do not.
          This is because the figures for revenue, expenses and drawing, when they are aggregated
          and offset in the income statement, to adjust the capital accounts. As such, the balances of
          those accounts appear in the capital account in the following period and do not just
          disappear in the next accounting period.

          Now let’s balance off the accounts in unit 2.2

                                                 Sales Ledger
                                                      Oren Peters

            Date             Details    Folio    Amount         Date         Details   Folio   Amount
             2006                                $             2006                            $
           Sept 25   Sales               SJ          249.00   29-Sep   Sales Returns   SRJ         137.70
                                                              30-Sep   Balance         c/d         111.30
                                                     249.00                                        249.00

           1-Oct     Balance            b/d          111.30



                                                     Malika Diantha

            Date             Details    Folio    Amount         Date         Details   Folio   Amount
             2006                                $             2006                            $
           Sept 30   Sales               SJ          422.85   23-Sep   Sales Return    SRL          72.00
                                                              30-Sep   Balance         c/d         350.85
                                                     422.85                                        422.85

           1-Oct     Balance            b/d          350.85



                                                Purchases Ledger
                                                      A.M. Bryden

            Date             Details    Folio    Amount         Date         Details   Folio   Amount
             2006                                $             2006                            $

           25-Sep    Bank                CB          100.00   9-Sep    Purchases        PJ         248.80
           26-Sep    Purchases Return   PRJ           59.00
           30-Sep    Balance            c/d           89.80
                                                     148.80                                        248.80

                                                              1-Oct    Balance         b/d          89.80




Introduction to Accounting                                                                          Page | 77
AJ Wholesale

            Date             Details     Folio   Amount             Date           Details       Folio   Amount
             2006                                $                  2006                                 $
           17-Sep     Purchases Return    PRJ          94.00   7-Sep        Purchases             PJ         272.80

             27-Sep   Bank                CB           75.00
           30-Sep     Balance             c/d         103.80
                                                      272.80                                                 272.80

                                                               1-Oct        Balance              b/d         103.80



                                                          J Smith

            Date             Details     Folio   Amount             Date           Details       Folio   Amount
             2006                                $                  2006                                 $
            30-Sep           Balance      c/d    1 500.00           1-Sep         Balance        b/d     1 500.00

                                                                    1-Oct         Balance        b/d     1 500.00



                                                 General Ledger
                                                       Sales Account

            Date             Details     Folio   Amount             Date           Details       Folio   Amount
             2006                                $                  2006                                 $
                                                                21-Sep                Cash        CB          48.00
                                                                30-Sep                cash        CB         104.00
           30-Sep     Income Statement                823.85   30-Sep       Total Credit Sales    SJ         671.85
                                                      823.85                                                 823.85

                                                               1-Oct        Balance              b/d         823.85



                                                     Purchases Account

            Date             Details     Folio   Amount             Date           Details       Folio   Amount
             2006                                $                  2006                                 $
                      Total Credit
           30-Sep                          PJ         521.60   30-Sep       Income Statement                 521.60
                      Purchases
           1-Oct      Balance             b/d         521.60



                                                 Sales Return Account

            Date             Details     Folio   Amount             Date           Details       Folio   Amount
             2006                                $                  2006                                 $
           30-Sep     Total Returns      SRJ          209.70   30-Sep       Income Statement                 209.70

           1-Oct      Balance                         209.70




Introduction to Accounting                                                                                    Page | 78
Purchases Return Account

                         Date                Details             Folio      Amount             Date                 Details               Folio       Amount
                          2006                                              $                  2006                                                   $
                     30-Sep        Income Statement                              153.00       Sept 30    Total Returns                   PRJ              153.00

                                                                                           1-Oct         Balance                                          153.00



                                                                                   Motor Van
                         Date                Details             Folio      Amount             Date                 Details               Folio       Amount
                          2006                                              $                  2006                                                   $
                                                                                                                                                               2
                           1-Sep   Balance                       b/d            2 500.00       30-Sep    Balance                          c/d             500.00

                           1-Oct   Balance                       b/d        2 500.00




                                                                                   Equipment
                         Date                Details             Folio      Amount             Date                 Details               Folio       Amount
                          2006                                              $                  2006                                                   $
                                                                                                                                                               1
                           1-Sep   Balance                       b/d            1 200.00       30-Sep    Balance                          c/d             200.00

                           1-Oct   Balance                       b/d            1 200.00




                                                                                    Capital
                         Date                Details             Folio      Amount             Date                 Details               Folio       Amount
                          2006                                              $                  2006                                                   $
                                                                                                                                                               3
                          30-Sep   Balance                       c/d            3 150.00        1-Sep    Balance                          b/d             150.00
                                                                                                                                                               3
                                                                                                1-Oct    Balance                          b/d             150.00




                                                                 Cash Book
Date      Details   Folio        Discount     Cash      Bank             Date                  Details             Folio      Discount         Cash          Bank
2006                                $           $        $               2006                                                    $              $              $
 1-Sep   Balance    b/d                        150.00   800.00           25-Sep      AM Byden                      PL                                        100.00
21-Sep   Sales      Gl                          48.00                    27-Sep      AJ Wholesale                  PL                                          75.00
30-Sep   Sales      GL                         104.00                    30-Sep      Balance                       c/d                         302.00        625.00

                                               302.00   800.00                                                                                 302.00        800.00

 1-Oct   Balance    b/d                        302.00   625.00




         Introduction to Accounting                                                                                                      Page | 79
Take note that at the end of the month those accounts with balances to be transferred to
          the Income Statement use the word income statement instead of balance c/d.

          UNIT ASSIGNMENT
                                            Unit 2 Assignment C

           Let us continue the unit 2 assignment from topic 2.1 and 2.2. You have recorded the
           transactions in the books and original entry and post them to the various ledgers. You
           now need to balance off those ledger accounts.


          TOPIC SUMMARY
          You are doing well. You have balance off your accounts in the various ledgers. With this
          information you can now prepare your trial balance. You will also be able to determine
          which final account the balances will be transferred.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 80
TOPIC 2.4 TRIAL BALANCE
          INTRODUCTION
          Now that we have balanced off our accounts we are now ready to prepare our trial balance.
          This will be prepared from the balances on the ledger accounts.

          OBJECTIVES
          Upon completion of this unit you should be able to:

          1. Define trial balance.
          2. State the uses of the trial balance.

          DEFINITION OF TRIAL BALANCE
          A Trial Balance is an essential stage in ensuring the accuracy of the book-keeping entries
          prior to the preparation of the financial statements. The trial balance lists the name of
          each account together with the balance shown in either the debit or credit columns. (Wood
          and Robinson, 2007) It is a list of the account balances in your records.

          You can extract your trial balance from the balances on your ledger accounts. Before you
          prepare your trial balance let us look at the uses of the trial balance.

          USE OF THE TRIAL BALANCE
          According to Wood and Robinson (2007) Trial Balances may be used:

                  To check that the books ‘balance’, i.e. every debit entry has been accompanied by a
                  credit entry.
                  To ascertain the net amount of the error(s), should an error(s) have been made.
                  As a basis from which the financial statement are prepared.

          The trial balance is used to check the arithmetically balance of our accounts. The trial
          balance has two monetary columns a debit and credit column. You would have seen in
          your ledger account that some balance b/d are on the debit side of the account and others
          are on the credit side. When you are transferring the balances from the ledger accounts to
          the trial balance the balances remain on the same side as the ledger accounts.

          Below is the Trial Balance from the examples in this unit. Take note that it should have the
          following:

          1. Heading that states the name of the business, the words Trial Balance as at (the date
             the trial balance is being prepared).
          2. A details column for the name of the accounts
          3. Folio column indicating the reference information
          4. A debit and credit monetary column



Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 81
MJ Retailers
                                               Trial Balance
                                        as at 30th September 2006
                                                                   Dr.           Cr.
                                                                    $            $
                     Accounts Receivable
                            Oren Peters                 SL         111.30
                             Malika Diantha             SL         350.85
                     Accounts Payable
                             A.M. Bryden                PL                        89.80
                            AJ Wholesale                PL                       103.80
                            J Smith                     PL                     1,500.00
                     Sales                              GL                       823.85
                     Purchases                          GL         521.60
                     Sales Return                       GL         209.70
                     Purchases Return                   GL                       153.00
                     Cash                               CB         302.00
                     Equipment                          GL       1,200.00
                     Motor Van                          GL       2,500.00
                     Capital                            GL                     3,150.00
                     Bank                               CB         625.00
                                                                 5,820.45      5,820.45



          Take not that both columns of your trial balance are equal. The information is recorded on
          the same side as the balances b/d in the ledger accounts. If your trial balance included
          expenses and revenue your expenses would be recorded in the debit column and revenue
          in the credit column.

          TOPIC SUMMARY
          Upon completion of this topic you should be able to balance your accounts. In addition you
          should be able to describe how to use the trail balance to help analyze your business
          activities.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 82
UNIT SUMMARY
          We have now completed the bookkeeping stage of the accounting process with our trial
          balance. Now that you have completed unit two take some time to review the content in
          both Units One and Two before you proceed to unit 3. It is very important that you fully
          understand the contents in these two units if you are to understand the information in the
          upcoming units. Also, review the activities and assignments and check your answers with
          the answers given.

          At this stage you should be able to identify source document and transfer the information
          to the different books of original entry. You should also be able to post to you ledgers and
          balance them off and transfer those balances to the Trial Balance. The next step is to
          examine the adjustments necessary to ensure that your Financial Statements represents a
          true and fair view of your business.


                                          Self-Reflection Questions

              Now that you have completed Unit Two take some time to review the content in
              both Units One and Two before you proceed to Unit 3. Reflect on these questions:

              1.   Do I know who are my accounts receivable and accounts payable?

              2. Are you able to distinguish between accounts payable and accounts
                 receivable?

              3. Do you know the entries necessary to increase or decrease the amount on
                 account based on the type of accounts?

              4. Do you understand when different types of accounts should be debited and
                 when it should be credited?


          UNIT ASSIGNMENT
                                            Unit 2 Assignment D

          You can now complete the unit assignment by preparing the Trial Balance from the
          balances on your ledger accounts.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 83
UNIT REFERENCES
          Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations.
                      Macmillan Publishers Ltd.

          Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.).
                     England, Pearson Education Limited.

          http://www.accountingunplugged.com/2008/08/27/accounting-basics/

          http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Credit_note

          http://www.printablecashreceipts.com/

          http://www.wisegeek.com/what-is-a-cash-receipt.htm

          http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cheque

          http://www.scribd.com/doc/7216082/Unit-I-Accounting-for-Merchandising-Business1

          http://www.peoi.org/Courses/Coursesen/ac/fram9.html

          http://www.investorwords.com/46/account_balance.html#ixzz1HDhSFNDR

          http://www.helium.com/items/1740700-how-to-balance-a-ledger-account




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 84
UNIT THREE – FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND ADJUSTMENTS
           INTRODUCTION
           In this unit you will look at the adjustments necessary before your financial statements can
           be prepared. You would look at the adjustments for prepaid and accrued expenses and
           revenue, depreciation and disposal of assets, bad debts and provision for bad debts. You
           will also take a look at the various methods to value closing stock.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this unit you should be able to:

               1. Determine the various adjustments necessary before financial statement can be
                  prepared.
               2. Make the necessary adjustments for accrued and prepaid expense and revenue
                  accounts.
               3. Make adjustments for the depreciation and disposal of fixed assets.
               4. Make adjustments for bad debts and provision for bad debts.
               5. Identify and prepare different types of financial statements.
               6. Illustrate the different layouts for financial statements.

    UNIT READINGS
           The instructor will provide a list of readings.

    ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES
           The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions.




 Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 85
TOPIC 3.1 DEPRECIATION AND DISPOSAL OF ASSETS
          INTRODUCTION
         There is a time period attached to the useful life of all assets owned by a business. Since
         assets depreciates in value as it is being used it can no longer be valued at cost price. In this
         topic you will calculate depreciation and determine the disposal value of assets.

          OBJECTIVES
          Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

              1. Define depreciation.
              2. State reasons for depreciating assets.
              3. Identify methods of calculating depreciation.
              4. Determine book value and disposal value of assets.
              5. Examine the different methods of calculating depreciation (straight line and
                 diminishing balance method).
              6. Show the treatment of depreciation in the financial statements.

          WHAT IS DEPRECIATION?
          Let us begin by defining depreciation. According to Woods and Robinson (2007),
          Depreciation is the part of the original purchase cost of a fixed asset consumed during its
          period of use by the business. It is an expense for services consumed and will be charged to
          the income statement and will therefore, reduce net profit.

          Depreciation is a process of allocation, not valuation. Eventually, all assets except land wear
          out or become so inadequate or outmoded that they are sold or discarded; therefore, firms
          must record depreciation on every plant asset except land. They record depreciation even
          when the market value of a plant asset temporarily rises above its original cost because
          eventually the asset is no longer useful to its current owner.

          CAUSES OF DEPRECIATION
          Major causes of depreciation are:

                   physical deterioration,
                   inadequacy for future needs, and
                   obsolescence.

          Physical deterioration results from the use of the asset—wear and tear—and the action of
          the elements. For example, an automobile may have to be replaced after a time because its
          body rusted out.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 86
Inadequacy of a plant asset is its inability to produce enough products or provide enough
          services to meet current demands. For example, an airline cannot provide air service for
          125 passengers using a plane that seats 90.

          Obsolescence of an asset is its decline in usefulness brought about by inventions and
          technological progress. For example, the development of the xerographic process of
          reproducing printed matter rendered almost all previous methods of duplication obsolete.

          To compute depreciation expense, accountants consider four major factors:

          COST OF THE ASSET
                  Estimated salvage value of the asset. Salvage value (or scrap value) is the amount of
                  money the company expects to recover, less disposal costs, on the date a plant
                  asset is scrapped, sold, or traded in.
                  Estimated useful life of the asset. Useful life refers to the time the company owning
                  the asset intends to use it; useful life is not necessarily the same as either economic
                  life or physical life. The economic life of a car may be 7 years and its physical life
                  may be 10 years, but if a company has a policy of trading cars every 3 years, the
                  useful life for depreciation purposes is 3 years. Various firms express useful life in
                  years, months, working hours, or units of production. Obsolescence also affects
                  useful life.
                  Depreciation method used in depreciating the asset. We describe the four common
                  depreciation methods in the next section.

          HOW IS DEPRECIATION CALCULATED?
          In order to have free and fair view of the Balance Sheet it is important that the assets on
          the balance sheet are correctly valued.

          Today, businesses can use many different methods to calculate depreciation on assets. This
          section discusses and illustrates the two most common methods—straight-line, and
          reducing balance method.

          According to accounting theory, a business should use a depreciation method that reflects
          most closely their underlying economic circumstances. Thus, businesses should adopt the
          depreciation method that allocates asset cost to accounting periods according to the
          benefits received from the use of the asset.

          Before studying some of the methods that companies use to depreciate assets, make sure
          you understand the following definitions.

                  Useful life is an estimate of the productive life of an asset. Although usually
                  expressed in years, an asset's useful life may also be based on units of activity, such
                  as items produced, hours used, or miles driven.



Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 87
Salvage value equals the value, if any that a company expects to receive by selling
                  or exchanging an asset at the end of its useful life.
                  Depreciable cost equals an asset's total cost minus the asset's expected salvage
                  value. The total amount of depreciation expense assigned to an asset never
                  exceeds the asset's depreciable cost.
                  Net book value is an asset's total cost minus the accumulated depreciation
                  assigned to the asset. Net book value rarely equals market value, which is the price
                  someone would pay for the asset. In fact, the market value of an asset, such as a
                  building, may increase while the asset is being depreciated. Net book value simply
                  represents the portion of an asset's cost that has not been allocated to expense.
                  (CliffsNotes.com. Depreciation of Operating Assets. 18 Apr 2011)

          STRAIGHT-LINE DEPRECIATION
          This is the method most commonly used by businesses for financial reporting. In this
          method the assets annual depreciation expense is calculated by dividing the assets cost by
          the number of years of useful life of the assets. Equal amount is transferred to the income
          statement for depreciation each year. The assumption is that each accounting period
          equally benefits from the use of the asset. The straight line method calculates an annual
          charge by:

          using a formula; or

          applying a fixed percentage to the depreciable amount of the asset.

          Straight-line Depreciation Formula

                      Depreciation   =                 Cost - Scrap Value
                                                         Number of years

                  Cost – cost of the asset
                  Scrap Value – the business’s best estimate of the worth of the assets at the end of
                  its useful life
                  Numbers of years – the years the asset is expected to be useful to the business.

          The fixed percentage is calculated by dividing 100% by the number of years of useful life

                             5 years of useful life   100 = 20 %
                                                       5




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 88
Example 3.1 A

            On the 1st January 2011, a business purchases a Motor Vehicle for $50,000. It is
            expected to give five years of service after which it will be sold for $5,000. Calculate
            the annual depreciation to be charged to the income statement for each of the five
            years.

                                       Depreciation  = Cost - Scrap Value
                                                         Number of Years
                                                     = 50, 000 - 5, 000
                                                             5
                                                    = 45,000
                                                           5
                                                    = $9,000
            $9,000 will be charge to the Income Statement for depreciation annually.

            Using the fixed percentage

                                               100 = 20%
                                                5
                                      45,000 x 20% = 9,000


          The following table summarizes the application of straight-line depreciation during the
          Motor Vehicle five-year useful life.

                                      Straight-Line Depreciation
          Year Ending Depreciable            Annual          Accumulated
                                                                             Net Book Value
         31 December     Cost              Depreciation      Depreciation
             2011            50,000           9,000               9,000           41,000
             2012            50,000           9,000             18,000            32,000
             2013            50,000           9,000             27,000            23,000
             2014            50,000           9,000             36,000            14,000
             2015            50,000           9,000             45,000             5,000

          At the end of year five, the $45,000 shown as accumulated depreciation equals the asset's
          depreciable cost, and the $5,000 net book value represents its estimated salvage value.

          To record depreciation expense on the Motor Vehicle each year, the company debits
          depreciation expense–vehicles for $9,000 and credits accumulated depreciation–vehicles
          for $9,000.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 89
REDUCING BALANCE METHOD
          In this method also called the diminishing balance, a different amount is charged to the
          Income Statement each year for depreciation. A fixed percentage is applied to the net book
          value of the asset at the beginning of each year. The net book value reduces as the asset
          ages and the depreciation charge diminishes

                                                Example 3.1 B

            Looking at the same example above of a business that purchases a Motor Vehicle for
            $50,000. If the reducing balance is used at a fixed percentage of 20% per annum.
            Calculate the annual depreciation to be charged to the income statement for each of
            the five years.

                                        Reducing Balance Depreciation
                         Year Ending       Depreciable                           Net Book
                                                             Depreciation
                        31 December           Cost                                Value

                             2011              50, 000.00         10,000.00    40,000.00

                             2012               40,000.00          8,000.00    32,000.00

                             2013               32,000.00          6,400.00    25,600.00

                             2014               25,600.00          5,120.00    20,480.00

                             2015               20,480.00          4,096.00    16,384.00


            Year 1 50,000 x 20 % = 10,000      Net Book Value 50,000 – 10,000 = 40,000

            Year 2 40, 000 x 20% = 8,000       Net Book Value 40,000 - 8,000 = 32,000

            The table below summarizes the application of reducing balance of depreciation during
            the Motor Vehicle five-year useful life.


            In this method the depreciation was charge yearly to the net book value of the asset.


          RECORDING DEPRECIATION
          Usually separate records of the cost of each type of non-current asset and the accumulating
          depreciation on each type of non-current assets are kept. The provision for depreciation
          account is updated at the end of each financial year with the annual depreciation charge.
          This is done as follows:

                  Record the annual depreciation charge in the general journal

Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 90
Post the journal entries to the accounts
                      o Debit Profit & loss Account
                      o Credit Provision for Depreciation Account

          The Profit & loss account section of the income statement is debited with the depreciation
          to ensure that profits are reduced for the year under review. The credit entry in the
          provision account has the effect of reducing the value of the non-current asset. (Austen et
          al 2011)

          Let us now prepare the double entry records for the reducing balance example above.

                                                  Example 3.1 C

            At the end of each year prepare the journal entries to record the depreciation to be
            charged for the year as indicated below.

                                                     Journal
                   Date                    Details                     Dr                 Cr
                                                                       $                  $
               31 Dec. 2011    Profit & loss                          10,000.00
                                  Provision for Depreciation                             10,000.00

               31 Dec. 2012    Profit & loss                           8,000.00
                                  Provision for Depreciation                               8,000.00

               31 Dec. 2013    Profit & loss                           6,400.00
                                  Provision for Depreciation                               6,400.00

               31 Dec 2014     Profit & loss                      5, 120.00
                                  Provision for Depreciation                      5, 120.00

               31 Dec. 2015    Profit & loss                           4,096.00
                                  Provision for Depreciation                               4,096.00

          The journal entries are then posted to the accounts.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 91
Example 3.1 D

                                                 Motor Vehicle
                2011                          $      2011                                   $
                 1-Jan   Bank               50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d                       50,000
                2012                                 2012
                 1-Jan   Balance b/d        50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d                       50,000
                2013                                 2013
                 1-Jan   Balance b/d        50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d                       50,000
                2014                                 2014
                 1-Jan   Balance b/d        50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d                       50,000
                2015                                 2015
                 1-Jan   Balance b/d        50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d                       50,000

                         Profit & loss Account (extract) for the year ended 31 December
                                                                                             $
                  2011   Depreciation                                                     10,000.00
                  2012   Depreciation                                                      8,000.00
                  2013   Depreciation                                                      6,400.00
                  2014   Depreciation                                                      5,120.00
                  2015   Depreciation                                                      4,096.00

                               Provision for Depreciation of Motor Vehicle
               2011                        $       2011                                     $
               31-Dec Balance c/d        10,000 31-Dec Profit & loss                        10,000
               2012                                2012
               31-Dec Balance c/d        18,000      1-Jan Balance b/d                      10,000
                                                   31-Dec Profit & loss                      8,000
                                         18,000                                             18,000
               2013                                2013
               31-Dec Balance c/d        24,400      1-Jan Balance b/d                      18,000
                                                   31-Dec Profit & loss                      6,400
                                         24,400                                             24,400
               2014                                2014
               31-Dec Balance c/d        29,520      1-Jan Balance b/d                      24,400
                                                   31-Dec Profit & loss                      5,120
                                         29,520                                             29,520
               2015                                2015
               31-Dec Balance c/d        33,616      1-Jan Balance b/d                      29,520
                                                   31-Dec Profit & loss                      4096
                                         33,616                                             33,616




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 92
How Does Depreciation Affect the Balance Sheet?

          The balance sheet at the end of each financial year should show the noncurrent assets at
          cost less the balance on the provision for depreciation account. At the end of each year
          that year’s depreciation is charged to the Profit & loss account but it is the accumulated
          depreciation to date that is charged to the balance sheet. Let’s have a look at the balance
          sheet extract for the example above.

                                                 Example 3.1 E

                                 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011
                                   Cost          Accumulated Depreciation       Net Book Value
                                     $                         $                      $
             Motor Vehicle        50,000                    10,000                  40,000

                                 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2012
                                   Cost          Accumulated Depreciation          Net Book Value
                                    $                       $                            $
             Motor Vehicle        50,000                 18,000                        32,000

                                 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2013
                                   Cost          Accumulated Depreciation          Net Book Value
                                    $                       $                            $
             Motor Vehicle        50,000                 24,400                        25,600

                                 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2014
                                   Cost          Accumulated Depreciation          Net Book Value
                                    $                       $                            $
             Motor Vehicle        50,000                 29,520                        20,480

                                 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2015
                                   Cost          Accumulated Depreciation          Net Book Value
                                    $                       $                            $
             Motor Vehicle        50,000                 33,616                        16,384

          The Sale of an Asset

          When an asset is sold it should be deleted from your records. This is done by take out the
          cost from the asset account, the amount of accumulated depreciation removed from the
          provision for depreciation account, and then the profit or loss on sale is calculated. These
          entries are record in the asset disposal account.



Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 93
The Account Entries Needed

          On the sale of non-current asset, example Motor Vehicle, the following entries are needed.

          1. Transfer the cost of the asset to be sold to an asset disposal account (for this example a
             Motor Vehicle Disposal Account).

                             Debit Motor Vehicle Disposal Account
                             Credit  Motor Vehicle Account

          2. Transfer the accumulated depreciation to the asset disposal account.

                             Debit     Provision for Depreciation – Motor Vehicle
                             Credit    Motor Vehicle Disposal Account

          3. Record the funds received from the sale of the asset.

                             Debit     Cash Book
                             Credit    Motor Vehicle Disposal Account

          4. Transfer the balance on the asset disposal account to the Profit & loss account.

                  a) If the Motor Vehicle Disposal Account show a balance on the debit side of the
                     account then it is a profit on sale.

                             Debit     Motor Vehicle Disposal Account
                             Credit    Profit & loss Account

                  b) If the Motor Vehicle Disposal Account shows a balance on the credit side of the
                     account then it is a loss on sale.

                             Debit     Profit & loss Account
                             Credit    Motor Vehicle Disposal Account

          Now let us assume that the motor vehicle in the example above was disposed of at the end
          three years. Assume that on the 1st January 2014 the Motor Vehicle was sold for $20,000
          by cheque, then the following entries would be made to record this disposal.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 94
Motor Vehicle
  2011                                       $       2011                                 $
  1-Jan    Bank                            50,000   31-Dec Balance c/d                   50,000
  2012                                               2012
  1-Jan    Balance b/d                     50,000   31-Dec Balance c/d                   50,000
  2013                                               2013
  1-Jan    Balance b/d                     50,000   31-Dec Balance c/d                   50,000
  2014                                                2014
                                                            Motor Vehicle Disposal
  1-Jan    Balance b/d                     50,000     1-Jan Account                      50,000

                             Provision for Depreciation of Motor Vehicle
  2011                                       $       2011                                 $
 31-Dec    Balance c/d                     10,000   31-Dec Profit & loss                 10,000
  2012                                               2012
 31-Dec    Balance c/d                     18,000     1-Jan Balance b/d                  10,000
                                                    31-Dec Profit & loss                  8,000
                                           18,000                                        18,000
  2013                                               2013
 31-Dec    Balance c/d                     24,400     1-Jan Balance b/d                  18,000
                                                    31-Dec Profit & loss                  6,400
                                           24,400                                        24,400
  2014                                                2014
  1-Jan    Motor Vehicle Disposal
           Account                         24,400     1-Jan Balance b/d                  24,400


                                           24,400                                        24,400




                                            Example 3.1 F

                                               Cash Book

 Date                               Cash     Bank       Date                   Cash    Bank
  2014                              $        $           2014                  $       $

 1-Jan    Motor Vehicle Disposal             20,000




Introduction to Accounting                                                            Page | 95
Motor Vehicle Disposal Account
   2014                                   $       2014                                   $
   1-Jan Motor Vehicle                  50,000 1-Jan Provision for Depreciation        24,400
                                                  1-Jan Cash Book                      20,000
                                                  1-Jan Profit & loss (loss on Sale)    5,600
                                        50,000                                         50,000



             Profit & loss Account (extract) for the year ended 31 December 2014
                                                                                         $
           Gross Profit                                                                x xxxx
           Less Loss on sale of
           Motor Vehicle                                                                5,600

          TOPIC SUMMARY
          You have just looked at the entries necessary to record depreciation of non-current assets
          and the disposal of non-current assets. You should remember that the depreciation for the
          current year is charged to Profit & loss account but the accumulated depreciation is
          charged to the balance sheet each year.

          You will now continue by look at other necessary adjustment that are required before the
          final accounts can be prepared.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 96
TOPIC 3.2 ADJUSTMENTS FOR FINANCIAL REPORTING
          INTRODUCTION
          In order to give true and fair view of your financial statement there are adjustments
          required to account for prepaid and accrued expenses and revenue. These adjustments
          should be dealt with before you proceed to your financial statements.

          OBJECTIVES
          Upon completion of this topic you should be able:

          1.   Define the terms accrued and prepaid.
          2.   Make the necessary adjustment to expense and revenue accounts.
          3.   Account for these adjustments in the financial statements.
          4.   Understand why it is necessary to adjust expense and revenue accounts for amounts
               accrued or prepaid.

          MAKING ADJUSTMENTS
          So far we have assumed that all the expense and revenue incurred are for the present
          financial period. However there are instances where the amounts paid for expense or
          received for revenue would be for the previous financial period (accrued) or the upcoming
          financial period (prepaid). When this happens the figure charged to the financial
          statements for this period need to be adjusted to reflect the accrued or prepaid amounts.

          Let’s first look at the entries necessary for accrued and prepaid expenses. Let us assume
          that two businesses paid rent for the premises $8,000 by cheque per year. For the year
          2011 the following accrued

               Business A pays $6,500 during the year and owes $1,500 at the end of the year

                      Rent for the year               $8,000

                      Rent paid                       $6,500

                      Rent owed                       $1,500

               Business B pays $9,000 during the year which includes $1,000 prepaid for the following
               year.

                      Rent for the year               $8,000

                      Rent paid                       $9,000

                      Rent prepaid                    $1,000




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 97
ACCRUED EXPENSES (EXPENSES OWING)
          Remember that expenses are the cost of doing business for example salary, rent, utilities,
          carriage outwards, discount allowed and interest on money borrowed. From the example
          above the amount that should be debited to the Profit & loss account for rent should be
          $8,000 since that is amount that should be used up for this period.

                                                      Example 3.2A

           Business A

                                                      Rent Account
            Date     Details            folio      Amount     Date  Details             Folio   Amount
              2011                                    $        2011                                $
              31-Dec Bank               CB             6,500 31-Dec Profit & Loss                 8,000
              31-Dec Accrued            c/d            1,500
                                                       8,000                                      8,000
            2012                                               2012
            Jan 1            Accrued    b/d            1,500    1-Jan Accrued           b/d       1,500


                                Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011
                                                                              $       $
                                Rent                                         6,500


                                    Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011
                             Current Liabilities                                    $
                             Expenses Accrued                                           1,500
                                Add Rent Accrued                          1,500         8,000


          Observe that even though only $6,500 was paid for rent during the year the Profit & loss
          should include the total amount that should have been paid for the year. Also observe that
          accrued expense is added in the Profit & loss account. Accrued expenses are a liability to
          your business therefore any accrued expenses should be shown as a current liability in your
          balance sheet.

          PREPAID EXPENSES
          Let us now look at Business B and the entries necessary in your records to record prepaid
          expenses. Remember that the amount that should be debited to the Profit & loss account
          for rent is $8,000.



Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 98
Example 3.2 B

        Business B

                                                  Rent Account
         Date        Details      folio   Amount      Date       Details            Folio        Amount
              2011                        $              2011                                    $
            31-Dec Bank           CB          9,000    31-Dec Profit & loss                             8,000
                                                       31-Dec Prepaid               c/d                 1,000
                                              9,000                                                     9,000
              2012
              1-Jan prepaid       b/d         1,000

                              Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011
                                                                      $           $
                             Rent                                     9,000
                             Less Prepaid Rent                        1,000         8,000


                               Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011
                               Current Assets                                               $
                               Prepaid Expenses                                                 1,000

          Looking at the entries above you will see that prepaid expenses is subtracted in the Profit &
          loss account and included in the current assets in the balance sheet.

          We can now continue by looking at accrued and prepaid revenue. Remember that revenue
          accounts are those accounts that bring income into the business, for example discount
          received, interest received, rent received and commission received.

          Let us look at two businesses that sublet their premises for $5,000 per year. In 2011 the
          following accrued

          Business C received $4200 by cheque for rent in 2011

                      Rent that should be received for the year            $5,000

                      Rent received                                        $4,200

                      Rent received owed for the year                      $ 800

          Business D received $6,800 by cheque for rent in 2011

                      Rent that should be received for the year            $5,000

Introduction to Accounting                                                                           Page | 99
Rent received                                     $6,800

                      Rent received prepaid for the year                $1,800

           ACCRUED REVENUE (REVENUE OWING)
           From our example the amount that should be credited to the Profit & loss account for rent
           received is $5,000. Therefore the following entries are required to show the adjustment for
           revenue owing.

                                               Example 3.2 C

                                                 Business C

        Rent Received Account
        Date     Details              folio   Amount       Date        Details    Folio     Amount
        2011                                  $            2011                             $
        31-Dec   Profit & loss                5,000        31-Dec      Bank       CB        4,200
                                                           31-Dec      Owings     c/d       800
                                              5,000                                         5,000
        2012
        1-Jan       Owings            b/d     800

                      Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011
                                                                   $                 $
                        Gross Profit                                                 xxxx
                        Add Revenue
                        Rent Received                              4,200
                        Add Owings                                 800               5,000




                                  Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011
                                  Current Assets                          $
                                  Revenue owing                           800


           Take note that revenue is added to the gross profit in the Profit & loss account and that
           revenue owing is recorded as a current asset in the balance sheet.

           PREPAID REVENUE
           Observe in the entries below that prepaid revenue is recorded as a current liability in the
           balance sheet.



Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 100
Example 3.2 D

     Business D

                                          Rent Received Account
         Date    Details             folio Amount      Date     Details           Folio      Amount
            2011                            $              2011                              $
          31-Dec Profit & Loss                  5,000    31-Dec Bank              CB            6,800
          31-Dec Prepaid             c/d        1,800
                                                6,800                                                6,800
                                                              2012
                                                              1-Jan Prepaid       b/d                1,800

                           Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011
                                                                      $           $
                       Gross Profit                                                  xxxx
                       Add Revenue
                          Rent Received                               6,800
                          Less Prepaid                                1,800         5,000

                               Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011
                    Current Liabilities                                                $
                    Revenue prepaid                                                        1,800

           There is a credit entry in the rent received account above to indicate the cash received for
           the rent the debit entry is recorded in the cash book since the funds was received by the
           business.

           TOPIC SUMMARY
           There are number of things to remember from this topic

               1. Accounts should be adjusted at the end of each period to account for any
                  prepayments or accruals during the period.
               2. Accruals are added in the Profit & loss account while prepayments are subtracted.
               3. In the balance sheet prepaid expenses and revenue owing is included in the current
                  assets while expenses owing and revenue prepaid are included in the current
                  liabilities




Introduction to Accounting                                                                         Page | 101
TOPIC 3.3 BAD DEBTS AND PROVISION FOR BAD DEBTS
           INTRODUCTION
           Once a business decides to offer its goods and/or services on credit to its customers that
           business has to be prepared for some of its customers not paying for the goods and/or
           services they received. When this occurs the necessary adjustment should be made to
           account for these unpaid debts. In accounting when a business is unable to collect the
           amount due from its customers the amounts owed should be transferred to a bad debts
           account. In this topic you will look at bad debts and provisions that should be made for bad
           debts in your business.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon the completion of this topic you should be able to:

          1.    identify a bad debt;
          2.    describe how bad debts are written off;
          3.    explain how provisions for bad debts are made;
          4.    make accounting entries,
                (a) to recorded bad debts and provision for bad debts,
                (b) for increasing and reducing the provision for bad debts, and
                (c) for bad debts recovered.

           BAD DEBTS
           When a business decides to sell its goods/services to customers for credit there is a
           possibility of some of these customers not paying for the goods/services received. A
           customer may not be able to pay because their business has suffered a loss or they may
           have gone bankrupt. Bad debt is an expense to your business. Bad Debt is a debt that is
           unlikely to be paid

           Examine the following example.

                                                    Example 3.4 A

               You sold goods on credit to M. Label for $500 on the 21 January 2011. On March 15, you
               sold $725 goods on credit to J. Jackets. On the 1st June you received $375 by cash from M
               Label and on the 30 August you received $650 by cheque from J Jackets. At the end of
               your financial year you were notified that both M Label and J Jacket would not be able to
               pay the balance of their debts. You then decide to write the debts off.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 102
The following accounting entries are required:

           Debit - Bad Debt Account - to transfer the amount of the unpaid debit.

           Credit - Debtors Account - to reduce the liability for the debtor who is unable to pay.

           _____________________________________________________________________

           Debit - Profit & loss Account - to record the amount of bad debt for the accounting period.

          Credit - Bad Debt Account - to transfer the amount of bad debt to the profit
          and loss account.
          ___________________________________________________________________
          Your accounts should be as follows:
                                                  M. Label
          Date      Details   Folio Amount Date            Details               Folio Amount
           2011                           $         2011                                 $
           21-Jan Sales        GL          500       1-Jun Cash                   CB      375
                                                   31-Dec Bad Debts Account       GL      125
                                           500                                            500

                                                    J Jacket
          Date   Details        Folio Amount       Date      Details                Folio Amount
           2011                         $            2011                                   $
             15-
             Mar Sales           GL         725     30-Aug Bank                      CB          650
                                                    31-Dec Bad Debts Account         GL           75
                                            725                                                  725

                                          Bad Debts Account
          Date   Details        Folio Amount Date       Details                     Folio Amount
           2011                         $       2011                                        $
          31-Dec M. Label        SL      125   31-Dec Profit & loss                  a/c     200
          31-Dec J. Jacket       SL       75
                                         200                                                     200

                          Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011
                                                       $              $
                    Gross Profit                                          xxxx
                    Less Expenses
                       Bad Debts                                           200



           PROVISION FOR BAD DEBTS
Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 103
Because your business sell goods to its customers on credit you should make provision for
           the likely hood that some of customers will not pay their debt in full. A provision for bad
           debts account is created to show the estimated amount of debts that your business may
           not be able to recover. The amount for provision for bad debts can be estimates as follows

                   By looking at each debt and estimate which one will be bad
                   On the basis of experience estimate what percentage of the debts will result in bad
                   debts

           Normally a business decides what percentage of its debtors at the end of financial year it
           would estimate as being unrecoverable. Once the percentage is decide then the accounting
           entries are required

           In the first year:

                   Debit - Profit & loss Account with the amount of the provision
                   Credit - Provision for Bad Debts Account

           Increase in Provision of Bad Debts Amount

      In the years that follows if the amount of the provision is greater than the year before then the
      difference between both years is recorded as follows

                   Debit - Profit & loss Account (with the difference between previous and present
                   year)
                   Credit - Provision for Bad Debts (with the difference between the previous and
                   present year)

      Decrease in Provision of Bad Debts Amounts

           If the amount of the provision is less than the previous year the entries would be

           Debit - Provision for Bad Debts (with the difference between the previous & present year)

           Credit - Profit & loss Account (with the difference between previous and     present year)

           Example 3.4 B

           A business estimates that 2% of its debtors at the end of each year will be bad debts. The
           debtors figure for that business for the years 2011 – 2013 are:
                            2011           Debtors             $ 10,000
                            2012           Debtors             $ 12,000
                            2013           Debtors             $ 8,000

           Show the accounting entries necessary to record the above.

           The calculation is shown in the table below:

Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 104
Provision Provision         Profit &
                       Year    Debtors Percentage Amount              Loss
                                  $        %          $                $
                       2011     10,000      2           200                200
                       2012     12,000      2           240                 40
                       2013      8,000      2           160                 80

      You can how show the accounting entries to record these calculations

                                     Provision for Bad Debts Account
           Date   Details           Folio Amount Date           Details          Folio Amount
            2011                               $        2011                             $
           31-Dec Balance           c/d          200 31-Dec Profit & Loss        a/c       200
              2012                                       2012
            31-Dec Balance          c/d          240    1-Jan Balance            b/d       200
                                                       31-Dec Profit & Loss      a/c        40
                                                 240                                       240
             2013                                        2013
           31-Dec Profit & Loss     a/c           80     1-Jan Balance           b/d       240
           31-Dec Balance           c/d          160
                                                 240                                       240
                                                         2014
                                                         1-Jan Balance           b/d       160

                    Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011 - 2013
                                                 $                                        $
            2011 Provision for Bad Debts          200

            2012    Provision for Bad Debts       40
                                                       2013 Provision for Bad Debts       80

                   Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011 - 2013
                                                             $           $
                2011 Debtors                                10,000
                      Less Provision for bad debts              200      9,800
                2012 Debtors                                12,000
                      Less Provision for bad debts              240     11,760
                2011 Debtors                                  8,000
                      Less Provision for bad debts              160      7,840




Introduction to Accounting                                                             Page | 105
Take note that a reduction in the provision for bad debts is revenue to your business and
           should be added to your gross profit. Also note that the balance on the provision for bad
           debts account at the end of each financial period is subtracted from the debtors figure in
           the balance sheet.

           Let now look at fully worked example:

                                                  Example 3.4 C
           A business started on 1 January 2005 and its financial year end is 31 December annually.
           The table of the debtors, the bad debts written off and the estimated provision for bad
           debts at the end of the year is:

                                                           Bad Debts      Provision for Bad
                             Year        Debtors           written off     Debts Amount
                                              $                $                   $
                             2005           12,000            298                 100
                             2006           15,000            386                 130
                             2007           14,000            344                 115
                             2008           18,000            477                 150

           You are required to show the bad debts account and the provision for bad debts account,
           as well as the extracts from the Profit & loss account for each year and the balance sheet
           extracts.


           The double entry records to show the above is as follows

                                          Provision for Bad Debts
          Date     Details            Folio Amount Date           Details          Folio Amount
            2005                                 $        2005                             $
            31-Dec Balance            c/d         100     31-Dec Profit & loss     a/c      100
               2006                                          2006
             31-Dec Balance           c/d            130    1-Jan Balance          b/d         100
                                                           31-Dec Profit & loss    a/c          30
                                                     130                                       130
               2007                                          2007
             31-Dec Profit & loss     a/c             15     1-Jan Balance         b/d         130
             31-Dec Balance           c/d            115
                                                     130                                       130
               2008                                          2008
             31-Dec Balance           c/d            150    1-Jan Balance          b/d         115
                                                           31-Dec Profit & loss    a/c          35

Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 106
150                                       150
               2009                                     2009
                                                        1-Jan Balance        b/d         150

                   Profit & loss Account (extracts) for the year ended 31 December
                                               $                                     $
            2005 Bad Debts                    298
                 Provision for Bad Debts      100

            2006 Bad Debts                   386
                 Provision for Bad Debts      30

                                                 Reduction in Provision for Bad
            2007 Bad Debts                   344 Debts                                   15

            2008 Bad Debts                   477
                 Provision for Bad Debts      35




Introduction to Accounting                                                           Page | 107
Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December
                                                                        $      $
                             2005 Debtors                             12,000
                                  Less Provision for Bad Debts           100 11,900

                             2006 Debtors                               15,000
                                  Less Provision for Bad Debts             130   14,870

                             2007 Debtors                               14,000
                                  Less Provision for Bad Debts             115   13,885

                             2008 Debtors                               18,000
                                  Less Provision for Bad Debts             150   17,850


           There are instances where bad debts that are written off are recovered in the future.
           When this occur the debt should be reinstate by:

                   Debit - Debtors Account
                   Credit - Bad Debts recovered Account

           When cash or a cheque is received from the debtor in settlement of the account the entries
           should be:

                   Debit - Cash Book
                   Credit - Debtors Account

           TOPIC SUMMARY
           You just looked at the accounting entries required to bad debts and provision for bad debts.
           You should remember that after the first entry for provision for bad debts in the Profit &
           loss account the difference between the previous year and the present year is recorded in
           the Profit & loss account. Note that balance on the provision for bad debts account at the
           end of the financial period is deducted from the balance on the debtors account in the
           balance sheet. You should also remember that a reduction in the provision of bad debts is
           revenue to your business and should be added to your gross profit while an increase is an
           expense and should be deducted from your gross profit.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 108
TOPIC 3.4 INVENTORY ACCOUNTING
           INTRODUCTION
           At the beginning and end of every period there will be items of stock remain on your selves
           and in your warehouse. These stocks have to be valued and accounted for in the financial
           statements. In this topic we will look at the valuation of stock and the various methods of
           valuing closing stock.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon the completion of this topic you should be able to:

              1.   Identify different methods of stock valuation.
              2.   Examine different methods of stock valuation (LIFO, FIFO, AVCO).
              3.   Illustrate the different adjustment required to arrive at the closing stock.
              4.   Show how the necessary adjustments are recorded in the financial statements.

           STOCK VALUATION
           Stock are goods purchased for re-sale. Keeping a record of stock involves adding new stock
           purchased and deducting any stock sold. Stocktaking (taking inventory) is the process of
           physically checking stock. This involves physically counting the stock on hand and
           comparing the findings with figures on the stock record. Stocktaking helps to assess the
           amount of loss due to theft or breakage and ensure that ht stock records are being kept
           effectively.

           There are two ways that stock may be recorded by a business.

              1. Perpetual method or continuous method where stocks are updated after each
                 purchase, sale or return of stock.
              2. Periodic method where the closing stock figure is determined by physically counting
                 and valuing stock on hand at the end of a period.

           Methods of Stock Valuation

              There are three methods of valuing stock. These are:

              1. First In First Out (FIFO) assumes that the first set of stocks purchased are the first set
                 of stocks that would be sold.
              2. Last In First Out (LIFO) assumes that last set of stocks purchase are the first set of
                 stock that would be sold.
              3. Average Cost (AVCO) values closing stock by using the average cost of the stocks
                 available for sale. This is done as follows:


                                          Cost of goods available for sale


Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 109
Average Cost = number of units available for sale

           You can now examine the valuation of closing stock using each method in the example
           below.

                                                   Example 3.4 A

            For 2011 the receipt and issue of stocks are as follows

            Receipt                                                   Sales

            Jan          20 items at $30 each            June          6 items for $45 each

            May          10 items at $33 each            Aug          22 items for $46 each

            July         16 items at $38.50 each         Dec           10 items for $48 each

            Oct          12 items at $39 each

            There was no opening stock.

                       Calculate the closing stock using (i) FIFO (ii) LIFO (iii) AVCO.
                       Draw up the trading account for the year ended 31 December 2011 showing the
                       different reported gross profits from the figures given in (a)



                                                            Stock after each
             FIFO             Received      Issued                             $                 $
                                                            transaction
             January          20 @ $30                      20 @ $30                             600
                                                            20 @ $30           600
             May              10 @ $33                                                           930
                                                            10 @ $33           330
                                                            14 @ $30           420
             June                           6 @ $30                                              750
                                                            10 @ $33           330
                                                            14 @ $30           420
             July             16 @ 38.50                    10 @ $33           330               1,366
                                                            16 @ $38.50        616
                                            14 @ $30        2 @ $33            66
             August                                                                              682
                                            8 @ $33         16 @ $38.50        616
                                                            2@ $33             66
             October          12 @ $39                      16 @ $38.50        616               1,150
                                                            12 @ 39            468
                                            2 @ $33         8 @ $38.50         308
             December                                                                            682
                                            8 @ $38.50      12 @ $39           468




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 110
Take note that the first items of stock purchased are the first to be sold. Also note that
           stock is valued at cost price not at selling (sales) price. The valuation of stock should not
           include profit amounts.

                                                               Stock after each
             LIFO             Received        Issued                                $               $
                                                               transaction
             January          20 @ $30                         20 @ $30                             600

                                                               20 @ $30
             May              10 @ $33                                              600             930
                                                               10 @ $33
                                                                                    330
                                                               20 @ $30             600
             June                             6 @ $33                                               732
                                                               4 @ $33              132
                                                               20 @ $30             600
             July             16 @ 38.50                       4 @ $33              132             1,348
                                                               16 @ $38.50          616
                                              16 @ $38.50
             August                            4 @ $33         18 @ $30                             540
                                               2 @ $30
                                                               18 @ $30             540
             October          12 @ $39                                                              1,008
                                                               12 @ $39             468

                                                               18 @ $30             540
             December                         10 @ $39                                              618
                                                               2 @ $39               78


           You can observe that when the LIFO method of valuation is used the last item of stock
           received becomes the first item of stock to be issued.

                                                               Average Cost per     Number of       Value of
             AVCO             Received        Issued
                                                               unit                 units           stock
                                                               $                                    $
             January          20 @ $30                         30                   20              600

                                                               30 + 33 = 31
             May              10 @ $33                                                              930
                                                               10 + 20              30

             June                             6 @ $31          31                   24              744

                                                               31 + 38.50
             July             16 @ 38.50                                            40              1,360
                                                               24 + 16 = 34

             August                           22 @ $34         34                   18              612

                                                               34 + 39
             October          12 @ $39                                              30              1,080
                                                               40 + 12 = 36

Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 111
Average Cost per   Number of      Value of
             AVCO             Received        Issued
                                                               unit               units          stock

             December                         10 @ $36         36                 20             720


           You can move on to look at the trading account taking into account the different valuations
           of stock just calculated.

                                  Trading Account for the year ended 31 December 2011
                                                  FIFO                 LIFO              AVCO
                                              $            $         $        $           $     $
                    Sales                             1,762               1,762             1,762
                    Less Cost of Goods Sold
                              Purchases        2014                2014               2014
                              Less Closing
                              Stock             776 1,238           618 1,396          729 1,294
                    Gross Profit                        524                 366               468



            The sales figure is calculated by adding all the sales

                                   June      6 x 45              270
                                   August   22 x 46            1,012
                                   December 10 x 48              480
                                                               1,762

           The purchase figure is calculated by adding all the purchase amounts

                                   January    20 x 30                600
                                   May        10 x 33                330
                                   July       16 x 38.50             616
                                   October    12 x 39                468
                                                                2014

           The use of different methods of valuation of stock would give a different value of gross
           profit and net profit for the same business.

           TOPIC SUMMARY
           You just observed that different methods can be used to value closing stock. You would
           have noted that these different methods of valuation have a different effect on the profit
           calculation.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 112
TOPIC 3.5 FINAL ACCOUNTS FOR SOLE TRADER
           INTRODUCTION
           So far in this unit you have looked at different adjustment needed before the final accounts
           can be prepared. The final accounts for a sole trader business are the Income Statement
           (Trading and Profit & loss Account) and the Balance Sheet. The final accounts give a picture
           of the financial position of your business. It shows where or not your business has made a
           profit or loss during the accounting period and whether you are able to pay your debts as
           they become due. Let’s now have a look at the final accounts of a sole trader business.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon the completion of this topic you should be able to;

               1.   understand how profit/loss is calculated,
               2.   calculate the cost of goods sold, gross profit and net profit,
               3.   transfer net profit and drawings to the capital account at the end of the period, and
               4.   prepare an Income Statement from a trial balance.

           FINAL ACCOUNTS
           After your trial balance is completed your final accounts are prepared. The final accounts
           of a sole trader business include the Income Statement (trading and Profit & loss account)
           and the balance sheet. Remember that your trial balance is the summary of the balances in
           all your accounts. Some of these balances (those from your nominal accounts) affect the
           profit and are transferred to the Income statement; the others (real and personal accounts)
           are transferred to your balance sheet. The Income Statement and the Balance Sheet are
           prepared at the end of each financial period to record how well the business operated
           during that financial period.

           Income Statement

           One of the most important financial statements of any business is the Income Statement. It
           is used to determine the following:

              1. how profitable a business is being run; and
              2. comparing the results received with the results expected.

           The Income Statement can be divided into two sections the trading account and the Profit
           & loss account. The gross profit which is the amount of profit made before the expenses
           are deducted is calculated in the trading account. The purpose of the trading account is to
           determine the gross profit made from sales. Therefore the accounts that are directly
           related to buying and selling (trading) will be transferred to the trading account. The
           accounts directly related to trading are:

                    Sales


Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 113
Purchase
                   Sales Return
                   Purchases Return
                   Carriage Inwards

           Gross profit is calculated as:

                       Gross Profit = Net Sales – Cost of Goods Sold (COGS)

           Along with gross profit the net sales, cost of goods sold and the cost of goods available for
           sale is also calculated in the trading account:

                       Net Sales = Sales – Sales Return (Return Inwards)

           Net sales are the total sales figure after allowances have been made for sales returned to
           the business.

                       COGS = Cost of goods available for sale (COGAFS) – Closing Stock

                       COGAFS = Opening Stock + (Purchases – Purchases Return) + Carriage Inwards

           The net profit of your business is calculated in the Profit & loss account. Net profit is the
           balance of profit after allowance is made for revenue and expenses. It is calculated as:

                       Net Profit = Gross profit + Revenue – expenses

           The revenue and expense charged to the Profit & loss account are those that are not
           directly related to trading but more to do with the running of the business. Some of these
           accounts are:

                   Rent
                   Telephone
                   Carriage outwards
                   Discount allowed
                   Discount received
                   Commission received
                   Commission paid
                   Salary

           In Unit Two these accounts were closed off and transferred to the income statement. The
           income statement can be shown horizontally or vertically.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 114
BALANCE SHEET
           The other half of our final accounts is the Balance Sheet. The Balance Sheet is a financial
           statement showing the book values of the assets, liabilities and capital at the end of the
           financial period. It shows what the business owes and what it owns.

           The assets of the business is divided into two categories and recorded as follows

              1. Non-Current Assets are assets that:

                      are expected to be of use in the business for long time;
                      are to be used in the business; and
                      were not bought only for the purpose of resale.

                  Non-current assets are recorded in the balance sheet starting with those assets that
                  will in the business the longest down to those that will be kept for a shorter period.
                  Example of non-current assets and the order of record are:

                      Land and Buildings.
                      Fixtures and Fittings.
                      Machinery.
                      Motor Vehicles.

              2. Current Assets are recorded next. These are assets will change within the next
                 twelve months. They are recorded as follows:

                      Stock (goods bought for resale)
                      Debtors.
                      Cash at Bank.
                      Cash in Hand.

              3. Non-current Liability - Sometime referred to as long term liability are those debts
                 that take more than a year to settle. This includes large loans and mortgages.

              4. Current Liability - are debts that will be settled in one year or less. This includes
                 creditors and small loans.

           Let’s now prepare the final accounts from the trial balance on the next page.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 115
Example 3.5A
                                         MDAR Retailer
                             Trial Balance as at 31 December 2011
                                                                     Dr.        Cr.
                                                                      $          $
         Discount Allowed                                              410
         Discount Received                                                       506
         Carriage Inwards                                               309
         Carriage Outwards                                              218
         Return Inwards                                               1,384
         Return Outwards                                                          810
         Sales                                                                120,320
         Purchases                                                   84,290
         Stock 31 December 2010                                      30,816
         Motor expenses                                               4,917
         Repairs to premises                                          1,383
         Pay                                                         16,184
         Sundry expenses                                                807
         Rates and insurance                                          2,896
         Premises at cost                                            40,000
         Motor Vehicle at cost                                       11,160
         Provision for depreciation motors as at 31 December 2010               3,860
         Debtors                                                     31,640
         Creditors                                                             24,320
         Cash at bank                                                 4,956
         Cash in hand                                                    48
         Drawings                                                     8,736
         Capital                                                               50,994
         Loan from P. Holland                                                  40,000
         Bad Debts                                                    1,314
         Provision for bad debts as at 31 December 2010                         658
                                                                    241,468 241,468

        The following should be considered on 31 December 2011
        1) Stock $36,420
            a) Expenses owing
            b) Sundry expenses $62
        2) Motor expenses $33
        3) prepayments
            a) Rates $166
        4) Provision for bad debts to be reduced to $580
        5) Depreciation for motors to be $2,100 for the year
        6) Part of the premises were let to a tenant who owed $250 at 31 December 2011
        7) Loan interest owing to P. Holland, $4,000
        Prepare the Income Statement and Balance Sheet as at 31 December 2011.




Introduction to Accounting                                                              Page | 116
Horizontal presentation of the Income Statement and Balance Sheet.

                                                 MDAR Retailer
                                                Income Statement
                                   for the year ended 31 December 2011
                                       $            $                                  $          $
    Opening Stock                                 30,816   Sales                     120,320
    Add Purchases                    84,290                Less Sales Returns          1,384    118,936
    Less Purchases Return               810       83,480
    Add Carriage Inwards                             309
    COGAFS                                       114,605
    Less Closing Stock                            36,420
    COGS                                          78,185
    Gross Profit c/d                              40,751
                                                 118,936                                        118,936
    Less Expenses                                          Gross Profit b/d                      40,751
    Motor Expenses                    4,917                Add Revenue
    Add Motor expenses
    owing                                  33      4,950         Discount Received      506
    Pay                                           16,184        Rent Receivable         250
                                                            Reduction in Provision
    Carriage Outwards                                218   for Bad Debts                   78      834
    Discount Allowed                                 410                                         41,585
    Repairs to Premises                            1,383
    Sundry Expenses                     807
    Add sundry expenses
    owing                                  62        869
    Bad Debts                                      1,314
    Rates and Insurance               2,896
    Less prepaid rates and
    insurance                           166        2,730
    Loan Interest                                  4,000
    Depreciation: Motor                            2,100
    Net Profit                                     7,427
                                                  41,585                                         41,585




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 117
MDAR Retailer
                                               Balance Sheet
                                          as at 31 December 2011
 Non-Current Assets               $        $          $       Capital                    $    $          $
 Premises at cost                                    40,000   Balance as at 1 Jan 2011                 50,994
 Motor Vehicle at cost                   11,160               Add Net Profit                            7,427
 Less Depreciation to date                5,960       5,200                                            58,421
                                                     45,200   Less Drawings                             8,736
 Current Assets                                                                                        49,685
 Stock                                   36,420               Non-Current Liability
 Debtors                        31,640                        Loan from P. Holland                     40,000
 Less Provision for Bad Debts     580    31,060                                                        89,685
 Prepaid Expense                           166
 Revenue owing                             250                Current Liabilities
 Cash at bank                             4,956               Creditors                      24,320
 Cash in hand                                  48    72,900   Expenses owing                  4,095    28,415
                                                    118,100                                           118,100



           Vertical presentation of the Income Statement and the Balance Sheet.

            The vertical presentation is the most common method of presenting final accounts today.
           In the vertical presentation of the balance sheet the working capital is indicated. This is
           calculated as:

                                Working Capital = Current Assets - Current Liabilities

           The working capital indicates the liquidity of your business. This means the ability of your
           business to pay its debts when they become due. It gives an idea of the amount of funds
           available to run the business on a day to day basis.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                        Page | 118
MDAR Retailer
                                            Income Statement
                                  for the year ended 31 December 2011
                                                            $          $         $
           Sales                                                      120,320
           Less Sales Returns                                            1,384
           Net Sales                                                             118,936
           Opening Stock                                               30,816
           Add Purchases                                84,290
           Less Purchases Return                           810         83,480
           Add Carriage Inwards                                           309
           COGAFS                                                     114,605
           Less Closing Stock                                          36,420
           COGS                                                                   78,185
           Gross Profit                                                           40,751
           Add Revenue
               Discount Received                                          506
                Rent Receivable                                           250
                Reduction in Provision for Bad Debts                       78        834
                                                                                  41,585
           Less Expenses
            Motor Expenses                               4,917
            Add Motor expenses owing                        33          4,950
           Pay                                                         16,184
           Carriage Outwards                                              218
           Discount Allowed                                               410
           Repairs to Premises                                          1,383
           Sundry Expenses                                 807
           Add sundry expenses owing                        62            869
           Bad Debts                                                    1,314
           Rates and Insurance                           2,896
           Less prepaid rates and insurance                166          2,730
           Loan Interest                                                4,000
           Depreciation: Motor vehicles                                 2,100     34,158
           Net Profit                                                              7,427




Introduction to Accounting                                                        Page | 119
MDAR Retailer
                                               Balance Sheet
                                          as at 31 December 2011
           Non-Current Assets                                $     $        $
           Premises at cost                                                 40,000
           Motor Vehicle at cost                                   11,160
           Less Depreciation to date                                5,960    5,200
                                                                            45,200
           Current Assets
           Stock                                                   36,420
           Debtors                                       31,640
           Less Provision for Bad Debts                     580    31,060
           Prepaid Expense                                            166
           Revenue owing                                              250
           Cash at bank                                             4,956
           Cash in hand                                                48
                                                                   72,900
           Current Liabilities
           Creditors                                     24,320
           Expenses owing                                 4,095    28,415
           Working Capital                                                  44,485
                                                                            89,685

           Financed by
           Balance as at 1 January 2011                                     50,994
           Add Net Profit                                                    7,427
                                                                            58,421
           Less Drawings                                                     8,736
                                                                            49,685
           Non-Current Liability
           Loan from P. Holland                                             40,000
                                                                            89,685




Introduction to Accounting                                                  Page | 120
TOPIC SUMMARY
           You have just examined the final account of a sole trader business. Remember that the
           final accounts are made up of the income statement and the balance sheet. The income
           statement can be further divided into a trading account and also a Profit & loss account.
           You would have noted that the information to draw up the final accounts is taken from
           your trial balance. Some of the information in your trial balance is transferred to the
           income statement and others to the balance sheet.

           A number of important information about your business is calculated in the income
           statement. This included the gross profit/loss and net profit/loss of your business. These
           indicate how well your business is running. Your balance sheet shows your assets in
           relation to your capital and liabilities. In the vertical presentation of the balance sheet you
           are able to calculate your working capital which is an indication of liquidity of your business.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 121
UNIT SUMMARY
           In this unit you had a look at adjustments that should be made to your accounts before
           your final accounts are prepared. These adjustments included adjustments for depreciation
           and provision for depreciation, bad debts and provision for bad debts, accrued and prepaid
           expenses and revenue and also at the different valuation of closing stock. All these
           adjustments are necessary if your final accounts are to present a true and fair view of your
           business.

           Once you would complete all the necessary adjustment your final accounts can be
           prepared. Your final accounts include your income statement and balance sheet. Your
           income statement comprise of your trading account where your gross profit/loss is
           calculated and your Profit & loss account where your net profit/loss is calculated. You also
           had a look at the two ways to present your final account the horizontal and vertical
           presentations.

           Now that you have completed the final accounts for a sole trader you will now continue by
           analysing and interpreting these financial statements and have a look at the control
           systems of a business in Unit 4.

           UNIT REFERENCES
           Austen, D., Ellis, D., et al (2011). Principles of Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom, Nelson
           Thornes Ltd.

           Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations. Macmillan
           Publishers Ltd.

           Whitcomb, A., & Clarke, G., (202). Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom, Heinemann
           Educational Publishers

           Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.). England,
           Pearson Education Limited

           CliffsNotes.com. Depreciation of Operating Assets. 18 Apr 2011

           http://www.cliffsnotes.com/study_guide/topicArticleId-21081,articleId-21076.html

           http://docs.globaltext.terry.uga.edu:8095/anonymous/webdav/Accounting%20Principles/A
           ccounting%20Principles%20Vol.%201.pdf




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 122
UNIT FOUR – ANALYSING/INTERPRETING FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

      INTRODUCTION
            In this unit you will analyse and interpret the information in the financial statements.
            Earlier you learnt that the financial statements are used by different persons for various
            reasons. You can tell a lot about a business by looking at its financial statements, however
            to get a true picture of the performance of your business these record can be further
            analysed by the use of different ratios and formulas. We would have a more in-depth look
            at the financial statements of a business in this unit. You will also have a look at control
            systems that business put in place to monitor various aspects of their business

     OBJECTIVES
            Upon completion of this unit you will be able to:

           1.    identify ratios that can analyse the performance of sole trader business;
           2.    state he formula to be used when calculating accounting ratios;
           3.    calculate ratios based on the end of period financial statements;
           4.    calculate and analyse ratios on profitability, liquidity and efficiency to assess your
                 business performance;
           5.    employ accounting ratios to calculate missing figures in financial statements;
           6.    explain why the petty cash book is used;
           7.    describe the imprest system;
           8.    list the need for control accounts;
           9.    examine the double entry aspect of control accounts;
           10.   reconcile cash book balances with bank statement balances;
           11.   state the reasons for preparing bank reconciliation statement;
           12.   list the functions of the payroll;
           13.   calculate employees’ pay using various methods;
           14.   distinguish between statutory and non-statutory deductions;
           15.   complete the payroll and wage documents from time cards;
           16.   distinguish between the different types of errors; and
           17.   correct errors using the journal.

     UNIT READINGS
            The instructor will provide a list of readings.

     ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES
            The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions.


 Introduction to Accounting                                                                       Page | 123
TOPIC 4.1 ACCOUNTING RATIOS
           INTRODUCTION
          There are a number of ratios used to analyse and interpret the performance of a business.
          They are valuable means of comparing the performance of your business. These ratios can
          be classified as trading account ratios, profit and loss ratios and balance sheet ratios. In this
          topic we will examine each of these ratios.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to:

              1.   identify ratios that can be used to analyse the performance of your business;
              2.   calculate ratios based on the end of year financial statements;
              3.   state the formulas to be used when calculating accounting ratios; and
              4.   calculate and analyse ratios on profitability, liquidity and efficiency to assess a
                   business’s performance.

           INTERPRETATION OF ACCOUNTS
           In order to assess the performance of business, financial information is recorded, classified
           and communicated to the different users of accounting information. The financial
           information can be evaluated by the use of accounting ratios. Ratios provide a valuable
           means of comparing the performance of a business

                   From one year to the next
                   With other similar businesses

           They enable changes in important aspects of a business’s performance to be pinpointed
           and quantified. If ratios are calculated every year, it is possible to see whether any
           significant trends are becoming apparent. (David, A., et al 2011)

           An important factor in a business is to ensure that it operates at a profit and that it can pay
           its creditors and expenses when they become due. The ability for a business to pay its
           debts when they become due is known as liquidity and the ability to make a profit is known
           as profitability.

           We will have a look at the profitability and liquidity ratios and which part of the financial
           statement should be used to calculate these ratios.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 124
TRADING ACCOUNT RATIOS
           Accounting ratios that uses the information from your trading account can be classified as
           trading account ratios. These ratios are

              1. Margin which is gross profit is shown as a percentage of selling price

                                Gross Profit x 100
                                Selling Price

              2. Mark-up is gross profit shown as a percentage of cost price

                                Gross Profit   x 100
                                 Cost Price

              3. Rate of stock turnover or stock turn measures quickly a business sells its goods
                 without losing its profitability.

                                Cost of goods sold = stock turnover
                                Average stock

                      Average stock = opening stock + closing stock
                                                 2

              4. Gross profit as percentage of sales this measures the amount of gross profit from
                 ever $100 of sales

                                Gross Profit    x 100
                                 Sales

           The gross profit as a percentage of sales and rate of stock turnover ratios are ratios that
           measures the profitability of a business.

                                                         Example 4.1

           A business’s trading account include the following information

           Trading Account
           For the year ended 31 December 2010

                                                     $                   $           $
           Sales                                                                   240,000
           Opening Stock                                                16,000
           Add Purchases                                               178,000
                                                                       194,000
           Less Closing Stock                                           14,000      180,000
           Gross Profit                                                              60,000




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 125
Margin                   Gross Profit x 100       60,000 x 100        25%
                                    Selling Price            240,000


           Mark-up                  Gross Profit   x 100     60,000 x 100        33 1/3 %
                                     Cost Price              180,000


           Rate of Stock            Cost of goods sold       180,000             12 times
           Turnover                 Average stock            15,000


           Gross Profit as a        Gross Profit x            60,000             25 %
           percentage of Sales      100                      240,000
                                      Sales


           PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT RATIOS
           Accounting ratios classified as profit and loss account ratios are

              1. Net profit as a percentage of sales this shows how much net profit has been made
                 for every $100 of sales.


                               Net Profit x 100
                               Sales

           This ratio takes into account the expenses incurred and shows the amount of profit
           remaining. Changes in this ratio can be linked to

                    Changes in the gross profit/sales percentage
                    Changes in the expenses.

              2. Expenses to sales ratio

                               Expenses x 100
                               Sale




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 126
Example 4.2

           A business’s total sales for the year ended 31 December 2010 was $400,000. Its Profit and
           Loss included the following information.
                                                     $               $              $
           Gross Profit                                                            140,000
           General expenses                                         24,000
           Wages                                                    82,000         106,000
           Profit                                                                   34,000

           Net Profit as           Net Profit x 100         34,000 x 100
           Percentage of sales       Sales                 400,000                 8.5%

           Expenses as             Expenses x 100
           Percentage of Sales      Sales                  106,000 x 100           26.5%
                                                           400,000


           BALANCE SHEET RATIOS
           Manager uses different information to determine the performance of the business. The
           ratios that analyse the balance sheet are

              1. Current ratio
                              Current Assets
                             Current Liabilities

           This shows the relationship between the current assets and the current liabilities. It
           determines the amount of money the business has to pay its debts as they become due.
           The ability of a business to pay its debts when they become due is called liquidity. The
           business will have liquidity problems if this ratio is below 2:1.


              2. Acid Test Ratio

                              Current Assets – Stock
                                Current Liabilities

           The acid test ratio also measures the liquidity of a business since it measures the amount of
           liquid assets it has to pay its current liabilities


              3. Return on Capital Employed

                                      Profit      x 100
                                 Capital Invested

           This ratio compares the amount of profit made in relation to the amount of money invested
           into the business.

Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 127
4. Debtors Ratio

                                      Debtors    x 12
                                       Sales

           The debtor’s ratio measures how long the debtors take to pay what they owe to the
           business.

              5. Creditors Ratio

                                      Creditors x 12
                                      Purchases

           This measures how long it takes the business to pay the debts owed to its suppliers within a
           year.


                                                        Example 4.3

           J. Richardson Retail Store Balance Sheet as at 31 December 2011 is as follows:

                                                J. Richardson Retail Store
                                                       Balance Sheet
                                                 As at 31 December 2011

           Fixed Assets                                            $             $
           Equipment at cost                                      10,000
           Less Depreciation to date                               8,000       2,000

           Current Assets
           Stock                                                 15,000
           Debtors                                               25,000
           Bank                                                    5,000
                                                                  45,000
           Less Current Liabilities
           Creditors                                                  5,000   40,000
                                                                              42,000

           Financed by:
           Capital                                                            38,000
           Add Net Profit                                                     10,000
                                                                              48,000
           Less Drawings                                                       6,000
                                                                              42,000
           The following information is also available
           Sales               $80,000
           Purchases           $50,000
           Net Profit          $10,000


Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 128
Current ratio       Current Assets                45,000                           9:1
                              Current liabilities            5,000


                              Current Assets – Stock         30,000                           6:1
           Acid Test Ratio      Current Liabilities          5,000

                                   Profit      x 100                 10,000      x 100        25%
           Return on          Capital Invested               (38,000 + 42,000)÷2
           Capital
           Employed
           Debtors Ratio      Debtors           x     12     25,000 x 12                      3.75
                               Sales                         80,000                           months

           Creditors Ratio    Creditors        x 12          5,000 x 12                       1.2
                              Purchases                      50,000                           months


           TOPIC SUMMARY
           You have completed the examination of your financial records with the use of accounting
           ratios. You would have learnt that ratios shows and identifies different performances of
           your business. You can now compare how your business performs from one period to the
           next and with similar businesses. They inform you and guide you to make necessary
           changes to improve your business performance.




Introduction to Accounting                                                               Page | 129
TOPIC 4.2 CORRECTION OF ERRORS
           INTRODUCTION
           A Trial Balance is drawn up at the end of the accounting period using the balances on each
           account in the ledgers. Even thought the trial balance totals may agree there are instances
           where errors may be made in the recording of accounting entries. In this topic you will look
           at those errors that may occur that do not affect the trial balance and agreement and how
           these errors are corrected. We will also look at those errors that will affect the agreement
           of the trial balance totals and how to correct these errors.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to:

              1.   understand that there are two types of errors;
              2.   appreciate that errors are identified after a period of time;
              3.   distinguish between the different types of errors; and
              4.   use the journals to correct errors.

           TYPES OF ERRORS
           There are two types of errors.

              1. Those that affect the trial balance totals agreement.
              2. Those that don’t affect the trial balance agreement.

           Whenever these errors are identified they are corrected by using the journal. You have
           learnt how the trial balance is used to check the arithmetic accuracy of the financial
           records. You will how learn that not all errors are revealed in the trial balance. We will now
           look at these errors in more detail




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 130
Errors that don’t affect the trial balance agreement

           Your trail balance can still balance even though errors were made in your records. These
           errors are

           1. Errors of Commission – this occurs when the correct amount is entered in the records
              but in the wrong persons account.

                                                      Example

               V. Peters paid us $150 by Cheque on 7th September 2011. This is correctly entered in
               the cash book, but was entered by error in A. Peters. The error was found on 30
               September 2011. This will now have to be corrected and requires two entries

               Debit A Peters’ Account    To cancel out the error on the credit side of that account
               Credit V Peters Account    To enter the amount in the correct account
                                                      A Peters
               2011                                 $      2011                            $
               Sept 31   V Peters: Error Corrected 150      Sept 7 Bank                   150

                                                      V. Peters
               2011                                $       2011                             $
               Sept 1    Balance b/d              150     Sept 31 Cash entered in error
                                                                 In A. Peters account       150




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 131
2. Errors of Principle – occurs when an item is entered in the wrong type of account. Eg.
              A fixed asset entered in an expense account.

                                                         Example

               You purchase motor car for $6,700 by cheque on 12 September 2011 has been debited in
               error to the motor expenses account. In the cash book it is shown correctly. This means
               that there has been both a debit of $6,700 and a credit of $6,700.

               The error is detected on 30 September 2011 and is corrected. To do so two entries are
               needed;
               Debit       Motor Car Account to put the amount in the correct account
               Credit       Motor Expenses      to cancel the error previously made in the motor
                                                expenses account

                                                   Motor Expenses
               2011                                $    2011                             $
               Sept 12       Bank                 6,700 Sept 30 motor car (error corrected) 6,700

                                                        Motor Car
               2011                                $    2011                                $
               Sept 30 Bank (error corrected)      6,7000



           3. Error of Omission – occurs when a transactions has been completely omitted from the
              books

                                                       Example

               You sold goods to P. Jackson for $250 on 7th September 2011 but did not enter the
               transaction in the accounts. There were no debit and credit entries made. The error
               was identified on 30 September. The entries to correct it will be thus:
                                                        Sales
               2011                                $      2011                            $
                                                         Sept 30    P. Jackson                250

                                                       P. Jackson
               2011                                $       2011                            $
               Sept 30        Sales               250




Introduction to Accounting                                                               Page | 132
4. Error of Original Entry – occurs when an item is entered, but both debit and credit
              entries are of the same incorrect amount.

                                                          Example

               Purchases of $150 to T Henry on 13 September 2011 have been entered as both a debit
               and credit of $125. The account would appear thus:
                                                     T. Henry
               2011                                   $      2011                           $
                                                             Sept 13 Purchases              125

                                                          Purchases
               2011                                   $       2011                           $
               Sept 13       T Henry                 125

               The error is found 30 September 2011, The entries to correct is are now shown:

                                                          T. Henry
               2011                                  $      2011                               $
                                                           Sept 13 Purchases                   125
                                                           Sept 30 purchases (error corrected) 25

                                                          Purchases
               2011                                    $      2011                           $
               Sept 13       T Henry                   125
               Sept 30       T. Henry (error corrected) 25




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 133
5. Compensating Errors – where two or more unrelated errors cancel each other out.

                                                         Example

               In a case where incorrect totals has purchases of $7,900 and sales of $9,900. The
               purchases day book adds up to be $200 too much. In the same period, the sales day
               book also adds up to be $200 too much.

               If these were the only errors in your books, the trial balance totals would equal each
               other. Both totals would be wrong – they would both be $200 too much- but they
               would equal. In this case, the accounts would have appeared as follows:

                                                           Sales
               2011                                  $      2011                              $
                                                           Sept 13 Total sales               9,900

                                                         Purchases
               2011                                   $   2011                                $
               Sept 13       Total Purchases        7,900

               When corrected, the accounts will appear as:

                                                           Sales
               2011                               $   2011                                   $
               Sept 30 Journal (error corrected) 200 Sept 13 Total sales                    9,900

                                                         Purchases
               2011                                   $    2011                              $
               Sept 13       Total Purchases        7,900 Sept 30 Journal (error corrected) 200

               The Journal entries to correct these two errors will be
                                                        Journal
                2011                                                  DR               CR
                                                                      $                $
               Sept 30        Sales                                  200
                              Purchases                                               200
                              Correction of compensating error




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 134
Errors that affect the trial balance agreement

           These errors will cause a difference in the trial balance totals. These errors are

              1. Under-casting and over-casting – figures that are larger or smaller than they should
                 be.
              2. Transposition – that is figures turned around eg. 23 instead of 32
              3. Entries made on the wrong side of accounts – that is a debit entry made instead of a
                 credit entry.
              4. Half the double entry omitted – only one part of the double entry completed

           When there is difference in the trial balance, the amount is transferred to the suspense
           account on the same side as the difference in the trial balance. A suspense account is
           opened to record the difference in the trial balance totals. When the errors are located
           they are first recorded in the journal and the correction is recorded in the suspense
           account.

           In order to correct these errors several entries are needed to make a correction, first
           entries to cancel the original entry which is wrong and second the entries that should have
           been made in the first place.



           Example
           Your Trial Balance on 31 December 2010 shows a difference of $350. It was a shortage on
           credit side. A suspense account is opened and the difference of $350 is entered on the
           credit side.

           On 30 September 2011 the error is found. You had received payment of $350 from V.
           Peters to close her account. It was correctly entered in the cash book, but it was not
           entered in V. Peters’ account.

           To correct the error, the account of V. Peters is credited with $350, as it should have been
           2010, and the suspense account is debited with $350 so that the account can be closed.

                                                      V. Peters
           2011                                    $      2011                                      $
           Jan 1      Balance b/d                 350     Sept 30    Bank                          350

                                                 Suspense Account
           2011                                      $     2010                                $
           Sept 30 V. Peters                        350    Dec 31 Difference per trial balance 350




Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 135
Journal
           2011                                                 DR                CR
                                                                          $                 $
           Sept 30     Suspense Account                                  350
                           V. Peters                                                       350
                       Correction of non-entry of payment made by
                        V. Peters account


           TOPIC SUMMARY
           You would have learnt that all errors cannot be identified from simply looking at your
           records. You would also learnt that all errors do not affect your Trial Balance total. Some
           errors are only identified after careful examination of your books.

           You would also realize that an error has occurred once the trial balance totals doesn’t
           agree. When this happens the difference on the trial balance is transferred to a suspense
           account. Once the error is identified it is corrected through the Journal and then the
           suspense account.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 136
TOPIC 4.3 PAYROLL
           INTRODUCTION
           With any business with employees one of its major expenses are the payment of wages
           and/or salaries to its workers. In this section we will look at how wages and salaries are
           calculated and their various deductions

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to:

              1.   Understand the function of the payroll.
              2.   Use various methods to calculate salaries.
              3.   Identify the difference between statutory and non-statutory deductions.
              4.   Complete the payroll and wage documents from time cards.

           Every business pays its employees’ wages and/or salaries for the labour they supply to carry
           out the business activity. Wages are paid weekly or forth nightly at a rate that considers
           the number of hours or number of pieces of work produced. Salaries are a fixed amount
           paid monthly no matter the amount of pieces produced or hours worked.

           METHODS OF CALCULATING PAY
           Wages can be calculated using various methods or a combination of methods. The main
           methods of calculating wages are;

                   Flat rate – a basic rate is based on a standard number of hours. This agreed
                   monthly salary or weekly wage.
                   Piece rate – employees are paid based on the number of units produced during the
                   pay period.

                                                     Example

            JYPR Ltd manufactures chairs. There are several process involved in assembling the
            chairs. Employees are paid the following piece rates:
                    Process 1:   $2.00 per chair
                    Process 2:   $3.00 per chair
                    Process 3:   $4.00 per chair

            Elrie works in the assembly department, during the week ended 30 September 2011 he
            completed the following tasks:

            Process 1:       20
            Process 2:       40
            Process 3:       30


Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 137
Elrie will be paid the following

                                                                       $
                             Process 1         20 x 2                40.00
                             Process 2         40 x 3               120.00
                             Process 3         30 x 4               120.00
                                                        Total       280.00

                   Time rate – is a fixed rate per hours is paid multiplied by the number of hours
                   worked.

            Example

            Ann works part-time at a supermarket. Ann is pay $24 per hour. During the week ended
            30 September 2011, Ann was employed for 17 hours.
            Ann will be paid a wage of 17 hours x $24 = $408



                   Overtime rate – any hours worked above the regular standard working hours are
                   paid at a higher rate. Overtime rates can be charged as one and half, two times and
                   three times the regular rates.

            Example

            Catina is paid $30 per hour working in a restaurant. Catina is contracted to work 35
            hours per week. During the week ended 23 September 2011, she worked 39 hours.
            Overtime is paid at time and a half.

            Catina will be paid 35 hours x $30 per week = $1,050 per week
            During the week ended 23 September 2011, she will be paid $1,050 plus overtime

            Overtime payment = 4 hours x ($30 x 1.5) = 4 hours x $45 = $180

            Wage for the week ended 23th September is $1,230




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 138
Commission – is based on the amount of sales made by the employee. It could be
                   paid in addition to the basic salary or instead of a salary. It is normally calculated as
                   a percentage of the employee’s sale.

            Example

            Ulrick works in a department store. He is paid $3 000 per month, but is also entitled to a
            commission of 1.5% based on his department’s monthly sales. His department’s
            monthly sales were.
                                       $
                 August 2011             32 000
                 September 2011          27 400

            Ulrick will be paid as follows

                                          Basic Salary            Commission                Total
                                               $                       $                      $
                   August 2011         3,000               1.5% x $32,000 = $480          3,480
                   September 2011      3,000               1.5% x 27,400 = $411           3,411


           CALCULATING EMPLOYEES EARNINGS
           Each employee receives a pay slip at the end of their pay period. A pay slip shows the
           calculation of the employees’ gross pay their deductions and their net pay. Gross pay is the
           amount due to the employees at the end of their pay period for the work done before any
           deductions. Once the gross pay is calculated there are some statutory and non statuary
           deductions that must be deducted before we arrive at the net pay.

           Statutory deductions are those deductions that are required by law. These deductions
           includes

              1. Income tax – many countries have a tax system known as the Pay As You Earn
                 (PAYE). The amount paid in tax increases the higher your gross pay is. However
                 most system allows a part of the gross to be exempt from tax (tax fee allowance)
                 any amount above that allowance would be taxable
              2. National Insurance or Social Security contributions – this deduction is paid to
                 provide funds to provide income to workers during illness, injury, retirement etc.
              3. Pension Plan contribution – some employers require employees to contribute to a
                 scheme that will ensure that when they retire they are entitled to receive a pension
                 from their employers as well from the state.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 139
Non-statutory deductions as those deductions that employees may request be made to
           meet their personal needs. Examples of non-statutory deductions are:

                   Membership fees to clubs.
                   Membership to union (union dues).
                   Health insurance.
                   Life insurance.
                   Contribution to credit unions.

           SOURCE DOCUMENTS TO CALCULATE PAYROLL
           The information to calculate the employees earning are derived from various documents:

                   Personal Record Card – this includes information about the employees. This
                   information includes the employee’s correct name, address, contact number, tax
                   numbers and other information.
                   Employees Earning Records – is a history of the employees pay rates, gross pay,
                   deductions, net pay over a period of time.

Example

JYPR LTD
EMPLOYEE EARNING RECORD

Name__________________________________ Employee No. _____________ Position ___________

Address ________________________________ Birth Date ______________________ Sex _________

_______________________________________ Marital Status _________ No. Of Dependents _______

Tel. No. ________________________________ NIS # ________________ Starting Date ____________

          ACCUMULATED
 PERIOD    OR YEAR TO                                     NAT.   INCOME   LIFE   CREDIT   TOTAL        NET
 ENDED    DATE EARNINGS      REGULAR   OVERTIME   GROSS   INS.     TAX    INS.   UNION    DEDUC.       PAY
                $               $         $         $      $        $       $      $        $           $




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 140
Time Card – shows the number of hours worked by the employees. It is used to
                      calculate the total house worked during the period. They are used to clock in and
                      out of the work place.

      Example
                                                       JYPR LTD
                                                      TIME CARD
      Employee’s Name:         J. Jackson                Work Period:      Sept 21     to      Sept 27        .

      Employee;s Number:          09234                    Department:             Sales                  .

                                                           AM                                  PM
                      DAY
                                                 IN                 OUT                IN             OUT
       Sunday 21 September                     7:50                12:02
       Monday 22 September                     6:50                12:06             12:55             4:01
       Tuesday 23 September                    6:55                12:05             12:59             4:02
       Wednesday 24 September                  6:57                12:05             12:58             7:05
       Thursday 25 September                   6:52                12:03             12:55             7:00
       Friday 26 September                     6:59                12:02             12:58             4:01
       Saturday 27 September                   7:55                12:02

                      Time Sheet – are used by employees to record the overall attendance of the
                      employees.

      Example
                                                       JYPR LTD
                                                      TIME SHEET

      Employee’s Name:   J. Jackson                        Work Period:    Sept 21 to          Sept 27        .
      Employee’s Number:     09234                         Department:           Sales                    .

                                       AM                     PM            Regular        Overtime      Total
                DAY
                                IN          OUT       IN            OUT      Hours          Hours        Hours
       Sunday 21 Sept.          7:50        12:02                              -              4            4
       Monday 22 Sept.          6:50        12:06     12:55        4:01        8              -            8
       Tuesday 23 Sept.         6:55        12:05     12:59        4:02        8              -            8
       Wednesday 24
                                6:57        12:05     12:58        7:05        8              3             11
       Sept.
       Thursday 25 Sept.        6:52        12:03     12:55        7:00        8              3             11
       Friday 26 Sept.          6:59        12:02     12:58        4:01        8              -              8
       Saturday 27 Sept.        7:55        12:02                              -              4              4
       Total                                                                  40             14             54

Introduction to Accounting                                                                            Page | 141
Employees’ Payroll Sheet is completed at the end of work period for all employees.

      Example

      If the employees of JYPR LTD regular work week is 40 hours at a rate of $30 per hour. They
      received time and quarter (1 ¼) for any overtime worked during the regular work week and time
      and half (1 ½) for any overtime worked on Saturdays and double time (2) for any overtime
      worked on Sundays. Calculate J Jackson gross pay for the period 21 – 27 September.

      Employees Payroll Register
                          Employee Regular                          Overtime                  Gross
             Names
                             No.     Pay             Week      Saturday Sunday     Total       Pay
       J. Jackson         09234    2400              225       180       240       645       3 045

                    Payslip – is prepared for each employee, who receives it on “pay day”. The
                    information on the employee earnings record is transferred to the payslip.

      Example
                                                 PAYSLIP
                                            SEPTEMBER 27, 2011
       Name           Gross                 Income          Life    Credit      Total            Net
                                Nat. Ins
                       Pay                    Tax           Ins.    Union     Deductions         Pay
       J. Jackson    3 045



           PAYROLL
           The payroll is the document that summaries for each employees. It shows all the
           information used to calculate the Net Pay.

 Example

 With the following information calculate the net pay JYPR Ltd employees

 National Insurance 2 ½ % of Gross
 Income tax 15% of gross pay less credit union contribution
 Life insurance 2% of gross pay
 Credit union 1% of gross pay

 Credit union = 1% x $3045 = 30.45
 National Insurance 2 ½% x $3045 = $76.13
 Income tax 15% x (3045 – 30.45) = 452.18
 Life insurance 2 % x 3045 = 60.90




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 142
JYPR LTD
                                                         PAYROLL REGISTER
                                                           Accumulated                      Deductions
                           Regular   Overtime    Gross                                                                        Net
                   Total                                     or year to     Nat    Income       Life    Credit
   Employees                hours     hours       pay                                                             Total       Pay
                   hours                                        date        Ins      Tax        Ins     Union
                              $         $          $                                                                $          $
                                                             earnings        $        $          $        $
  J. Jackson      54       2 400     645        3 045      3 045.00       76.13   452.18       60.90   30.45     619.70   2 423.34




               TOPIC SUMMARY
               It is important to note the different ways in calculating your employees’ wages and salary.
               There are both statuary and non-statutory deductions that are deducted from the wages
               and salaries of your employees. Statutory deductions are those deductions required by law.
               Non statutory are requested by the employee.

               The information for preparing the wages and salaries are taken from the time cards of the
               employees. Each employee should receive a copy of their payslip which provides them with
               information about their pay before deductions (gross pay) and the take home pay after
               deductions (net pay).




Introduction to Accounting                                                                                       Page | 143
TOPIC 4.4 BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT
           INTRODUCTION
           In this unit you will learn how to reconcile your cash book so that its balance aggress with
           the balance on your bank statement

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to:

              1.   Explain terms used on the bank statement.
              2.   Compare the cash book with the bank statement.
              3.   Update the cash book.
              4.   Prepare the bank reconciliation statement.

           BANK STATEMENTS AND THE CASH BOOK
           When you make or receive payment by cheques they are recorded in the bank column of
           your cash book. When these cheques are presented at you bank there would be a part of
           your monthly bank statement. A bank statement is a copy of the bank’s record of your
           account. The balances on you bank statement is calculated after each transaction this is
           the running balance of recording. Items on the debit side of the cash book (bank column)
           would be recorded on the credit side of the bank statement and vice versa.

           At the end of each month they would be items on your bank statement that is not recorded
           in your cash book and items in the cash book not in bank statements.

           Items on the bank statement that is not recorded in the cash book

              1. Returned cheques (dishonoured cheques) – these are cheques that are returned by
                 the bank for various reasons. Reasons which include insufficient funds or word and
                 figures on the cheque do not agree. On it written refer to drawer.
              2. Bank charges – fees that the bank charges for operating your account.
              3. Interest received – from the bank.
              4. Standing order – is an agreement between you and your bank for it to make
                 monthly payments, of fixed amount on a specific date, on your behalf.
              5. Credit transfer – you may instruct your bank to pay a supplier on your behalf.

           Items in the Cash Book that is not recorded on the Bank Statement

              1. Unrecorded Deposits - deposits made to the bank that is not recorded on your
                 bank statement
              2. Un-presented cheques - cheques written but has not been presented to bank for
                 cashing.

           You can use either of two methods to reconcile your cash book with your bank statement
           after revising your Cash book.

Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 144
1. Begin with balance on your revise cash book the end total should be the balance on
                 your bank statement
              2. Begin with the balance on bank statement with the end balance being the balance
                 on you revised cash book.

           Step to reconciliation your cash book and bank statement.

              1. Tick the items that are recorded on both your bank statement and your cash book
              2. Revise you cash book by including the items in your bank statement that are not in
                 your cash book and then find the new balance for your cash book.
              3. You can now use either method and complete you reconciliation.

           The bank reconciliation statement would be as follows:

                                            Name of business
                                      Bank Reconciliation as at (date)

              Balance per revised cash book
                     Add unpresented cheques
                     Less unrecorded deposits
              Balance per bank statement

                                                        OR

                                            Name of business
                                      Bank Reconciliation as at (date)

            Balance per bank statement
                   Add unrecorded deposits
                   Less unpresented cheques
             Balance per revised cash book




Introduction to Accounting                                                               Page | 145
Let now look at an example.

              Example

              The following is an extract from the bank statement and cash book (bank column) of
              JYPR Ltd for the month of September 2011
                                             Cash Book (bank column only)
              Sept 1 Balance                  800 Sept 3 Insurance (chk 0892)                   360
              Sept 16 Sales                   890 Sept 11 Drawings (chk 0893)                   250
              Sept 27 Sales                   750 Sept 19 E. Peters (chk 0894)                  440
                                                 Sept 27 Electricity (chk 0895)                 220
                                                 Sept 31 Balance c/d                          1,170
                                           2,440                                              2,440
              Oct 1 Balance b/d            1,170


                                                    Peters Bank Ltd
                                             Bank Statement for JYPR Ltd
                  Date                       Details                 Dr         Cr        Balance
                  2011                                                $         $         $
               Sept 1          Balance                                                     800 Cr
               Sept 5          Anjo Insurance plc (0892)               360                 440 Cr
               Sept 5          Direct Debit iMoble co.                 230                 210 Cr
               Sept 14         Chk 0893                                250                  40 Dr
               Sept 18         Sundries                                         890        850 Cr
               Sept 21         Standing Order Aires Property Ltd       280                 570 Cr
               Sept 24         Credit Transfer – Ann Carter                     480      1,050 Cr
               Sept 27         Bank charges                                80              970 Cr



              The closing balance shown in two documents are different; cash book balance is $1,170,
              but the bank statement shows a balance of $970.

              Let begin by ticking off the items that are in both the cash book and the bank statement.
                                              Cash Book (bank column only)
              Sept 1 Balance                  800 Sept 3 Insurance (chk 0892)                  360
              Sept 16 Sales                   890 Sept 11 Drawings (chk 0893)                  250
              Sept 27 Sales                    750 Sept 19 E. Peters (chk 0894)                  440
                                                   Sept 27 Electricity (chk 0895)                220
                                                   Sept 31 Balance c/d                         1,170
                                             2,440                                             2,440
              Oct 1 Balance b/d              1,170

Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 146
Peters Bank Ltd
                                            Bank Statement for JYPR Ltd
                  Date                      Details                 Dr             Cr      Balance
                  2011                                               $             $       $
               Sept 1          Balance                                                    800 Cr
               Sept 5          Anjo Insurance plc (0892)                360                440 Cr
               Sept 5          Direct Debit iMoble co.                   230                210 Cr
               Sept 14         Chk 0893                                 250                 40 Dr
               Sept 18         Sundries                                          890       850 Cr
               Sept 21         Standing Order Aires Property Ltd          280               570 Cr
               Sept 24         Credit Transfer – Ann Carter                        480    1,050 Cr
               Sept 27         Bank charges                                80               970 Cr



              You will now revise or update your cash book on the 1st October 2011. This is done by
              including in the cash book the items from the bank statement that are not included

                                           Revised Cash Book (bank column only)
              Sept 1 Balance                   800 Sept    3   Insurance (chk 0892)           360
              Sept 16 Sales                    890 Sept   11    Drawings (chk 0893)            250
              Sept 27 Sales                    750 Sept   19    E. Peters (chk 0894)           440
                                                   Sept   27   Electricity (chk 0895)          220
                                                   Sept   31    Balance c/d                  1,170
                                            2,440                                            2,440
              Oct 1 Balance b/d            1,170 Oct      1    Direct Debit iMobile co.        230
              Oct 1 Credit Transfer           480 Oct     1    Standing Order                  280
                                                    Oct   1    Bank charges                     80
                                                    Oct   1    Balance c/d                   1,060
                                           1,650                                             1,650
              Oct 1 Balance b/d            1,060

              JYPR Ltd cash book is now updated. You can now prepare the bank reconciliation
              statement. To do this you include the items in the cash book that was not recorded in
              the bank statement.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 147
JYPR Ltd
                               Bank Reconciliation Statement as at 1st October 2011
                                                                     $                $
                      Balance per revised cash book                                    1,060
                             Add Un-presented cheques
                                     E. Peters (chk 0894)                440
                                     Electricity (chk 0895)              220           660
                                                                                      1,720
                            Less unrecorded deposits                                    750
                      Balance per bank statement                                        970

                                                        OR

                                                     JYPR Ltd
                               Bank Reconciliation Statement as at 1st October 2011
                                                                     $                $

                              Balance per bank statement                                970
                              Add unrecorded deposits                                   750
                                                                                      1,720
                             Less Unpresented cheques
                                    E. Peters (chk 0894)                 440
                                    Electricity (chk 0895)               220              660

                              Balance per revised cash book                           1,060




           There are instances where both your bank statement and your cash book may record an
           overdraft. When this occurs you follow the same method to revise your cash book but your
           reconciliation statement would be done as follows.

                                            Name of business
                                      Bank Reconciliation as at (date)
              Overdraft per revised cash book
                  Add un-recorded deposits
                  Less un-presented cheques
              Overdraft per bank statement


                                                         OR

                                             Name of business

Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 148
Bank Reconciliation as at (date)
              Overdraft per bank statement
                     Add un-presented cheques
                     Less un-recorded deposit
              Overdraft per revised cash book

           TOPIC SUMMARY
           You would have learnt that there are various reasons why the balance in your cash book
           would be different from the balances on the Bank Statement. Once you have identified the
           these items you then revise or update your cash book by including in your cash book those
           items in your bank statement that are not in your cash book. The new total in your cash
           book is reconciled with your bank statement. You reconcile by starting with either the
           revised cash book balance or the bank statement balance.




Introduction to Accounting                                                              Page | 149
TOPIC 4.5 PETTY CASH BOOK AND THE IMPREST SYSTEM
           INTRODUCTION
           Most business make small cash payments for goods and services in there day to day
           operations. These payments are too small to incur the bank changes for writing a cheque.
           This is what a petty cash system is used for making these small payments.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to:

              1. Write up a petty cash book.
              2. Understand the Imprest system.

           PETTY CASH SYSTEM
           The petty cash system records small payments, leaving large sum for the cash book. The
           petty cash is usually kept by a junior clerk. An imprest system is used where fixed sum, or
           cash float is advanced by the cashier to the petty cashier. The total of the petty payments
           is refunded to the cashier at the end of the month, leaving the cashier with the same fixed
           or imprest amount in hand for the petty expenses of the following months. The petty
           cashier will produce the petty cash vouchers as evidence of the amount spent. The petty
           cash in hand should them be equal to the original amount with which the period started.
           This amount is called the “float”.

           The receipt column is on the debit side of the petty cash book. On the credit side the date
           and details of each payment is record. Each payment is not only recorded in the total
           column but also in the analysis column. Analysis column are columns that indicate the
           various expenditure headings.

           In order for employees to access the petty cash, a petty cash voucher has to be completed
           indicating what the funds will be used for and signed by requesting employee and approved
           by a supervisor or senior cashier.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 150
Let us look at a worked example. Below are two petty cash vouchers for the month of
           October 2011 as completed by the petty cashier of JYPR Ltd.

                                               No. 10 .                                       No. 7 .

              PETTY CASH VOUCHER                             PETTY CASH VOUCHER
                                       Date 29 Oct. 2011                             Date 20 Oct. 2011

                                              Amount                                        Amount
              For what required                 $            For what required                $

              Petrol                           32.00         Postage                         20.00
                                               32.00                                         20.00



              Signature __________J. Jackson________         Signature __________V._Peters________

              Approved by _____M. Richardson        ___      Approved by _____M. Richardson       ___



           Petty cash vouchers were also completed for the following transactions.

              2011                                                                     $

              Oct 1    The cashier gave $600 as float to the petty cashier

              Oct 2    Petrol                                                          22

              Oct 3    L. Thomas – travelling expenses                                 24

              Oct 10 Refund C Charles sales ledger account over paid                   65

              Oct 12 Cleaning expenses                                                 50

              Oct 15 J Harris – travelling                                             75

              Oct 20 settle of P Phillip’s account in the purchases ledger             35

              Oct 22 petrol                                                            30

              Oct 27 Cleaning expenses                                                 65

              Oct 30 Postage                                                           25

           The petty cash book for October 2011 would be as follows:


Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 151
Petty Cash Book
                                                Voucher           Cleaning     Motor      Travelling                Ledger      Ledger
Receipts   Folio    Date             Details      No.     Total   Expenses    Expenses    Expenses     Postage       Folio     Accounts
   $               2011                                    $         $           $            $          $                        $
   600     CB       1-Oct   Cash
                    2-Oct   Petrol                   1      22                       22
                    3-Oct   L Thomas                 2      24                                    24
                   10-Oct   C Charles                3      65                                                      SL                 65
                   12-Oct   Cleaning expenses        4      50           50
                   15-Oct   J Harris                 5      75                                    75
                   20-Oct   P Phillip                6      35                                                      PL                 35
                   20-Oct   Postage                  7      20                                               20
                   22-Oct   Petrol                   8      30                       30
                   27-Oct   Cleaning expenses        9      65           65
                   29-Oct   Petrol                  10      32                       32
                   30-Oct   Postage                 11      25                                               25
                                                          443         115            84           99         45                       100
                   31-Oct   Balance c/d                   157       GL          GL           GL          GL
   600                                                    600
   157             1-Nov    Balance b/d
   443     CB      1-Nov    Cash




 Introduction to Accounting                                                                                       Page | 152
The information in the petty cash book is then transferred to the various ledger accounts.

                                             Cash Book (Bank Column only)
                        2011                           $       2011                               $
                                                              1-Oct Petty Cash             PCB     600
                                                              1-Nov Petty Cash             PCB     443

                                                    General Ledger
                                                    Motor Expenses
                       2011                            $
                       2-Oct Petty Cash           PCB 22
                      22-Oct Petty Cash           PCB 30
                      29-Oct Petty Cash           PCB 32

                                                   Travelling Expenses
                       2011                             $
                       3-Oct Petty Cash           PCB 24
                      15-Oct Petty Cash           PCB 75

                                                    Cleaning Expenses
                       2011                              $
                      12-Oct Petty Cash           PCB 50
                      27-Oct Petty Cash           PCB 65

                                                          Postage
                       2011                               $
                      20-Oct Petty Cash           PCB     20
                      30-Oct Petty Cash           PCB     25

                                                        Sales Ledger
                                                      C. Charles
                       2011                            $       2011                               $
                      10-Oct Petty Cash           PCB 65       1-Oct Balance               b/d        65

                                                   Purchases Ledger
                                                          P. Phillip
                       2011                               $         2011                          $
                      20-Oct Petty Cash           PCB     35       1-Oct Balance           b/d        35




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 153
TOPIC SUMMARY
           You have just examined the petty book of a JYPR Ltd. The information recorded in the petty
           cash book is derived from the petty cash vouchers which must be completed and approved
           before funds can be disbursed. The petty cash funds (float) are disbursed by the petty
           cashier. At the end of each period the petty cashier reimbursed the amount of the float
           spent to start the new period.




Introduction to Accounting                                                               Page | 154
TOPIC 4.6 CONTROL ACCOUNTS
           INTRODUCTION
           Earlier you learned that certain errors were not revealed in the trial balance. In a large
           business you would have to check every item in every ledger. This is done with the control
           accounts. This ensures that it is only the ledgers whose control accounts does not balance
           that need detailed checking to find errors.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this topic you will be able to:

              1. Draw up sales ledger accounts.
              2. Draw up purchase ledger accounts.
              3. Know the sources of information for control accounts.

           CONTROL ACCOUNT PRINCIPLES
           Control accounts are based on simple principle. If the opening balance of an account is
           known, together with the information on the additions and deductions entered in the
           account the closing balance can be calculated. The information to draw up control accounts
           are

            Sales ledger control                    Source
            Opening debtors                         List of debtors balances drawn up at end of
                                                    previous period
            Credit sales                            Total from the sales journal
            Return inwards                          Total from returns inwards journal
            Cheques received                        Cash book bank column
            Cash received                           Cash book cash column
            Discount allowed                        Total of discount allowed column in the cash book
            Closing debtors                         List of debtors’ balances drawn up at the end of
                                                    the period

            Purchases Ledger Control                Source
            Opening creditors                       List of creditors balances drawn up at end of
                                                    previous period
            Credit purchases                        Total from the purchases journal
            Return outwards                         Total from returns outwards journal
            Cheques paid                            Cash book bank column payments side
            Cash paid                               Cash book cash column payment side
            Discount received                       Total of discount received column in the cash book
            Closing creditors                       List of creditors’ balances drawn up at the end of
                                                    the period


Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 155
Control Accounts are prepared in the form as an account with the totals of the debit entries
           in ledger on the left hand side of the control account, and the totals of the credit entries in
           the ledger on the right hand side.

           Worked Example

           Ann runs a small business selling computer parts to wholesalers. Since he has numerous
           debtors and creditors she keeps sales and purchases ledgers and maintains both sales and
           purchases control accounts. The following information is available from Ann’s books for 31
           December 2010.

                     2011                                                    $
                    1-Dec    sales ledger debit balances                          4,756
                    1-Dec    sales ledger credit balances                           350
                    1-Dec    purchases ledger credit balances                     3,681
                    1-Dec    purchases ledger debit balances                        287

                  Totals for the month ending December 31, 2011
                              cash sales                                          6,743
                              bank sales                                          9,838
                              cash purchases                                      4,231
                              cheques and cash received from customers           11,742
                              discount allowed                                      618
                              return inwards                                        371
                              cheques paid to suppliers                           6,000
                              petty cash paid to suppliers                          120
                              discount received                                     364
                              return outwards                                       278
                              bad debts written off                                 446
                              cheques refunded to customers                         280
                              Dishonoured cheques                                   194
                             sales ledger credit set-off with the
                             purchases ledger                                       335
                             sales ledger debit balances                          2,335
                             purchase ledger debit balances                         165
                             purchase ledger credit balances                      4,021


           Let’s look at the solution for this question.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 156
Ann
                       Sales Ledger Control Account For December 2011
       2011                            $      2011                                    $
       1-Dec balance b/d              4,756 1-Dec balances b/d                        350
         31-                                     31-
         Dec sales                   10,967     Dec Cheques and Cash received       11,742
             cheques refunded           280           discount allowed                 618
             dishonoured cheques        194           return inwards                   371
                                                      bad debts written off            446
                                                      sales ledger credit set off      335
                                                      balances c/d                   2,335
                                     16,197                                         16,197
       1-Jan Balance b/d              2,335




                                              Ann
                      Purchases Ledger Control Account For December 2011
       2011                             $      2011                                   $
       1-Dec balance b/d                287 1-Dec balances b/d                       3,681
         31-                                      31-
         Dec cheques paid             6,000      Dec Purchases                       7,559
             cheques refunded           120            Balances c/d                    165
             discount received          364
             return outwards            278
             sales ledger set off       335
             balance c/d              4,021
                                     11,405                                         11,405
       1-Jan Balance b/d                165    1-Jan balance b/d                     4,021




Introduction to Accounting                                                            Page | 157
UNIT REFERENCES
           Austen, D., Ellis, D., et al (2011). Principles of Accounts for CSEC.
                      United Kingdom, Nelson Thornes Lted.

          Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations.
                      Macmillan Publishers Ltd.

          Whitcomb, A., & Clarke, G., (202). Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom,
                 Heinemann Educational Publishers

           Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.).
             England, Pearson Education Limited




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 158
UNIT SUMMARY
           In unit four you were able to use different methods to analyse and interpret the financial
           statement of the business. You looked at accounting ratio that are useful to compare a
           business with another or with one period to another. You also examined errors that may
           occur in financial records and how to identify and correct these errors. You also looked a
           payroll system, how to reconcile your cash book with your bank statement and how control
           accounts are also used to identify errors in your books.




Introduction to Accounting                                                               Page | 159
UNIT FIVE – FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF OTHER ORGANIZATIONS

     UNIT INTRODUCTION
            So far we have look at the complete accounting records of a sole trader. In this unit we
            would take a introductory look at the accounts of different forms of business such as non-
            profit organizations, partnership and company. We will begin this unit by taking a look at
            incomplete records of sole traders and how the financial positions of these can be
            determined from these incomplete records.

     UNIT OBJECTIVES
            Upon completion of this unit you should be able to:

            1. Draw up a trading and profit and loss account and balance sheet from records not kept
                on a double entry system.
            2. Deduce the figures of sales and purchases form incomplete records.
            3. Draw up income and expenditure accounts and balance sheets for non-trading
                organizations.
            4. Calculate profit and losses from special activities and incorporate them into the final
                accounts.
            5. Determine the financial positions of these non-trading organizations.
            6. Understand exactly what a partnership is.
            7. What are the main features of a partnership agreement.
            8. Draw up final accounts for a partnership.
            9. Understand exactly how limited companies differ from other organizations.
            10. Calculate how distributable profits are available for dividends are divided between the
                different classes of shares.
            11. Realize the differences between shares and debentures.
            12. Draw up the trading and profit and loss accounts for a limited company.
            13. Draw up a balance sheet for a limited company.

     UNIT READINGS
            The instructor will provide a list of readings.

     ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES
            The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions.




 Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 160
TOPIC 5.1 SINGLE ENTRY AND INCOMPLETE RECORDS
           TOPIC INTRODUCTION
           We have been able thus far to prepare final accounts of sole traders who keeps a complete
           set of records. However many small business do not keep complete records and may have
           difficult determining if there business is making a profit or a loss. In this topic will look at
           these incomplete records.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

           1. Draw up a trading and profit and loss account and balance sheet from records not kept
              on a double entry system.
           2. Deduce the figures of sales and purchases form incomplete records.

           RECORDS KEEPING
           Many small businesses do not keep proper financial records which makes it difficult at first
           glance to determine the financial position of that business. Even with these incomplete
           records you are still able to determine whether or not this business is making a profit or
           loss.

           However there are a couple of things you must remember before you continue. Firstly
           remember that profit increases capital. As you determined from the balance sheet of sole
           trader

                                    Net Profit = closing capital - Opening capital

           In the balance you are able to determine this year’s capital by doing the following
           calculations

                                Opening Capital + Profit - Drawings = closing Capital

           Usually when using incomplete records you are given two year’s information to derive
           information about that business. The first year’s information is used to draw up a
           statement of affairs to calculate the opening capital of the business. The second year’s
           information is used to determine if the business is making a profit or loss.

           Let look at a worked example.

           J. Anderson kept records of her business transactions in a single entry form. Her bank
           account for the year 2010 is as follows:




Introduction to Accounting                                                                     Page | 161
$                                              $

              Balance 1.1.2010                   1,890 cash withdrawn from bank                  5,400
              Receipts from debtors             44,656 trade creditors                          31,695
              Loan from T. Hughes                2,000 rent                                      2,750
                                                       Rates                                     1,316
                                                       Drawings                                  3,095
                                                       Sundry expenses                           1,642

           Records of cash paid were: sundry expenses $122, trade creditors $642. Cash sales
           amounted to $698; cash drawings were $5,289. The following information is also available:

                                                    31.12.2009                     31.12.2010
                                                            $                            $
              Cash in hand                                  48                           93
              Trade creditors                           4,896                         5,091
              Debtors                                   6,013                         7,132
              Rent owing                                  -                             250
              Rates in advance                            282                           312
              Motor van (at valuation)                  2,800                         2,400
              Stock                                    11,163                        13,021

           We begin by calculation the capital at the end of 2009. This is done by drawing up a
           Statement of Affairs as at 31 December 2009.

                                                J. Anderson
                                           Statement of Affairs
                                         As at 31 December 2009
                     Fixed Assets                         $                    $
              Motor Van                                                       2,800

              Current assets
              Stock                                    11,163
              Debtors                                   6,013
              Bank                                      1,890
              Cash                                         48
              Rates prepaid                               282
                                                       19,396
              Less current liabilities
              Creditors                                4,896                  14,500
                                                                              17,300 .

              Financed by
              Capital (difference)                                            17,300
                                                                              17,300




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 162
You can now prepare total debtors and total creditors account. The total creditors account
           will be used to calculate the purchases figure and the total debtors account to calculate the
           sales figure.

                                             Total Creditors’ Account

                                                  $                                             $
              Cash                                642 Balances b/d                             4,896
              Bank                             31,695 Purchases (missing figures)             32,532
              Balance c/d                       5,091                                   ____________
                                               37,428                                         37,428


                                              Total Debtors’ Account

                                                  $                                                $
              Balances b/d                      6,013 Receipts: Bank                             44,656
              Sales (missing figure)           46,473          cash                                 698
                                                      Balances c/d                                7,132
                                               52,486                                            52,486


                                                 Cash Book
        Details                         Cash   Bank         Details                    Cash       Bank
                                        $      $                                       $          $
        Balance                   b/d       48   1,890      Cash                 C                  5400
        Receipt from debtors                    44,656      Trade Creditors               642      31,695
        cash sales                         698              rent                                    2,750
        Loan from Carter                         2000       rates                                   1,316
        Bank                      c      5,400              drawings                    5,289       3,095
                                                            sundry expenses               122       1,642
                                                            Balance              c/d       93       2,648
                                         6,146    48,546                                6,146      48,546




Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 163
J. Anderson
                                       Trading and Profit and Loss Account
                                      For the year ended 31 December 2010

                                                                $                        $
                      Sales                                                            46,473
                      Less cost of goods sold
                      Opening Stock                            11,163
                      Add Purchases                            32,532
                                                               43,695
                      Less closing stock                       13,021                  30,674
                      Gross Profit                                                     15,799

                      Less Expenses
                              Rent (2,750 + 250)               3,000
                              Rates (1,315 + 282 -312)         1,286
                              Sundry expenses                  1,764
                              Depreciation: Motor Van            400                    6,450
                      Net Profit                                                        9,349

           TOPIC SUMMARY
           You would have realized that you are still able to determine the profit or loss from a
           business that don’t keep complete records. The basic information you are still able to
           determine the profitability of a business and prepare final accounts of that business.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 164
TOPIC 5.2 RECEIPTS AND PAYMENTS ACCOUNT
           TOPIC INTRODUCTION
           So far we have only look at business that aim is to make a profit. However there a
           businesses and organizations whose may interest are not to make a profit but to provide a
           service. We will now have a look at these not profit making businesses.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

              1. Draw up income and expenditure accounts and balance sheets for non-trading
                 organizations.
              2. Calculate profit and losses from special activities and incorporate them into the final
                 accounts.
              3. Determine the financial positions of these non-trading organizations.

           NON-PROFIT ACCOUNTS
           Organizations such as schools, clubs and churches do not have trading and profit and loss
           accounts drawn up as their main purpose is not trading or profit making. The final accounts
           prepared for these organizations are Receipts and Payments account in place of a Cash
           Book and the Income and Expenditure Account in place of the trading and profit and loss
           accounts. The same rules that a apply for the preparation and use of the cash book and
           trading and profit and loss account still applies to the receipt and payment accounts and
           the income and expenditure accounts. There are some other differences in the terms used.

                        Profit Making Business Terms           Non-Profit Making Organizations Terms

                    Trading And Profit And Loss Accounts     Income And Expenditure Accounts

                    Net Profit                               Surplus Of Income Over Expenditure

                    Net Loss                                 Excess Of Expenditure Over Income

                    Capital                                  Accumulated Fund



                                     Accumulated fund = Assets - Liabilities

           There are instances where non-profit making organization will hold functions or activities to
           make profit. A trading account for this activity will have to draw up to determine if a profit
           or loss was made from the activity. That profit or loss is then transferred to the income and
           expenditure account. Many non-profit organization generate income by charging there
           members fees to be a part of the organization (subscriptions or membership fees), they



Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 165
may also charge new members entrance fees and they may also receive donations from
           other groups or organizations.

           Let us look at worked example.

           On 31 December 2011 the following information for the Sugar Bridge Social Club is made
           available to you.

                      Balances on the 1st January 2011                  $

                      Bank                                             3,070
                      Subscriptions in arrears for 2010                  290
                      Subscription received in advance for 2009         420
                      Equipment                                        1,800

              In respect of the year to 31 December 2010, the following information is given to you:

                      Subscription received (including 2009 arrears)   5,920
                      Equipment bought                                   700
                      Groundsman’s wages                               2,880
                      Sale of lottery tickets                          1,090
                      Receipts from discos                             7,510
                      Disco cost – including musicians                 4,970
                      Teams’ travelling expenses                       1,220
                      Competition prizes bought                          580
                      Rent of buildings                                2,170
                      Receipt for ground hire                            900
                      Committee expenses                                 690
                      Donations from well-wishes                       1,500

           Subscription due but unpaid at 31 December 2009 amounted to $370. Depreciate
           equipment 10%.

           We begin by drawing up the subscription account

                                     Subscription Account
                                              $                                       $
          Arrears b/d                        290 Received in Advance b/d              420
          Income and Expenditure account 6,420 cash                                 5,920
                                                   Arrears c/d                        370
                                           6,710                                    6,710




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 166
Sugar Bridge Social Club
                                    Receipts and Payments Account
                                 for the year ended 21 December 2011
           Receipts                       $          Payments                     $
           Balance b/d                        3,070 Equipment                             700
           Subscriptions                      5,920 Pay                                 2,880
           Sale of Lottery tickets            1,090 Disco costs                         4,970
           Receipts from discos               7,510 travel expenses                     1,220
           ground hire                          900 competitions prizes                   580
           donations                          1,500 committee expenses                    690
                                                     rent of buildings                  2,170
                                                     balance c/d                        6,780
                                             19,990                                   19990




                                                Sugar Bridge Social Club
                                           Income and Expenditure Accounts
                                         For the year ended 31 December 2011

               Income                                               $            $
               Subscriptions                                                    6,420
               Sale of lottery tickets                                          1,090
               Receipts from discos                                 7,510
               less cost of disco                                   4,970       2,540

               ground hire                                                        900
               donations received                                               1,500
                                                                               12,450
               Less expenditure
               Groundsman's pay                                     2,880
               team's travelling expenses                           1,220
               competitions prizes                                    580
               rent                                                 2,170
               committee's expenses                                   690
               depreciation                                           250       7,790
               surplus of income over expenditure                               4,660




Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 167
TOPIC SUMMARY
           Not all businesses are trading or profit making business. Some businesses are in operation
           to other as service to the community. These non-profit organizations however do keep
           records of their financial transactions. Instead of a cash book they have a receipt and
           payments account, instead of capital they have accumulated fund and instead of trading
           and profit and loss account they have income and expenditure account.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 168
TOPIC 5.3 PARTNERSHIP ACCOUNTS
           INTRODUCTION
           A partnership is formed when two or more person decide to go into business together. The
           terms and conditions of the partnership should be determined by all parties before the
           business venture begins. The partnership act gives guidelines on the formation and
           dissolving of partnership agreement.

           OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

              1. Understand exactly what a partnership is.
              2. Describe the main features of a partnership agreement.
              3. Draw up final accounts for a partnership.

           PARTNERSHIP AGREEMENTS
           In the earlier units we had a look at sole trader businesses. However many businesses that
           are set up to make a profit have more than one owner. This could be:

                   To raise the capital required to support business growth.
                   Gain the experience and abilities needed to operate the business.
                   Expand the product line.
                   Share management.

           The Partnership Agreement

           A partnership arrangement has the following desire outcomes.

                   It is formed to make a profit
                   It must follow the laws as laid out in the partnership act
                   Normally there is a minimum of two partners and a maximum of twenty partners
                   Each partner (except for limited partners) must pay his or her share of any debts
                   that the partnership cannot pay.

           Unlimited liability partners can be forced to sell their private possessions to pay their share
           of the debts. Limited liability partners are not liable for the debts of the business. They
           have the following characteristics

              1. Their liability is limited to the capital they have put in the business. They can lose
                 the capital but they cannot be asked for any more money
              2. They are not allowed to take part in the management of the business

           A partnership agreement usually contains the following information

                   The capital to be contributed by each partner

Introduction to Accounting                                                                    Page | 169
The ratio in which profits or losses should be shared
                   The rate of interest if any to be paid on capital before profits
                   The rate of interest if any to be charged on partner’s drawings
                   Salaries to be paid to partners
                   Arrangements for the admission a new partners
                   Procedures to be carried out when a partner dies or retires.

           If there is not agreement in place then the partnership act states that

                   Profits and losses will be shared equally
                   There is no interest on capital
                   No interest is to be charged on drawings
                   Salaries are not allowed

           Capital Accounts

           The value of the partners holding in the business will consist of:

                   The original capital put into the business by the partner.
                   His or her spare of the profits, interest on capital (if any), salary (if any), less
                   interest on drawings (if any) and drawings themselves. This is the amount of
                   undrawn profits.

           Each partner will have an account that contains both sets of information. The balance on
           this account would fluctuate each year as drawings rarely equal profits. This is called
           fluctuating Capital Account.

           On the other hand, we could keep the original capital figure in an account for each partner.
           These we would keep at the same figure and we would call these fixed capital accounts.
           We would should the share of profits and interest on capital for each partner in a separate
           account called Current Account.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                       Page | 170
Jack and Jill are in partnership, sharing profits and losses equally. The following is their trial
           balance as at trial balance as at 30 June 2011.

                                                         Dr.                        Cr.
                                                         $                          $
              Building at cost                           50,000
              Fixtures at cost                           11,000
              Provision for depreciation: fixtures                                  3,300
              Debtors                                    16,243
              Creditors                                                             11,150
              Cash at bank                                 677
              Stock at 30 June 2010                      41,979
              Sales                                                                 123,650
              Purchases                                  85,416
              Carriage outwards                          1,288
              Discount allowed                             115
              Loan interest: Williams                    4,000
              Office expenses                            2,416
              Wages                                      18,917
              Bad debts                                    503
              Provision for Bad debts                                        400
              Loan from J. Williams                                        40,000
              Capital:
                       Jack                                                35,000
                       Jill                                                29,500
              Current Accounts
                       Jack                                                 1,306
                       Jill                                                   298
              Drawings:
                       Jack                               6,400
                       Jill                               5,650        ___________
                                                       244,604          244,604__

           Additional information for Jack and Jill.

                   Stock 30 June 2011; $56,340.
                   Expenses to be accrued: office expenses, $96; wages $200.
                   Depreciate fixtures 10% on reducing balance basis. Depreciate buildings $1,000.
                   Reduce provision for bad debts to $320.
                   Partnership salary: $800 Jack.
                   Interest on drawings $180, Jack, $120.
                   Interest on capital account balances at 10%.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 171
Jack and Jill
                                    Trading and Profit and Loss Account
                                      for the year ended 30 June 2011
                                                                $       $        $
                Sales                                                         123,650
                less cost of goods sold:
                Opening stock                                        41,979
                Add Purchases                                        85,416
                                                                    127,395
                Less closing stock                                   56,340    71,055
                gross profit                                                   52,595
                add reduction in Provision for bad debts                           80
                                                                               52,675
                less expenses
                      Pay (18,917 + 200)                             19,117
                      Office expenses (2,416 + 96)                    2,512
                     Carriage outwards                                1,288
                Discount Allowed                                        115
                Bad Debts                                               503
                Loan interest                                         4,000
                Depreciation: fixtures                        770
                                  buildings                 1,000     1,770    29,305
                Net Profit                                                     23,370
                Add Interest on drawings
                Jack                                                    180
                Jill                                                    120      300

                less interest on capital:
                Jack                                        3,500
                Jill                                        2,950     6,450

                Less Salary: Jill                                       800     7,250
                                                                               16,420
                Balance of profits shared:
                Jack                                                  8,210
                Jill                                                  8,210    16,420




Introduction to Accounting                                                              Page | 172
Jack and Jill
                                            Balance Sheet
                                          as at 30 June 2011
           Fixed Assets                               Cost           Depreciation
                                                        $           $            $
           Buildings                                   50,000        1,000       49,000
           Fixtures                                    11,000        4,070        6,930
                                                       61,000        5,070       55,930
           Current Assets
           Stock                                                   56,340
           Debtors                                    16,243
           Less Provision for bad debts                  320       15,923
           bank                                                       677
                                                                   72,940
           Less current liabilities
           creditors                                  11,150
           expenses owing                                296       11,446
           working capital                                                       61,494
                                                                                117,424
           Less Long-term
           loan from J. Williams                                                 40,000
                                                                                 77,424

           Financed by
           capital
           Jack                                                    35,000
           Jill                                                    29,500        64,500

           Current Accounts                          Jack          Jill
           Balance 1.7.2010                             1306           298
           Add interest on capital                     3,500         2,950
           Add Salary                                     800 -
           Add balance of profits                      8,210        8,210
                                                       13816        11458
           Less Drawings                               6,400        5,650
           Less Interest on Drawings                      180         120
                                                       7,236        5,688        12,924
                                                                                 77,424



           TOPIC SUMMARY
           When two or more individuals come together to do business a partnership is formed. Each
           partner is required to make contribution the business’ capital. A partner can have limited
           or unlimited liability but at least on partners should have unlimited liability.



Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 173
TOPIC 5.4 COMPANY ACCOUNTS
           TOPIC INTRODUCTION
           So you have looked at the financial records for a sole trade and a partnership business. You
           can examine the financial records of another form of business a company. Limited liability
           companies are needed because of the disadvantages of the partnership business. A
           partnership can have a maximum of twenty persons who may not be able to raise the
           capital needed to fund a very large corporation. Also if a partnership falls the partners can
           lose part or all of his private and business assets. Limited companies enable large
           businesses to be formed and help the owners safeguard their private assets

           TOPIC OBJECTIVES
           Upon completion of this topic you should be able to:

           1. understand exactly how limited companies differ from other organizations
           2. calculate how distributable profits are available for dividends are divided between the
              different classes of shares
           3. realize the differences between shares and debentures
           4. draw up the trading and profit and loss accounts for a limited company
           5. draw up a balance sheet for a limited company

           TYPE OF COMPANY ACCOUNTS
           There are two types of limited companies public company and private company. A private
           company must have a minimum of two and a maximum of fifty members. It must also ask
           people to buy shares privately it cannot do so publicly. The public company can have at
           least seven members and can have as many members as it wants. It can also advertise its
           shares to the public for purchase.

           The capital of a limited liability company is divided into shares. To be a member or
           shareholder of a limited liability company you must purchase shares. Once the shareholder
           have paid up fully for their shares their liability in limited to those shares. If the company
           loses all its assets, the shareholder can only lose their shares. They cannot be forced to pay
           anything of their private money in respect of the company’s losses.

           An individual who purchase shares in a company is called a shareholder. A shareholder has
           the right to attend general meetings of the company and vote at these meetings.
           Shareholders use their vote to appoint directors who manages the business on behalf of
           the shareholders. A shareholder receives a share of the profits known as a dividend.

           A company is a “separate legal entity” from its members. This means that a company is not
           considered to be the same as its members. A company and sue and be sued by even its
           own shareholders.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                  Page | 174
TYPES OF SHARES
           There are two types of shares:

                   Preference shares – these get an agreed percentage rate of dividend before the
                   ordinary shareholders.
                   Ordinary shareholders- receive the reminder of the total profits available after
                   preference share holders have received their dividend.

           Preferences Shares can be further divided into:

                   Cumulative preference shares – these have an agreed maximum percentage
                   dividend. Any shortage of dividend paid in one year can be carried forward to the
                   next year. The arrears of cumulative preference share must be paid before
                   ordinary shareholders receive their dividend.
                   Non-cumulative preference shares – these receive a dividend up to an agreed
                   percentage each year. Any shortage is lost and cannot be carried forward to the
                   next year.

           Normally preferences as 5% preference shares the percentage that is shown is the rate of
           dividend that the shareholder will receive. So if a shareholder has $2000 5% preference
           share then they will receive 5% x 2000 = 100 in dividend.

           A company has different types of share capitals.

                   Authorized share capital known as nominal or registered capital. It is the total of
                   the share capital that the company is allowed to issue to the public.
                   Issued share capital is the total of the actual share capital that has been offered to
                   the public.
                   Called-up share capital is the total amount asked for on all the shares. It may be
                   only part of the amounts payable on each share.
                   Uncalled share capital is the total amount that is to be received in future but which
                   has not yet been asked for.
                   Calls in arrears the total amount for which payments have been asked for but has
                   not yet been paid by shareholders.
                   Paid up capital is the total amount of share capital that has been paid for by
                   shareholders.

           FINAL ACCOUNTS
           The trading account of a limited company is no different from that of a sole trader or a
           partnership. There are some differences in the profit and loss account. There are two main
           expenses that would only be found in company accounts.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 175
Directors’ remuneration. Directors are legal employees of company appointed by
                   the shareholders. Their remuneration is charged to the main profit and loss
                   account.
                   Debenture interest. Debenture is the money a company receives as a loan. The
                   lender is paid interest at an agreed percentage this is known as the debenture
                   interest.

           Under the profit and loss account for a company is an appropriation account. The
           appropriation account shows how the net profits are to be used. The following is recorded
           in the appropriation account

           Credit side

                   Net profit from the year – this the net profit brought down from the profit and loss
                   account
                   Balance brought forward from last year – any profits that remain from the last year
                   is also brought forward.

           Debit side

                   Transfer to reserves – directors may decide that some of the profits should not be
                   included in the calculation of how much should be paid out as dividends. These
                   profits are transferred to the reserve account. There may be a specific reason for
                   the transfer, such as a need to replace fixed assets; in this case the amount would
                   be transferred to a fixed assets replacement reserve. Or the reason may not be
                   specific; in this case an amount would be transferred to a general reserve account.
                   Amounts written off as goodwill.
                   Amounts written off as preliminary expenses. When a company is formed there are
                   many kinds of expenses concerned with its formation e.g. legal expense and various
                   government taxes.
                   Taxation payable on profits.
                   Dividends out of the remainder of the profits.
                   Balance carried forward to the next year.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 176
Worked Example

           C. Black Ltd has an authorized share capital of 90,000 ordinary shares of $1 each and 10,000
           10% preference shares of $1 each. The company’s trial balance extracted after one year of
           trading was as follows on 31 December 2011.

                                                                           $
                    Net profit for 31 December 2011                       11,340
                    Debentures                                            30,000
                    issued ordinary share capital, fully paid             60,000
                    issued preference share capital, fully paid           10,000
                    creditors                                              3,550
                    debtors                                                4,120
                    cash                                                   2,160
                    stock                                                  8,800
                    provision for bad debts                                  350
                    provision for depreciation: equipment                  4,500
                    Equipment at cost                                     45,000
                    Premises at cost                                      50,000
                    bank (use missing figure)                                 ?

           The directors decide to transfer $1,500 to the general reserve and to recommend a
           dividend of 12 ½ % on the ordinary shares. The preference dividend was not paid in until
           after January 2012

                                              C. Black Ltd
                                        Appropriation Account
                                for the year ended 31 December 2011
                                                                $     $
                    Net Profit b/d                                    11,340
                    Less Appropriation
                        transfer to general reserve             1,500
                        preference dividend 10%                 1,000
                       Proposed ordinary dividend 12 1/2 %      7,500 10,000
                    retained profits carried forward                   1,340




Introduction to Accounting                                                                 Page | 177
C. Black Ltd
                                                Balance Sheet
                                          as at 31 December 2011
               Fixed Assets                                   $      $         $
               Premises at cost                                               50,000
               equipment at cost                                    45,000
               less Depreciation                                     4,500    40,500
                                                                              90,500
               Current Assets
               Stock                                                 8,000
               Debtors                                    4,120
               less provision                               350      3,770
               bank                                                  9,660
               cash                                                  2,160
                                                                    23,590
               less current liabilities
               creditors                                  3,550
               Proposed dividends                         8,500     12,050    12,340
                                                                             102,840
               less long-term liability
               Debentures                                                     30,000
                                                                              72,840
               Financed by
               share capital
               Authorized                                          100,000
               Issued:
                 60,000 ordinary shares $1                          60,000
                 60,000 preference shares $1                        10,000    70,000

               Reserves
               General reserve                                       1,500
               Retained profits                                      1,340     2,840
                                                                              72,840



           TOPIC SUMMARY
           You have completed your examination of the final accounts of Limited Liability Company.
           Be sure to take not of the difference in their final accounts to the final accounts of sole
           trader and partnership businesses. Remember that a company raises capital by offer shares
           individuals. Shareholders will in turn receive dividend on the amount of shares that they
           purchase


Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 178
UNIT REFERENCES
           Austen, D., Ellis, D., et al (2011). Principles of Accounts for CSEC.
                      United Kingdom, Nelson Thornes Lted.

          Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations.
                      Macmillan Publishers Ltd.

          Whitcomb, A., & Clarke, G., (202). Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom,
                 Heinemann Educational Publishers

           Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.).
             England, Pearson Education Limited




Introduction to Accounting                                                                   Page | 179
UNIT SUMMARY
           Throughout this unit you were introduced of different forms of business and the financial
           records of these businesses. You should be able to identify the difference between a sole
           trader, partnership and company. You should also be able to identify how each form of
           business raises its capital. As you move along in your studies you would come upon
           complicated forms of these financial records. However before you move along be sure that
           you are able to master the information provided in this unit.




Introduction to Accounting                                                              Page | 180
FINAL ASSIGNMENT/PROJECT
           The final assignment/project will be provided by your instructor. The ideal project is should
           be based on the following.

           Ideally the final project for this course will require you to prepare final accounts for a sole
           trader from a list of transaction and source documents. The course has been designed to
           provide your guidance and activities that will prepare you to complete the final project
           assigned by your instructor.

           The instructor should post final project instructions here.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                      Page | 181
COURSE SUMMARY
           This course has provided the entrepreneur the basic accounting principles and practices to
           manage the day to day finances of a small business. The ideal business environment is one
           where the entrepreneur works with a bookkeeper and account to effectively manage the
           financial activities of the company. The second course in the diploma programme will add
           to your knowledge of financial management and provide guidance on how to effectively
           create, implement and manage a small business financial plan that allows the business to
           grow and succeed in accordance with the company’s strategic plan.




Introduction to Accounting                                                                Page | 182

More Related Content

PPT
Basics of financial accounting
PPTX
Management Behavior in Education
PDF
Asset Management Company
DOCX
PD1006 VS RA7836
PPTX
CASH BOOK
PPT
BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
PPTX
Economic impacts of tourism
PPTX
Types of vouchers
Basics of financial accounting
Management Behavior in Education
Asset Management Company
PD1006 VS RA7836
CASH BOOK
BUSINESS ACCOUNTING
Economic impacts of tourism
Types of vouchers

What's hot (20)

PDF
Accounting Global 9th Edition Horngren Solutions Manual
PPTX
Ratio analysis advantages and limitations
PPT
CHAPTER 3 Measuring Business Income: The Adjusting Process
PPTX
Business objectives
PPTX
Linear Programming Application
DOC
Cost accountancy mcom part1 sem 2
PPT
Business organisation and management UNIT1.ppt
PPTX
Death of partner
PPT
Chapter 17
PPTX
Labour Cost Control in Cost Accounting-B.V.Raghunandan
PDF
Career Planning & Development NET PYQs and MCQs (1).pdf
PPTX
Management Accounting - Comparative Income Statement Problems
PPTX
Bank reconciliation
PPTX
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT UNIT-1
PPTX
Foreign direct investment (f
PDF
Assignment problems
PPSX
Objectives of business
PPTX
Journal & debit credit rule
PDF
Econometrics solution in Stata
DOCX
Employee relationship
Accounting Global 9th Edition Horngren Solutions Manual
Ratio analysis advantages and limitations
CHAPTER 3 Measuring Business Income: The Adjusting Process
Business objectives
Linear Programming Application
Cost accountancy mcom part1 sem 2
Business organisation and management UNIT1.ppt
Death of partner
Chapter 17
Labour Cost Control in Cost Accounting-B.V.Raghunandan
Career Planning & Development NET PYQs and MCQs (1).pdf
Management Accounting - Comparative Income Statement Problems
Bank reconciliation
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT UNIT-1
Foreign direct investment (f
Assignment problems
Objectives of business
Journal & debit credit rule
Econometrics solution in Stata
Employee relationship
Ad

Viewers also liked (20)

PPTX
Chapter 1 introduction to accounting
PPTX
Source documents powerpoint
PPT
Financial Accounting
PPTX
Introduction To Accounting
PPS
Basics of accounting
PPT
Basics of accounting
PPTX
3.3 Source Documents for Cash Transactions
PPTX
Introduction Of Accounting
PPSX
01 - Introduction to Accounting and Business
DOCX
Businees model innovation
PPT
The Marketeer Accountant
PPT
Additional Notes On Topic 4 Source Documents
PPTX
Small Business Accounting and Financial Reporting_StarterCompanyRevised
PPTX
2.2 The Accounting Equation and the Balance Sheet
PDF
Good Examples of Bad Design
PPT
Topic 9 Comparison Of Financial Statements
PPTX
PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT- QUALITY
PPT
Ppt Slides On Tps,Dps &amp; Eps
PPTX
Trial balance
PPT
Information systems in the enterprise
Chapter 1 introduction to accounting
Source documents powerpoint
Financial Accounting
Introduction To Accounting
Basics of accounting
Basics of accounting
3.3 Source Documents for Cash Transactions
Introduction Of Accounting
01 - Introduction to Accounting and Business
Businees model innovation
The Marketeer Accountant
Additional Notes On Topic 4 Source Documents
Small Business Accounting and Financial Reporting_StarterCompanyRevised
2.2 The Accounting Equation and the Balance Sheet
Good Examples of Bad Design
Topic 9 Comparison Of Financial Statements
PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT- QUALITY
Ppt Slides On Tps,Dps &amp; Eps
Trial balance
Information systems in the enterprise
Ad

Similar to Introduction to Business Accounting (20)

PDF
Skills utilisation-research-report-15-may-2012
PDF
Student handbook2
PDF
Bis uig
PDF
Sanitation participant manual with appendices 2011-02-1
PDF
Disaster management version_1.0
PDF
Disaster management
DOC
Develop a portfolio to demonstrate school leadership and management competenc...
PDF
Acss 2011 report_volume_1_national
PDF
Moodle 2.0 basics steps
PDF
eBook Inclusion in Action 6e By Iva Strnadová, Michael Arthur-Kelly, Phil For...
PDF
Conole alevizou web 2_hea_aug2010
DOCX
AN ANALYSIS OF INNOVATION ECOSYSTEM IN VIETNAMESE ENTERPRISES
PDF
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
PDF
Rainwater harvesting participant with appendices 2011-11
PDF
Strategy For Change 2007
PDF
Courses of study_2011-12
PDF
Email marketing-course-e marketing-ebook-2018-edition
PDF
Email marketing course free
PDF
Email marketing-course-e marketing-institute-ebook-2018-edition
PDF
Email marketing
Skills utilisation-research-report-15-may-2012
Student handbook2
Bis uig
Sanitation participant manual with appendices 2011-02-1
Disaster management version_1.0
Disaster management
Develop a portfolio to demonstrate school leadership and management competenc...
Acss 2011 report_volume_1_national
Moodle 2.0 basics steps
eBook Inclusion in Action 6e By Iva Strnadová, Michael Arthur-Kelly, Phil For...
Conole alevizou web 2_hea_aug2010
AN ANALYSIS OF INNOVATION ECOSYSTEM IN VIETNAMESE ENTERPRISES
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
Rainwater harvesting participant with appendices 2011-11
Strategy For Change 2007
Courses of study_2011-12
Email marketing-course-e marketing-ebook-2018-edition
Email marketing course free
Email marketing-course-e marketing-institute-ebook-2018-edition
Email marketing

More from Jacqueline Peters-Richardson (20)

DOCX
Principles of Business Course Outline 2017
DOCX
Economics Course Outline 2017
DOCX
Principles of Accounts Course Outline 2017
PPT
Technology in education review
DOC
Electronic Document Preparation and Management Outline
DOC
Electronic Document Preparation And Management Course Outline
PPT
ICT for Education - Successful Integration with Open Education Resources
PPTX
ICT - The Integrated Approach
PPTX
ICT Integration across the Curricula
DOCX
Technology in Education Workbook
DOCX
Registration form
DOCX
Entrepreneurial training manual owning your future
PPTX
PDF
Entrepreneurial training manual
DOCX
PPT
Jeopardy grade 6 revision
DOCX
Entrepereneurship workbook
DOCX
Entrepreneurial skills curriculum
PDF
Principles of business p2
PDF
Principles of accounts p2
Principles of Business Course Outline 2017
Economics Course Outline 2017
Principles of Accounts Course Outline 2017
Technology in education review
Electronic Document Preparation and Management Outline
Electronic Document Preparation And Management Course Outline
ICT for Education - Successful Integration with Open Education Resources
ICT - The Integrated Approach
ICT Integration across the Curricula
Technology in Education Workbook
Registration form
Entrepreneurial training manual owning your future
Entrepreneurial training manual
Jeopardy grade 6 revision
Entrepereneurship workbook
Entrepreneurial skills curriculum
Principles of business p2
Principles of accounts p2

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Paper A Mock Exam 9_ Attempt review.pdf.
PPTX
ELIAS-SEZIURE AND EPilepsy semmioan session.pptx
PPTX
B.Sc. DS Unit 2 Software Engineering.pptx
PDF
Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment .pdf
PPTX
A powerpoint presentation on the Revised K-10 Science Shaping Paper
PPTX
Education and Perspectives of Education.pptx
PDF
Environmental Education MCQ BD2EE - Share Source.pdf
PPTX
What’s under the hood: Parsing standardized learning content for AI
PDF
semiconductor packaging in vlsi design fab
PDF
CISA (Certified Information Systems Auditor) Domain-Wise Summary.pdf
PDF
Race Reva University – Shaping Future Leaders in Artificial Intelligence
PDF
Skin Care and Cosmetic Ingredients Dictionary ( PDFDrive ).pdf
PDF
Uderstanding digital marketing and marketing stratergie for engaging the digi...
PDF
Empowerment Technology for Senior High School Guide
PDF
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY - PART - (2) THE PURPOSE OF LIFE.pdf
PDF
ChatGPT for Dummies - Pam Baker Ccesa007.pdf
PDF
HVAC Specification 2024 according to central public works department
PDF
AI-driven educational solutions for real-life interventions in the Philippine...
PDF
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY - PART (3) REALITY & MYSTERY.pdf
PPTX
Core Concepts of Personalized Learning and Virtual Learning Environments
Paper A Mock Exam 9_ Attempt review.pdf.
ELIAS-SEZIURE AND EPilepsy semmioan session.pptx
B.Sc. DS Unit 2 Software Engineering.pptx
Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment .pdf
A powerpoint presentation on the Revised K-10 Science Shaping Paper
Education and Perspectives of Education.pptx
Environmental Education MCQ BD2EE - Share Source.pdf
What’s under the hood: Parsing standardized learning content for AI
semiconductor packaging in vlsi design fab
CISA (Certified Information Systems Auditor) Domain-Wise Summary.pdf
Race Reva University – Shaping Future Leaders in Artificial Intelligence
Skin Care and Cosmetic Ingredients Dictionary ( PDFDrive ).pdf
Uderstanding digital marketing and marketing stratergie for engaging the digi...
Empowerment Technology for Senior High School Guide
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY - PART - (2) THE PURPOSE OF LIFE.pdf
ChatGPT for Dummies - Pam Baker Ccesa007.pdf
HVAC Specification 2024 according to central public works department
AI-driven educational solutions for real-life interventions in the Philippine...
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY - PART (3) REALITY & MYSTERY.pdf
Core Concepts of Personalized Learning and Virtual Learning Environments

Introduction to Business Accounting

  • 1. INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING Jacqueline Peters-Richardson
  • 2. Course Name – Introduction to Accounting Course Author - Jacqueline Peters-Richardson, Ministry of Education, Trinidad and Tobago Commonwealth of Learning Edition 1.0 ____________________ Commonwealth of Learning ©September 2011 Any part of this document may be reproduced without permission but with attribution to the Commonwealth of Learning using the CC-BY-SA (share alike with attribution). http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0 Commonwealth of Learning 1055 West Hastings Street, Suite 1200 Vancouver, British Columbia Canada V6E 2E9 Telephone: +1 604 775 8200 Fax: +1 604 775 8210 Web: www.col.org E-mail: info@col.org Introduction to Accounting Page | 1
  • 3. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The Commonwealth of Learning wishes to acknowledge the contributions of the course authors and the support of the University of Lesotho in the creation of this course. Introduction to Accounting Page | 2
  • 4. TABLE OF CONTENTS ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ................................................................................................................................. 2 COURSE OVERVIEW....................................................................................................................................... 6 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 6 Course Goals ............................................................................................................................................. 6 Course Structure ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Required Readings .................................................................................................................................... 7 Assignments and Projects ......................................................................................................................... 8 Assessment Methods ................................................................................................................................ 8 Time Required ........................................................................................................................................... 8 Course Schedule........................................................................................................................................ 8 STUDENT SUPPORT ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Academic Support ..................................................................................................................................... 9 How to Submit Assignments ..................................................................................................................... 9 Technical Support ..................................................................................................................................... 9 UNIT ONE – INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING .......................................................................................... 10 Unit Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 10 Unit Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 10 Unit Readings .......................................................................................................................................... 10 Assignments and Activities ..................................................................................................................... 10 Topic 1.1 Definition Of Accounting And Accounting Terms.................................................................... 11 Topic Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 17 Topic 1.2 The Accounting Cycle .............................................................................................................. 18 Topic 1.3 Business Accounting Process And Procedures ........................................................................ 22 Topic 1.4 The Accounting Equation And Balance Sheet ......................................................................... 26 Unit References....................................................................................................................................... 32 Unit Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 33 Unit 1 Suggested Answers ...................................................................................................................... 35 Introduction to Accounting Page | 3
  • 5. UNIT TWO – DOUBLE ENTRY SYSTEM OF ACOUNTING .............................................................................. 37 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 37 Objectives ............................................................................................................................................... 37 Unit Readings .......................................................................................................................................... 37 Assignments and Activities ..................................................................................................................... 37 Topic 2.1 Books Of Original Entry ........................................................................................................... 38 Unit Assignment ...................................................................................................................................... 57 Topic 2.2 Recording Business Financial Transactions ............................................................................. 58 Unit Assignment ...................................................................................................................................... 75 topic Summary ........................................................................................................................................ 75 Topic 2.3 Balancing Off Accounts............................................................................................................ 76 Topic 2.4 Trial Balance ............................................................................................................................ 81 Unit Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 83 UNIT THREE – FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................... 85 Unit Readings .......................................................................................................................................... 85 Assignments and Activities ..................................................................................................................... 85 Topic 3.1 Depreciation And Disposal Of Assets ...................................................................................... 86 Topic 3.2 Adjustments For Financial Reporting ...................................................................................... 97 Topic 3.3 Bad Debts And Provision For Bad Debts................................................................................ 102 Topic 3.4 Inventory Accounting ............................................................................................................ 109 Topic 3.5 Final Accounts for Sole Trader .............................................................................................. 113 Unit Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 122 UNIT FOUR – ANALYSING/INTERPRETING FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS ............... 123 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 123 Objectives ............................................................................................................................................. 123 Unit Readings ........................................................................................................................................ 123 Assignments and Activities ................................................................................................................... 123 Topic 4.1 Accounting Ratios .................................................................................................................. 124 Topic 4.2 Correction of Errors ............................................................................................................... 130 Topic 4.3 Payroll .................................................................................................................................... 137 Topic 4.4 Bank Reconciliation Statement ............................................................................................. 144 Topic 4.5 Petty Cash Book And The Imprest System ............................................................................ 150 Introduction to Accounting Page | 4
  • 6. Topic 4.6 Control Accounts ................................................................................................................... 155 Unit Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 159 UNIT FIVE – FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF OTHER ORGANIZATIONS ......................................................... 160 Unit Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 160 Unit Objectives ...................................................................................................................................... 160 Unit Readings ........................................................................................................................................ 160 Assignments and Activities ................................................................................................................... 160 Topic 5.1 Single Entry And Incomplete Records ................................................................................... 161 Topic 5.2 Receipts And Payments Account ........................................................................................... 165 Topic 5.3 Partnership Accounts ............................................................................................................ 169 Topic 5.4 Company Accounts ................................................................................................................ 174 Unit References..................................................................................................................................... 179 Unit Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 180 FINAL ASSIGNMENT/PROJECT............................................................................................................... 181 COURSE SUMMARY............................................................................................................................... 182 Introduction to Accounting Page | 5
  • 7. COURSE OVERVIEW INTRODUCTION This course is designed to teach you the “language of business” to create a better understand of the terms and concepts used in business decisions. The course Introduction to Accounting prepares entrepreneurs to manage the financial aspects of their businesses. In order for any entrepreneurship business to be successful there should be proper financial recording and management of the business finances. During this course you will be exposed to financial terms and concepts to proper financial control of your business. The Introduction to Business Accounting course will provide future entrepreneurs with basic skills and knowledge required to establish and maintain business accounts, read and interprets financial reports and returns. You will explore the process and procedures of business accounting and its role in establishing and managing a successful business venture. You will also analyse and interpret final accounts of different forms of business. COURSE GOALS Upon completion of the Introduction to Business Accounting you should be able to: 1. Define accounting and accounting terms 2. Appreciate the differences between bookkeeping and accounting 3. State and illustrate the accounting cycle 4. Describe the different types of accounts 5. Examine the concepts and best practices of business accounting 6. Record and interpret entries in the books of original entry 7. Transfer information from the books of original entry to the ledgers 8. Generate trial balance from the balances in the ledgers 9. Analyse financial reports and returns 10. Calculate equity rations 11. Explain cash flow 12. Prepare bank reconciliation statements 13. Calculate payroll documents 14. Prepare cash flow, financial statements, income statements and balance sheets 15. Prepare final accounts for other forms of businesses 16. State the basic accounting equation 17. Describe the relationship between the accounting equation and the balance sheet Introduction to Accounting Page | 6
  • 8. COURSE STRUCTURE This course is divided into five units: Unit One – Introduction to Accounting Topic 1 Definition of Accounting and key accounting terms. Topic 2 The Accounting Cycle. Topic 3 Business accounting process and procedures. Topic 4 The Accounting Equation and the Balance Sheet. Unit Two – Double Entry System of Accounting Topic 1 Source Documents and the Books of original entry Topic 2 Recording Business Financial Transactions Topic 3 Balancing Off of Accounts Topic 4 The Trial Balance Unit Three - Financial Accounting and Adjustments Topic 1 Assets Disposal and Depreciation Topic 2 Adjustments for financial Reporting Topic 3 Bad Debts and Provision for Bad Debts Topic 4 Inventory Accounting Topic 5 Prepare Cash Flow, Financial Statements, Income Statements and Balance Sheets for Sole Trader Unit Four - Analysing and Interpreting of Financial Statements and Control Systems Topic 1 Accounting Ratios Topic 2 Correction of Errors Topic 3 Payroll Topic 4 Bank Reconciliation Statements Topic 5 Petty Cash Book and Imprest System Topic 6 Control Accounts Unit Five - Financial Statements of other organizations Topic 1 Single Entry and Incomplete Records Topic 2 Receipts and Payments Accounts Topic 3 Partnership Accounts Topic 4 Company Accounts REQUIRED READINGS The institution and instructor delivering the course will identify specific readings to support the course. Below is a list of online ebooks that could be used to support this course. Taylor, P. (2008). Book-Keeping and Accounting for the Small Business. How to Books. (E- Book). Available at: http://www.e-booksdirectory.com/details.php?ebook=2188 Wlather, L.M. (2001). Principles of Accounting. Principlesofaccounting.com. (E-Book). Available at: http://www.e-booksdirectory.com/details.php?ebook=2910 Introduction to Accounting Page | 7
  • 9. ASSIGNMENTS AND PROJECTS You will be provided detailed instructions for your final project by your instructor. Ideally the final project for this course will require you to prepare final accounts for a sole trader from a list of transaction and source documents. The course has been designed to provide your guidance and activities that will prepare you to complete the final project assigned by your instructor. ASSESSMENT METHODS Assessments will take the form of responding to activities, as well as coursework assignments and a final project and examinations as determined from time to time by the institution. In cases where coursework, assignments, projects and examinations are used in combination, percentage rating for each component will be communicated to you at the appropriate time. Your instructor will provide you with guidance on how he or she will grade and provide feedback re: all graded activities. TIME REQUIRED The course is worth 14 credits, and each credit is equivalent to 10 notional hours. You are, therefore, advised to spend not less than 140 hours of study on this course. The notional time includes: • Going over activities embedded in the study material • Peer group interaction (where necessary) • Face-to-face tutorials (where necessary) • Working on tutor-marked assignments • Preparing and sitting examinations (where that is required) COURSE SCHEDULE The institution and instructor will provide a specific schedule to guide students. Introduction to Accounting Page | 8
  • 10. STUDENT SUPPORT Note: This section should be customized by the institution delivering the course. Some suggestions for content are provided in the heading below. ACADEMIC SUPPORT <Insert the following information if relevant> How to contract a tutor/facilitator (Phone number, email, office hours, etc.). Background information about the tutor/facilitator if he/she does not change regularly. Alternatively provide a separate letter with the package describing your tutor/facilitator’s background. Description of any resources that they may need to procure to complete the course (e.g. lab kits, etc.). How to access the library (either in person, by email or online). HOW TO SUBMIT ASSIGNMENTS <If the course requires that assignments be regularly graded, then insert a description of how and where to submit assignments. Also explain how the learners will receive feedback.> TECHNICAL SUPPORT <If the students must access content online or use email to submit assignments, then a technical support section is required. You need to include how to complete basic tasks and a phone number that they can call if they are having difficulty getting online>. Introduction to Accounting Page | 9
  • 11. UNIT ONE – INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING UNIT INTRODUCTION In order for any business to be successful, there should be proper control of its finances. In this unit you will begin by understanding basic accounting terms and principles that will get you started to proper financial control of your business. UNIT OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this unit you should be able to: 1. Define Accounting and Accounting terms 2. Appreciate the difference between bookkeeping and accounting 3. State the main purpose of accounting 4. Describe the different types of accounts 5. Identify different types of business 6. State and illustrate the accounting cycle 7. Examine the concepts and best practices of business accounting 8. Identify users of accounting information 9. Distinguish between financial and management accounting 10. Examine accounting assumptions, principles and conventions and how they are used 11. State the accounting equation 12. Describe the relationship of the accounting equation and the balance sheet 13. Understand what is meant by assets, liabilities and owners’ equity UNIT READINGS The instructor will provide a list of readings. ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions. Introduction to Accounting Page | 10
  • 12. TOPIC 1.1 DEFINITION OF ACCOUNTING AND ACCOUNTING TERMS TOPIC INTRODUCTION We will begin by taking and look at the definition for accounting and some accounting terms. As you have increase knowledge of various accounting terms it will enable you to analyze and interpret the accounting records of your business. TOPIC OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Define accounting and accounting terms 2. Appreciate the difference between bookkeeping and accounting 3. State the purpose of accounting 4. Identify users of accounting information 5. Identify different types of businesses 6. Distinguish between Financial and Management Accounting WHAT IS BOOKKEEPING? Let us begin this unit by defining two important terms in accounting: bookkeeping and accounting. Activity 1 – A From your knowledge of accounts what would be your define of Bookkeeping ____________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Accounting _____________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Great start! Now let us look at these definitions Bookkeeping is defined as concerned with the recording of business data. “It is the process of recording the business transactions and the relations between the transactions. The process of bookkeeping is mainly mechanical and does not require any analysis. Instead of the analyzing, the bookkeeping relies only on the recording of the information”. (difference between 2001) Introduction to Accounting Page | 11
  • 13. Accounting is concerned with the design, interpretation of data and the preparation of financial reports. “Accounting is also the systematic recording of business transactions but it includes additional reports and further financial analysis of the transactions. Accounting is also the systematic recording of business transactions but it includes additional reports and further financial analysis of the transactions”. (difference between 2001) As you can see, accounting is made up of two elements: 1. Recording business transactions - Book keeping 2. Presenting the information DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BOOKKEEPING AND ACCOUNTING Now that we have defined both bookkeeping and accounting we can now look at the difference between them. Bookkeeping is a part of the accounting process that records the financial transactions. Accounting takes the recorded financial transactions entered by a bookkeeper and prepares financial statements, liabilities of the assets and the various results of the whole business. The accounting process uses the bookkeeping information, interprets the financial data of the business and compiles it into reports in a format that business managers can use to judge the financial health of the business based on their projected financial plan. Bookkeeping is simply the recording of monetary transactions of a business, whereas accounting allows a business to record, analyse and retrieve critical financial information that can be used to determine a business financial status and provide reports and insights needed to make sound financial decisions. PURPOSE OF ACCOUNTING The purpose of accounting is to provide a means of recording, reporting, summarizing and interpreting economic data. “The primary purpose of accounting is to identify and record all activities that impact the organization financially. All activities, including purchases, sales, the acquisition of capital and interest earned from investments, can be classified in monetary terms and posted to a specified account as an accounting record. These transactions typically are recorded in ledgers and journals and are part of the process known as the accounting cycle.” (ehow 1999-2001) TYPES OF ACCOUNTING INFORMATION An accounting information system provides data to help decision makers both outside and inside the business. Decision makers outside the business are affected in some way by the performance of the business. Decision makers inside the business are responsible for the performance of the business. For this reason, accounting is divided into two categories: Introduction to Accounting Page | 12
  • 14. financial accounting for those outside; and managerial accounting for those inside. MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTS Management accounting refers to the processes and procedures implemented for internal decision making and reporting within an organization. It provides information that is useful in running a business by internal users, usually accomplished through custom designed reports. These are produced as often as a business wants them (usually monthly). They can be prepared using the business’s own internal policies and bookkeeping/financial management system. Internal users, Senior and middle Management use accounting information to run business. Employees utilize accounting information to determine a business’s profitability and profit sharing. Management account information or reports should: Relate to the part of the business for which the manager is responsible. For example, a Production Manager wants information on costs of production but not on advertising. Involve planning for the future. For instance, a budget would show financial plans for the coming year. Meet two tests: o the accounting information must be useful and relevant; and o it must not cost more to gather and process than it is worth. Managerial accounting generates information that managers can use to make sound decisions. The four major types of internal management decisions are: 1. Financial Decisions—determine what amount of capital (funds) are needed to run the business and whether to secure these funds from owners or creditors. In this sense, capital means money used by the business to purchase resources such as machinery and buildings and to pay expenses of conducting the business. 2. Resource Allocation Decisions—identify how the total capital of a business is to be invested, such as the amount of machinery to be purchased in any one year. 3. Production Decisions—decides what products are to be produced, by what means, and when. 4. Marketing Decisions—establishes selling prices and advertising budgets; determining the location of a business's markets and how to reach them. FINANCIAL ACCOUNTS Financial accounting refers to the fundamental guidelines, polices, procedures and regulations mandated by the General Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP), which was established by the Financial Standards Board (FASB) and/or government regulators. It provides information designed to satisfy the needs of external users. This reporting is done Introduction to Accounting Page | 13
  • 15. in the form of financial statements. These accounts are usually produced annually. They are based on historical information and are rarely used internally. Financial accounts are used by external users for several reasons. The external users of accounting information fall into six groups; each has different interests in the business depending on how you are financially structure and thus will want answers to unique questions. The groups and some of their possible questions are: Owners and Prospective Owners. Has the business earned satisfactory income on its total investment? Should an investment be made in this business? Should the present investment be increased, decreased, or retained at the same level? Can the business install costly pollution control equipment and still be profitable? Creditors and Lenders. Should a loan be granted to the business? Will the business be able to pay its debts as they become due? Employees and their Unions. Does the business have the ability to pay increased wages? Is the business financially able to provide long-term employment for its workforce? Customers. Does the business offer useful products at fair prices? Will the business survive long enough to honour its product warranties? Governments. Is the business, such as a local public utility, charge a fair rate for its services? How much tax does the business owe? The General Public. Is the business providing useful products and gainful employment for the local citizens without causing serious environmental problems? Introduction to Accounting Page | 14
  • 16. Activity 1 – B Complete the illustration below to demonstrate your understanding of the types of accounting and the users of the accounting information using examples. Were you able to complete the diagram above with the correct information? Now that you have distinguished between management and financial accounting and there users lets now look at the different types of account. CLASSIFICATION OF ACCOUNTS An 'account' is a specific location for recording transactions of a like kind. The dual aspect of treating each transaction is then recorded in an account. An account shows us the 'history' of a particular business transaction. Accounts can be divided into three categories: 1. Personal Accounts – these are the accounts of your creditors (accounts payable) and debtors (accounts receivable) 2. Real Accounts – are your tangible and intangible assets 3. Nominal Accounts – these are income and expense accounts of your business Introduction to Accounting Page | 15
  • 17. Type Represent Examples Personal Accounts related to individuals, Individuals; partnership firms; corporate firms, organizations, or companies entities; non-profit organizations; any local or statutory bodies including governments at the country, state or local levels Real Accounts related to assets of a Tangibles – Plants and tangible or intangible nature machinery, furniture and fixtures, computers and information processing equipment Intangibles – Goodwill, patents, copyrights, trademarks Nominal Temporary income and Sales, purchases, utilities, dividends expenditure accounts for recognition of the implications of financial transactions during each fiscal term till finalization of accounts at term end Table 1.1 Accounts can be further divided into five types. The basic types of accounts are: 1. 'Assets:' items of value that the business owns or has rights to. Examples include: cash, real estate, equipment, money or services that others owe you (accounts receivables), and even intangible items such as patents and copyrights. 2. 'Liabilities:' obligations that are owed to other parties (accounts payables). Examples include: wages payable, taxes due, and borrowed money (also called debt). 3. 'Equity:' the ownership value of a business. It is the investment by an owner in the business. 4. 'Revenues:' the mechanisms where income enters the business (note that revenue and income is not the same thing--they are used here to describe each other in basic terms only. This will be explained later). 5. 'Expenses:' the costs of doing business. Examples include: salary expense, rent, utilities expense, and interest on borrowed money. We have now identified the different types of accounts for a business but do you know what a business is? Let’s explore this concept. Introduction to Accounting Page | 16
  • 18. WHAT IS A BUSINESS? A business can be defined as a commercial organisation, which exists with a view to making a profit. A business will generally fall into one of the following categories (depending on the country you are establishing the business): Sole Trader - This is a business that is owned and operated by one person. He or she is solely liable for all business debts but when successful, takes all the profits. Partnership - This type of business is owned by several individuals, some of which will actively be involved in the business. Companies (or Public Corporations) - This type of business is owned by shareholders and is operated on their behalf by a nominated board of directors. Non-Trading Organisations (or Non-Profit Corporations) - Clubs, associations and other non-profit-making organisations are normally run for the benefit of their members to engage in a particular activity and not to make a profit. Their financial statements will take the form of income and expenditure accounts. Cooperative Society - A legally constituted business entity formed for the explicit purpose of furthering the economic welfare of its members and that of the wider society by providing them with goods or services. TOPIC SUMMARY You just had your first insight of an operation of a business. You have distinguished between bookkeeping and accounting, management and financial accounting and you have also looked at the classification and types of accounts and forms of business entities. We will now look at the Accounting Cycle. Introduction to Accounting Page | 17
  • 19. TOPIC 1.2 THE ACCOUNTING CYCLE TOPIC INTRODUCTION We are now moving on to the accounting cycle. This is a series of steps that are repeated ever reporting period. The process starts with making accounting entries for each transaction and goes through closing the books. This is the name given to the collective process of recording and processing the accounting events of a business. It is a methodical set of rules to ensure the accuracy and conformity of financial statements. TOPIC OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. State and explain the steps in the accounting cycle 2. Illustrate the accounting cycle in the form of a diagram STEPS IN THE ACCOUNTING CYCLE The accounting cycle is a series of steps that is followed to ensure that the records of a business are true and fair. Each business transaction goes through these steps. Let’s have a look at these steps in detail. 1. collecting & analyzing source documents 9. Post Cloisng 2. Journalizing Trial Balance Transactions 8. Closing 3. Post to the Entries Ledgers Accounting Cycle 7. Financial 4. Unadjusted Statemtents Trial Balance 6. Adjusted Trial 5. Prepare Balance Adjustments Introduction to Accounting Page | 18
  • 20. Step 1 - Collecting and analyzing data from source documents. When a transaction occurs, a document is produced. Most of the time, these documents are external to the business (e.g. purchase orders, sales slips, etc.), however, they can also be internal documents, such as inter-office sales, cheques, bills from providers, etc. These documents are referred to as source documents. Some additional examples of source documents include: The receipt you get when you purchase something at the store. Interest you earned on your savings account which is documented in your monthly bank statement. The monthly electric utility bill that comes in the mail. The telephone bill. Invoices from other service providers, contractors, etc. Step 2 – Journalizing transactions. The source documents are recorded in a Journal. This is also known as a book of first entry. The journal records both sides of the transaction recorded by the source document. These write-ups are known as Journal entries. Step 3 – Post to the Ledgers. The Journal entries are then transferred to a Ledger. The group of accounts (described earlier) is called ledger. A ledger is also known as a book of accounts. The purpose of a Ledger is to bring together all of the transactions for a similar activity. For example, if a business has one bank account, then all transactions that include cash would then be maintained in the Cash Ledger. This process of transferring the values is known as a posting. Once the entries have all been posted, the Ledger accounts are added up in a process called Balancing. Balancing implies that the sum of all Debits equals the sum of all Credits. Step 4 – Unadjusted Trial Balance. A particular working document called an unadjusted trial balance is created. This lists all the balances from all the accounts in the Ledger. Notice that the values are not posted to the trial balance, they are merely copied. At this point accounting happens. The accountant produces a number of adjustments, which make sure that the values comply with accounting principles. These values (such as depreciation of equipment) are then passed through the accounting system resulting in an adjusted trial balance. This process continues until the accountant is satisfied. Introduction to Accounting Page | 19
  • 21. Steps 5 – Prepare adjustments. Period-end adjustments (usually quarterly) are required to bring accounts to their proper balances after considering transactions and/or events not yet recorded. Under accrual accounting, revenue is recorded when earned and expenses when they are incurred. An entry may be required at the end of the period to record revenue that has been earned but not yet recorded on the books. Similarly, an adjustment may be required to record expense that may have been incurred but not yet recorded. Step 6 – Prepare an adjusted trial balance. This step is similar to the preparation of the unadjusted trial balance but this time the adjusting entries are included. Correction of any errors must be made. Step 7 - Prepare Financial Statements. Financial statements are drawn from the trial balance and are presented in the following forms: Income statement: prepared from revenue, expenses, gains and losses Balance sheet: prepared from assets, liabilities and equity accounts Statement of retained earnings: prepared from net income and dividend information Cash flow statement: derived from the other financial statement using either the direct or indirect method. Finally, all the revenue and expense accounts are closed. Step 8 – Closing entries. Revenues and expenses are accumulated and reported by period, monthly, quarterly, or yearly. To prevent them not being added to or co-mingled with revenues and expenses of another period, they need to be closed out- that is, given zero balances at the end of each period. Their net balances, which represent the income or loss for the period, are transferred into owners’ equity. Once revenue and expense accounts are closed, the only accounts that have balances are the asset, liability, and owners’ equity accounts. These balances are carried forward to the next period. Step 9 – Prepare post-closing trial balance. The purpose of this final step is two-fold: to determine that all revenue and expense accounts have been closed properly and to test the equality of debit and credit balances of all the balance sheet accounts, that is, assets, liabilities and owners’ equity. Introduction to Accounting Page | 20
  • 22. TOPIC SUMMARY You have just looked at the accounting cycle and the steps in the accounting cycle. As you continue with the other topics in this unit you will examine the accounting cycle in more detail. We will now continue and look at the business accounting processes and procedures. Introduction to Accounting Page | 21
  • 23. TOPIC 1.3 BUSINESS ACCOUNTING PROCESS AND PROCEDURES TOPIC INTRODUCTION Accounting processes and procedures are usually based on the basic accounting cycle. The accounting process outlines how financial information flows through a business. It also identifies which individuals are responsible for the information. In order for the owners of a business to make sound decisions, they will need financial information that accurately reflects the "true and fair view" of the financial performance and position of the business. TOPIC OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. examine accounting assumptions principles and conventions; and 2. identify how these assumptions, principles and conventions are used. ACCOUNTING ASSUMPTIONS, PRINCIPLES AND CONVENTIONS Accounting is used to communicate financial information. It is based on twelve fundamental concepts that form the basis for all the General Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). Once these concepts are used as the foundation, readers of financial statements and other accounting information do not need to make assumptions about what the number means. The concepts and conventions were adopted to support the “true and fair view” approach of preparing financial statement for a business. The table 1.2 indicates the accounting assumptions, principles and conventions. Assumptions Principles Conventions Separate Entity Historical Cost Materiality Going Concern Matching Cost Benefits Money Measurement Realization of Income Conservatism Time Period Full Disclosure Consistency Dual Aspect Table 1.2 Let’s look further at these assumptions, principles and conventions. ACCOUNTING ASSUMPTIONS Separate Entity – this convention states that the business is an entity separate from its owner. Therefore, business records should be separated from the records of the owner. (Knol, 2009) Introduction to Accounting Page | 22
  • 24. Going Concern – assumes that the entity will continue to operate indefinitely. It implies that the business will continue to operate for an indefinite period of time in the foreseeable future. This concept allows business to spread (amortize) the cost of fixed assets over its expected useful life. (Knol, 2009) Money Measurement - assumes that items are not accounted for unless they can be quantified in monetary terms. (Knol, 2009) Financial statements shows only a limited picture of the business. They do not consider the business’s other valuable resources (workforce, brand recognition, quality of management) because they cannot be quantified in monetary terms. Time Period – allows the performance evaluated of a “Going Concern” business to be broken up into specific period of time such as month, a quarter or a year. (Knol, 2009) ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES Historical Cost – requires that business assets be recorded at the actual price paid to acquire them. No account is made for the changing value of these assets. (Knol, 2009) Transactions are recorded at cost and not at its market value. Matching – to avoid overstatement of income in any one period, the matching principle requires that revenue and related expenses be recorded in the same accounting period (moneyinstructor.com). Accountants should prepare accruals at the end for the reporting period to account for expenses incurred but for which there is no source document. Realization of Income – revenue are recognized when they are earned. This occurs when the seller received cash or claim to cash in exchange for goods and services. (moneyinstructor.com) Full disclosure – requires financial statements provide sufficient information to assist users of the information make knowledgeable and informed decisions about the business. (Knol, 2009) Dual Aspect – is based on the accounting equation. All transactions must meet the equation in balance. Financial transactions are allocated both a debit and credit entry in the accounts. (Knol, 2009) ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS Materiality – events are only recorded if it’s significant enough to justify the usefulness of the information. (Moneyinstructor.com) Cost Benefits – since the value of assets change over time it would be impossible to accurately record the market value for the assets. There it is recorded at the price paid to acquire it. (Moneyinstructor.com) Introduction to Accounting Page | 23
  • 25. Conservatism – requires that profit should not be taken into account unless it’s actually realized in cash while all possible losses must be fully provided for. This ensures that you financial statement does not overstate the business financial position. (Moneyinstructor.com) Consistency – The same method of reporting should be used to ensure that any differences in the financial position between reporting periods is as a result of change in operating and not changes in the way items are accounted for. (Moneyinstructor.com) The accounting process consists of the following groups of functions listed in illustration 1.2 Illustration 1.2 Accountants observe many events (or activities) and identify and measure in financial terms (dollars) those events considered evidence of economic activity. (Often, these three functions are collectively referred to as analyse.) The purchase and sale of goods and services are economic events. Next, the economic events are recorded, classified into meaningful groups, and summarized. Accountants report on economic events (or business activity) by preparing financial statements and special reports. Often accountants interpret these statements and reports for various groups such as management, investors, and creditors. Interpretation may Introduction to Accounting Page | 24
  • 26. involve determining how the business is performing compared to prior years and other similar businesses. TOPIC SUMMARY In this unit we dealt with accounting assumptions, principles and conventions. These form the basis of the General Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and support the true and fair view approach of preparing financial statements. Introduction to Accounting Page | 25
  • 27. TOPIC 1.4 THE ACCOUNTING EQUATION AND BALANCE SHEET INTRODUCTION The whole of accounting is based a very simple idea called the accounting equation. It sounds complicated, but in fact it is easy to understand. This equation is expressed in the Balance Sheet and states the following: Assets = Liability + Owners Equity OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic, you should be able to: 1. State the basic accounting equation 2. Describe the relationship of the accounting equation to the balance sheet. 3. understand what is meant by assets, liabilities and owners’ equity The balance sheet, sometimes called the statement of financial position, lists the business’s assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity (including dollar amounts) as of a specific moment in time. That specific moment is the close of business on the date of the balance sheet. A balance sheet is like a photograph; it captures the financial position of a business at a particular point in time. As you study about the assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity contained in a balance sheet, you will understand why this financial statement provides information about the solvency of the business. Catina’s Beauty Saloon Balance Sheet As at 31st December 2010 Assets (in $) Liabilities & Equity (in $) Cash 10,000 Accounts Payable (Creditors) 1,600 Accounts Receivables (Debtors) 1,700 Notes Payable 2,000 Motor Vehicle 20,000 Total Liabilities 3,600 Equipment 3,500 Equity Cash at Bank 15,000 Capital 25,600 Retained Income 21,000 50,200 50,200 Illustration 1.3 Let’s examine the items in the Balance Sheet in illustration 1.3. It shows that the total assets should equal the total liabilities and owners’ equity. Assets as stated in Topic 1.1 are things of value owned by the business. They are also called the resources of the business. Assets have value because a business can use or exchange them to produce the services or products of the business. Assets are the economic resources of the entity, and include such items as cash, accounts receivable (amounts owed to a firm by its customers), inventories, land, buildings, equipment, and even intangible Introduction to Accounting Page | 26
  • 28. assets like patents and other legal rights and claims. Assets are presumed to entail probable future economic benefits to the owner. In illustration 1.3 the assets of Catina’s Beauty Salon amount to USD 50,200. Her assets consist of cash, accounts receivable (amounts due from customers for services previously rendered), Motor Vehicle, equipment and cash at bank. Liabilities are the debts owed by a business. Typically, a business must pay its debts by certain dates. A business incurs many of its liabilities by purchasing items on credit. Liabilities are amounts owed to others relating to loans, extensions of credit, and other obligations arising in the course of business. Catina’s Beauty Saloon liabilities consist of accounts payable (amounts owed to suppliers for previous purchases) and notes payable (written promises to pay a specific sum of money) totalling USD 3,600. Catina’s Beauty Saloon is a sole proprietorship. The owners’ interest in the business is referred to as Owners equity. Owners' equity is the owner's "interest" in the business. It is sometimes called net assets, because it is equivalent to assets minus liabilities for a particular business. Catina’s equity consists of (1) USD 25,600 capital investment and (2) retained income of USD21, 000. Capital stock shows the amount of the owners’ investment in the business. We will discuss these items later in the course. At this point, simply note that the balance sheet heading includes the name of the organization and the title and date of the statement (notice that the dollar amount of the total assets is equal to the claims on or interest in those assets). The balance sheet shows these claims under the heading “Liabilities and Equity”. THE ACCOUNTING EQUATION The fundamental accounting equation is the backbone of the accounting and reporting system. It is central to understanding a key financial statement known as the balance sheet (sometimes called the statement of financial position). The accounting equation states: Assets = Liabilities + Owners' Equity Activity 1 – C Using the accounting equation can you calculate the missing figures below 1 $25,200 $10,100 2 $17,350 $21,750 3 $71,350 $29,100 Introduction to Accounting Page | 27
  • 29. From activity 1 – C above, you should have determined that the accounting equation can be expressed in different forms. Let’s have a look. The accounting equation can be expressed as: Liabilities = Assets – Owner’s Equity So if we use question 1 in the activity above then your liabilities figure should be $15, 100 $25, 200 (Assets) – $10,100 (Owner’s Equity) The accounting equation could also be expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity In question 2 above, your Asset figure should be $39,100 17,350 (Liabilities) + 21, 750 (Owner’s Equity) Another method of expressing the accounting equation is: Owner’s Equity = Assets – Liabilities From the question 3 (in the activity above) you should have calculated $42, 250 71, 350 (Assets) - 29, 100 (Liabilities) HOW TRANSACTIONS IMPACT THE ACCOUNTING EQUATION Each passing transaction or event brings about a change in the overall financial condition. Business activity will impact various asset, liability, and/or equity accounts; but, they will not disturb the equality of the accounting equation. So, how does this happen? To reveal the answer to this question, let's look at four specific transactions for Catina’s Beauty Saloon. You will see how each transaction impacts the individual asset, liability, and equity accounts, without upsetting the basic equality of the overall balance sheet. Business transactions are measurable events that affect the financial condition of a business. Introduction to Accounting Page | 28
  • 30. 1. Purchase an Asset by Cash On 12 January 2011, Catina purchased addition equipment valued $2,000 by cash. Catina’s Beauty Saloon Balance Sheet As at 31st December 2010 Assets (in $) Liabilities & Equity (in $) Cash 8,000 Accounts Payable (Creditors) 1,600 Accounts Receivables (Debtors) 1,700 Notes Payable 2,000 Motor Vehicle 20,000 Total Liabilities 3,600 Equipment 5,500 Equity Cash at Bank 15,000 Capital 25,600 Retained Income 21,000 50,200 50,200 Illustration 1.4 In illustration 1.4, you can see that the cash account has reduced by $2000 and the equipment increased by the same amount. However, the balance sheet still remained balanced. 2. Purchase stock on Credit On 17th January 2011, she purchased stock for use in the Saloon on credit from Hair Suppliers Ltd $5,000. Catina’s Beauty Saloon Balance Sheet As at 31st December 2010 Assets (in $) Liabilities & Equity (in $) Cash 8,000 Accounts Payable (Creditors) 6,600 Accounts Receivables (Debtors) 1,700 Notes Payable 2,000 Motor Vehicle 20,000 Total Liabilities 3,600 Equipment 5,500 Equity Cash at Bank 15,000 Capital 25,600 Stock 5,000 Retained Income 21,000 55,200 55,200 Illustration 1.5 Observe the difference in Accounts Payable and inclusion of Stock in illustration 1.5 above but the balance sheet still remain equal. Introduction to Accounting Page | 29
  • 31. 3. Payment of a Liability On the 21st January, 2011 Catina made a payment to her suppliers $1,000 by cheque. Catina’s Beauty Saloon Balance Sheet As at 31st December 2010 Assets (in $) Liabilities & Equity (in $) Cash 8,000 Accounts Payable (Creditors) 5,600 Accounts Receivables (Debtors) 1,700 Notes Payable 2,000 Motor Vehicle 20,000 Total Liabilities 3,600 Equipment 5,500 Equity Cash at Bank 14,000 Capital 25,600 Stock 5,000 Retained Income 21,000 54,200 54,200 Illustration 1.6 Changes have been made to the Accounts Payable and the Cash at Bank account to reflect the transaction, however, the Balance still remains balanced. 4. Collection of an Asset On the 28th January 2011, J Brown one of Catina’s debtors paid her amount owning $500 by cash. Catina’s Beauty Saloon Balance Sheet As at 31st December 2010 Assets (in $) Liabilities & Equity (in $) Cash 8,500 Accounts Payable (Creditors) 5,600 Accounts Receivables (Debtors) 1,200 Notes Payable 2,000 Motor Vehicle 20,000 Total Liabilities 3,600 Equipment 5,500 Equity Cash at Bank 14,000 Capital 25,600 Stock 5,000 Retained Income 21,000 54,200 54,200 Illustration 1.7 The cash at Bank is affected whenever payment is made by cheque. Since the cheque is a means of depositing or withdrawing from your bank account. Again adjustments are made to the accounts affected by the transaction and the Balance Sheet. Introduction to Accounting Page | 30
  • 32. Self-Reflection Question Take this opportunity to review the topics in this unit and ask yourself the following questions. 1. Do I understand how a transaction affects items on the Balance Sheet? 2. Do I understand the various methods in which the accounting equation can be expressed? 3. Am I able to make adjustments to my Balance Sheet after business transactions? Introduction to Accounting Page | 31
  • 33. UNIT REFERENCES 1. Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.). England, Pearson Education Limited. 2. Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations. Macmillan Publishers Ltd. 3. http://www.differencebetween.net/business/difference-between-accounting-and- bookkeeping-2/#ixzz1GfqZ4iSs 4. http://knol.google.com/k/nowmaster-accounting/what-are-the-accounting- concepts-and/y2cary3n6mng/11# 5. http://www.moneyinstructor.com/lesson/accountingconcepts.asp 6. http://www.scribd.com/doc/9295030/Accounting-Concepts-and-Conventions 7. http://docs.globaltext.terry.uga.edu:8095/anonymous/webdav/Accounting%20Prin ciples/Accounting%20Principles%20Vol.%201.pdf 8. http://www.principlesofaccounting.com/chapter%201.htm 9. http://www.ehow.com/about_4679149_purpose-accounting_.html Introduction to Accounting Page | 32
  • 34. UNIT SUMMARY ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES Unit Assignment Catina’s Beauty Saloon Balance Sheet As at 28th January, 2011 Assets $ Liabilities and Equity $ Cash 8,500 Accounts Payable (Creditors) 5,600 Account Receivables (Debtors) 1,200 Notes Payable 2,000 Motor Vehicle 20,000 Total Liabilities 7,600 Equipment 5,500 Equity Cash at Bank 14,000 Capital 25,600 Stock 5,000 Retained Income 21,000 54,200 54,200 Catina’s Beauty Saloon had the following business transactions in the month of February 2011. Make the necessary adjustment to the accounts and update her Balance Sheet as at 28th February 2011. Feb 1 Catina deposited $5,000 cash into her Cash at bank account Feb 3 she purchased stock $2,500 by cheque Feb 7 paid a cheque of $500 to a creditor' Feb 12 A debtor paid Catina $300 by cheque Feb 15 Received a Loan from L. Stennett $10,000 by cheque Feb 20 bought equipment $8,000 by cheque SUMMARY If you understand how accounting information is prepared, you will be in an even stronger position when faced with a management decision based on accounting information. The accounting process provides financial data for a broad range of individuals whose objectives in studying the data vary widely. Reliable information is necessary before you can make a sound decision involving the allocation of scarce resources. Accounting information is valuable because it is used to evaluate the financial consequences of various alternatives. Accountants can reduce uncertainty by using professional judgment to quantify the future financial impact of taking action or delaying action. Although accounting information plays a significant role in reducing uncertainty within your business, it also provides financial data Introduction to Accounting Page | 33
  • 35. for persons outside the business. This information tells how management has discharged its responsibility for protecting and managing the business's resources. Accounting is often confused with bookkeeping (discussed earlier). Bookkeeping is a mechanical process that records the routine economic activities of a business. Accounting includes bookkeeping but goes well beyond it in scope. Accountants analyse and interpret financial information, prepare financial statements, conduct audits, design accounting systems, prepare special business and financial studies, prepare forecasts and budgets, and provide tax services. Introduction to Accounting Page | 34
  • 36. UNIT 1 SUGGESTED ANSWERS Activity 1 – B Complete the illustration below to demonstrate your understanding of the types of accounting and the users of the accounting information using examples. Activity 1 – C Using the accounting equation can you calculate the missing figures below Assets Liabilities Owners Equity $ $ $ 1. 25, 200 15,100 10,100 2. 39,100 17,350 21,750 3. 71, 350 29,100 42,250 Introduction to Accounting Page | 35
  • 37. UNIT 1 – ASSIGNMENT ANSWERS Cash 8,500 – 5,000 = 3500 Bank 14,000 + 5,000 - 2,500 – 5,00 + 300 + 10,000 – 8,000 = 18, 300 Stock 5,000 + 2, 500 = 7,500 Accounts Payable 5,600 – 500 = 5,100 Accounts Receivable 1,200 – 300 = 900 Notes Payable 2, 000 + 10, 000 = 12,000 Equipment 5,500 + 8,000 = 13,500 Catina’s Beauty Saloon Balance Sheet As at 28th February 2011 Assets $ Liabilities and Equity $ Cash 3,500 Accounts Payable (Creditors) 5,100 Account Receivables (Debtors) 900 Notes Payable 12,000 Motor Vehicle 20,000 Total Liabilities 17,100 Equipment 13,500 Equity Cash at Bank 18,300 Capital 25,600 Stock _7,500 Retained Income 21,000 63,700 63,700 NEXT STEP You have come to the end of Unit One. In Unit Two we will look at the Double Entry System of Accounting. Introduction to Accounting Page | 36
  • 38. UNIT TWO – DOUBLE ENTRY SYSTEM OF ACOUNTING INTRODUCTION In Unit One, we illustrated the accounting cycle, we also examined the accounting equation and how each transaction affects items in the Balance Sheet. In Unit Two we will expand on the steps in the accounting cycle. We will begin by journalizing the information gathered from our source documents then continue with an exploration of the double entry system of bookkeeping. There are two basic kinds of bookkeeping: single entry bookkeeping and double entry bookkeeping. In the case of single entry bookkeeping each transaction is carried to the debit column or the credit column. In the case of double entry bookkeeping we can find two entries for each transactions carried to the Ledger. One entry is carried to the credit side and the other to the debit side. This is done in the way that the two entries can be checked. Double entry bookkeeping is the fundamental concept underlying accountancy. All accounting transactions should be recorded using the double entry system. After recording your business transactions in your ledger accounts, the different accounts will be balanced and the balances used to generate your trial balance for the period. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Demonstrate the use of double-entry and accounting systems. 2. Record transactions and events. 3. Apply double entry bookkeeping to a list of transactions. 4. Use the account as the basic classifying and storage unit for accounting information. 5. Express the effects of business transactions in terms of debits and credits to different types of accounts. 6. Record the effects of business transactions in a journal. 7. Post journal entries to the accounts in the ledger. 8. Prepare a trial balance to test the equality of debits and credits in the journalizing and posting process. UNIT READINGS The instructor will provide a list of readings. ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions. Introduction to Accounting Page | 37
  • 39. TOPIC 2.1 BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY INTRODUCTION As we take a more in depth look at the accounting cycle we will examine various source documents and how the information in these documents are transferred to the books of original entry. You will also have looked at the different books of original entry. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Identify different forms of source documents. 2. Transfer information from the source document to the books of original entry. 3. Examine the various books of original entry. 4. State the use of the books of original entry. SOURCE DOCUMENTS Before we look any further at the books of original entry, let us look at the source documents that provide the information to be recorded in the books of original entry. A source document describes all the basic facts of the transaction, such as the amount of the transaction; to whom the transaction was made; the purpose of the transaction and the date of the transaction. Some source documents include: Source Document 1 - Invoices Let us look at the invoice in illustration 2.1 below. An invoice is a document that contains a detailed description of the item sold, unit price and the terms and conditions of the sale. The invoice is numbered and gives a detailed description of the item(s) sold or purchased: the quantity, the list price per unit, trade discounts allowed and the net cost of the item. Also, included on the invoice will be the terms of payment and the name and address of the customer and the name and address of the issuing firm. A number of copies are usually made and routed to different departments within the issuing firm. There are two types of invoices: 1. Purchases Invoices - reflects credit purchases of stock (Holdip and Lamorell 2010) 2. Sales Invoices - reflects credit sales of stock (Holdip and Lamorell 2010) Introduction to Accounting Page | 38
  • 40. Your Purchase Order 12/B/124 AJ Wholesale Factory Road Name and address of St. John's supplier (seller) Antigua Date of transaction 7-Sep-06 To: MJ Retailers Buyer Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Invoice number INVOICE NO. 1654 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 7 cases fruit juices 35.00 245.00 4 cases ideal milk 24.00 96.00 341.00 Sub-Total less 20% Trade Discount 68.20 Total 272.80 Discount given to encourage person to buy in bulk Illustration 2.1 Discounts A discount is a reduction in the price of an item. In order to encourage prompt payment by customers, cash discounts may be offered. Customers are allowed a specified percentage off the amount payable if paid within a stated time period. Discount Received is an allowance you receive for making prompt payment for the goods and services you receive from your suppliers. Discount Allowed is the allowance you give to your customers for making prompt payment for the goods and services they received from your business. Trade discounts are reductions in the invoice price of the goods and are given to encourage trade and increase the volume of good purchased. Trade discounts are not recorded in the ledger accounts although they may be noted in the relevant day book. Cash discounts are recorded in the accounting records Source Document 2 - Debit Notes A Debit Note is sent by the business to the supplier giving details of a claim for an allowance in respect to goods returned. (Wood and Robinson 2007) (Illustrated below). Introduction to Accounting Page | 39
  • 41. MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Antigua 26-Sep-06 To: A.M Bryden Fort Road St. John's DEBIT NOTE NO. 237 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 2 cases fruit juices 35.00 70.00 1 case ideal milk 24.00 24.00 94.00 Illustration 2.2 Source Document 3 - Credit Notes The supplier will issue a credit note to the customer (debtor) showing the amount of the agreed reduction (Wood and Robinson 2007) (Illustration 2.3) MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Antigua 23-Sep-06 To: Malika Diantha Green Bay St. John's CREDIT NOTE NO. 1235 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 2 case ideal milk 24.00 48.00 1 case tomato paste 32.00 32.00 80.00 Less 10 % trade discount 8.00 72.00 Illustration 2.3 Introduction to Accounting Page | 40
  • 42. Source Document 4 - Cash Receipts The cash receipt is a simple document of a transaction that is often issued at the time of the completion of a sale. Many businesses issue cash receipt as a matter of course. While the printed document is normally a simple record of the transaction, some examples of the cash receipt can be very detailed. (www.wisegeek.com) (Illustrated below 2.4) Number 00125 Date 21 Sept 2006 Cash Sales Receipt Name ___________Makayla Adora______________________ Address _____________12 Old Road_______________________ _______________Urlings__________________________ On Sold By Cash C.O.D Charge Account Paid Out Quantity Description Price Amount 2 Cases milk 24.00 48.00 Subtotal 48.00 Received by Tax __________________________ Total 48.00 Illustration 2.4 Source Document 5 - Cheque Stubs A cheque instrument (usually a piece of paper) that orders a payment of money. The person writing the cheque, the drawer, usually has a chequing account where their money was previously deposited. The drawer writes the various details including the money amount, date, and a payee on the cheque, and signs it, ordering their bank, known as the drawee, to pay this person or company the amount of money stated. (Source: Wikipedia) Introduction to Accounting Page | 41
  • 43. 1. drawee, the financial institution where the cheque can be presented for payment 2. payee 3. date of issue 4. amount of currency 5. drawer, the person or entity making the cheque 6. signature of drawer 7. Machine readable routing information Other Source Documents Below are some additional examples of source documents: 1. Petty Cash Vouchers – records of claims of small expenditures (Holdip and Lamorell 2010). 2. Time Cards – record of hours worked by employees (Holdip and Lamorell 2010). 3. Stock Cards – records of materials etc. Purchased (Holdip and Lamorell 2010). 4. Bank Statements – records of transactions with the bank (Holdip and Lamorell 2010). 5. Cash Bills/Invoices – given to customers and received from suppliers as proof of purchase. (Holdip and Lamorell 2010). BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY Now that you know what source documents are you can now move on to the books of original entry. The books of original entry consist of five Journals or Day Books and the Cash Book. 1. Sales Journal (Day Book) is used to record the credit sales of goods normally traded by the business. The information from the sales invoices is transferred to the sales day book. It is a list of all of your Accounts Receivables (Debtors). 2. Purchase Journal (Day Book) is used to record the credit purchases of goods normally traded by the business. The information from the purchases invoice is transferred to the purchases journal or day book. It is a list of the Accounts Payable (creditors). Introduction to Accounting Page | 42
  • 44. 3. Purchases Return Journal (Day Book) records all of the purchased returned to your suppliers. These may be returned for various reasons (wrong size, colour, damaged etc.). To indicated that goods were returned to the suppliers a debit note is used the information from the debit note is then transferred to the Purchased Return Day Book. 4. Sales Return Day Book records all your sales that have been returned to you by your customers. Your customer is issued a credit note to indicate what was returned and the allowance given for the return. This information is then transferred to the sales return day book. 5. The General Journal has several uses these include entries for the following opening entry - this is a list of assets, liabilities, and capital used to open a new set of accounting books the purchase and sale of fixed assets for cash and on credit writing-off bad debts the correction of errors the creation of provision for bad and doubtful debits the creation of provision for depreciation adjusting entries for accruals and prepayments closing entries unusual one-of-a-kind transactions 6. Cash Book records all the cash transactions of your business. This includes transactions paid for by cash or by cheque. It also records an allowance given or received as a cash discount. The journals generally contain the following columns: 1. Date - day, month, year 2. Details/Particulars - account titles 3. Folio - this is a reference code showing the ledger page to which the entry will be posted. 4. Amount - the net monetary amount shown invoice or other source on the document. Introduction to Accounting Page | 43
  • 45. Books of Original Entry Source Documents Types of Transactions Sales Journal Sales Invoice Credit sales of stock Purchases Journal Purchases Invoice Credit purchases of stock Purchases Return Debit Note Stock returned to suppliers Sales Return Credit Note Stock returned by customers General Journal Invoices, bills, vouchers All other types of transactions *Cash Book Receipts, bills, cheque All cash and bank transactions *Petty Cash Book Petty Cash Vouchers Small payments and receipts *These books/journals all have the same format or layout with the exception of the cash and petty cash book. Table 2.1 (Holdip and Lamorell 2010) Table 2.1 above shows the link between the books of original entry and the source documents. You can now have a further look at the links between the source documents and the books of original entry. PURCHASE ORDER AND PURCHASE INVOICE A purchase invoice is a document that is issued from a seller to a buyer. It is sent to the customer who has purchased a product or service. This can also be called a bill or a billing statement and it is generally a document that details the services that have been or will be provided (or the items purchased), quantity, price, and other details. By accepting an invoice, a buyer is basically making a contractual agreement to make the purchase. A purchase order is a document that is issued from a buyer to a seller. A buyer who is interested in making a purchase of products or services sends the document to the seller. A purchase order will also detail the services or the items to be ordered or purchased, including the quantity, price and other details. A purchase order also serves as a contractual agreement. The buyer is agreeing to make the purchase, and the seller, upon accepting the purchase order, is agreeing to provide the goods or services according to the specifics in the purchase order. After placing an order with the selected supplier, the supplier sends the purchasing firm a copy of the purchase invoice. This is then used to record the transaction in the Purchases Journal. The purchase invoice is then filed for future reference. The suppliers listed in the Purchases Journal are called creditors, because the business owes them money. Introduction to Accounting Page | 44
  • 46. SALES ORDER AND SALES INVOICE Sales orders indicate that the seller of the goods or services needs to take action (i.e., to complete the order). Usually this involves finding the product, packaging it, etc., or setting up a meeting so that services can be rendered. Sales Invoices indicate that buyer needs to take action. This typically means that the buyer needs to compensate the business monetarily for the products or services received. Sales Journal Folio Date Details No. Invoice No. Amount GENERAL JOURNAL The General Journal is one of the first books in which a transaction is recorded. In some cases, all transactions are first recorded in the General Journal. In larger firms, where other books or original entry are used, the General Journal is restricted to only recording specific kinds of transactions. The General Journal is used to record transactions which cannot be recorded in any other book of original entry, or unusual one -time transactions. The process of entering transaction in the General Journal is called journalising. The journals generally contain the following columns: 1. Date - day, month, year 2. Details/Particulars - account titles 3. Folio - this is a reference code showing the ledger page to which the entry will be posted. 4. Debit – the monetary amount to be debited is shown, 5. Credit - the monetary amount to be credited is shown. Introduction to Accounting Page | 45
  • 47. General Journal Date Details Folio No. Debit Credit 2006 $ $ Name of account to be debited Name of account to be credited Narrative A Narrative is a brief description of an entry in the journal. CASH BOOK There are often several cash accounts because they serve different purposes. The Cash in Bank account represents the checking account that processes deposits, checks and memorandum items. The Cash Short and Over account is used to record any variance by sales clerks. The Cash on Hand Fund is used to provide change to conduct business with customers. The Petty Cash Fund is used to pay for small items with cash. Each of these cash accounts needs to be strictly controlled to prevent mishandling. The cash book replaces the need to have a separate cash account and cash at bank account since they both merged to form the cash book. Cash Book Date Details Folio Discount Cash Bank Date Details Folio Discount Cash Bank 2006 $ $ $ 2006 $ $ $ WORKED EXAMPLE Let us now look at the source documents and books of original entry at work by examining the worked example. MJ Retailers started business on 1 September 2006 with the following assets and liabilities Cash $ 150 Bank $ 800 Motor Van $ 2 500 Loan from J Smith $ 1 500 Stock of Goods $ 1 200 Introduction to Accounting Page | 46
  • 48. He also had the following source documents: Purchase Invoices Your Purchase Order 12/B/124 AJ Wholesale Factory Road St. John's Antigua 7-Sep-06 To: MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's INVOICE NO. 1654 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 7 cases fruit juices 35.00 245.00 4 cases ideal milk 24.00 96.00 341.00 less 20% Trade Discount 68.20 272.80 7 September - Purchase goods on credit form AJ Wholesale $272.80 Your Purchase Order 12/B/123 A M Byden Fort Road St. John's Antigua 09-Sep-06 To: MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's INVOICE NO. 234 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 5 cases fruit juices 35.00 175.00 3 cases ideal milk 24.00 72.00 2 cases tomato paste 32.00 64.00 311.00 less 20% Trade Discount 62.20 248.80 9 September - Purchased goods on credit from A M Byden $248.80 Introduction to Accounting Page | 47
  • 49. Sales Invoices Your Sales Order 12/B/123 MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Antigua 25-Sep-06 To: Malika Diantha Green Bay St. John's INVOICE NO. 5324 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 6 cases fruit juices 36.50 219.00 3 cases ideal milk 23.95 71.85 4 cases tomato paste 33.00 132.00 422.85 25 September - Sold goods on credit to Malika Diantha $422.85 Your sales Order 12/B/124 MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Antigua 27-Sep-06 To: Oren Peters Pigotts St. John's INVOICE NO. 249 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 3 cases fruit juices 35.00 105.00 2 cases ideal milk 24.00 48.00 3 cases tomato paste 32.00 96.00 249.00 27 September - Sold goods on credit to Oren Peters $249.00 Introduction to Accounting Page | 48
  • 50. Debit Notes J Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Antigua 16-Sep-06 To: A.M Byden Fort Road St. John's DEBIT NOTE NO. 236 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 2 cases fruit juices 35.00 70.00 1 case ideal milk 24.00 24.00 94.00 7 September - MJ Retailers returned goods to AM Byden $94 J Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Antigua 16-Sep-06 To: AJ Wholesale Long Street St. John's DEBIT NOTE NO. 237 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 1 cases fruit juices 35.00 35.00 1 case ideal milk 24.00 24.00 59.00 25 September - MJ Retailers returned goods to AJ Wholesale $59 Introduction to Accounting Page | 49
  • 51. Credit Notes MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Antigua 23-Sep-06 To: Malika Diantha Green Bay St. John's CREDIT NOTE NO. 1235 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 2 case ideal milk 24.00 48.00 1 case tomato paste 32.00 32.00 80.00 Less 10 % trade discount 8.00 72.00 23 September - A customer Malika Diantha returned goods to MJ Retailers $72.00 MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John's Antigua 29-Sep-06 To: Oren Peters Pigotts St. John's CREDIT NOTE NO. 1236 Quantity Per Unit Total $ $ 3 cases fruit juices 35.00 105.00 2 case ideal milk 24.00 48.00 153.00 Less 10 % trade discount 15.30 137.70 29 September - Oren Peters returned goods $137.70 to MJ Retailers Introduction to Accounting Page | 50
  • 52. Cash Receipt Number 00125 Date 21 Sept 2006 Cash Sales Receipt Name ___________Makayla Adora______________________ Address _____________12 Old Road_______________________ _______________Urlings__________________________ Sold By Cash C.O.D Charge On Account Paid Out Quantity Description Price Amount 2 Cases milk 24.00 48.00 Subtotal 48.00 Received by Tax __________________________ Total 48.00 21 September - Cash Sales $48 Number 00105 Date 30 Sept 2006 Cash Sales Receipt Name ___________Prosper Thomas______________________ Address ___________10 anchorage Road __________________ _____________Point Edge________________________ Sold By Cash C.O.D Charge On Account Paid Out Quantity Description Price Amount 3 Cases milk 24.00 72.00 1 Cases Tomato Paste 32.00 32.00 Subtotal 104.00 Received by Tax __________________________ Total 104.00 30 September - Cash Sales $104 Introduction to Accounting Page | 51
  • 53. Cheques Dollar Bank High Street St. John’s Antigua Date 25 September 2006 PAY A M Byden $ 100.00 One Hundred MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John’s Antigua MJohn . O00-0009-00987-0124 25 September - Paid A M Byden $100 by cheque Dollar Bank High Street St. John’s Antigua Date 27 September 2006 PAY AJ Wholesale $ 75.00 Seventy-Five . MJ Retailers Hilda Davis Drive St. John’s Antigua MJohn . O00-0009-00987-0125 27 September - Paid AJ Wholesale $75 by cheque. Record the above source documents in the Books of Original Entry for MJ Retailers. General Journal Introduction to Accounting Page | 52
  • 54. Let us begin with the General Journal. Remember that one of uses of the General Journal is to record opening entries of the business. The opening entries for MJ Retailers are recorded in the Journal below General Journal Date Details Folio No. Debit Credit 2006 $ $ 1Sept Cash CB 150.00 Bank CB 800.00 Motor Van GL 2 500.00 Loan: J Smith PL 1 500.00 Equipment GL 1 200.00 *Capital GL 3 150.00 Assets and Liabilities as at 1 Sept 2006 4 650.00 4 650.00 *The capital figure is calculated by using the accounting equation. The figures in this general journal will be transferred as the opening balances in the respective accounts in the ledgers. Sales Journal The Sales Journal records the information from the sales invoice. It is a list of our customers who purchase our goods and services on credit. The total of the sales journal is transferred to the sales account in the general ledger. Sales Journal Folio Date Details No. Invoice No. Amount 2006 $ Sept 25 Malika Diantha SL 5324 422.85 Sept 27 Oren Peters SL 249 249.00 Total Credit Sales for the month GL 671.85 Introduction to Accounting Page | 53
  • 55. Purchase Journal The Purchases Journal is used to record all stock or inventory purchased on credit for resale. It lists our suppliers we purchase goods and services from on credit. The total of the purchases journal is transferred to the purchases account in the general ledger. Purchases Journal Date Details Folio No. Invoice No. Amount 2006 $ Sept 7 AJ Wholesale 1654 272.80 Sept 9 A M Byden 234 248.80 Total Credit Purchases for the month 521.60 Sales Return Journal Information from your credit notes is recorded in your sales return journal. The total of this journal is then transferred to the sales return account in the general ledger. Sales Return Journal Date Details Folio No. Note No. Amount 2006 $ Sept 23 Malika Diantha SL 1235 72.00 Sept 29 Oren Peters SL 1236 137.70 Total Sales Return GL 209.70 Introduction to Accounting Page | 54
  • 56. Purchases Return Journal The debit note information is recorded in the purchases return journal and the total is transferred to the purchases return account in the general ledger. Purchase Return Journal Date Details Folio No. Note No. Amount $ Sept 17 A M Byden PL 236 94.00 Sept 25 AJ Wholesale PL 237 59.00 Total Purchases Returns GL 153.00 Cash Book The Cash Book is special in a number of ways: 1. All cash and bank transactions are recorded in the cash book. 2. Entries are made in the cash book on almost a daily basis and therefore these entries are similar to journal entries. 3. The cash book acts as a book of original entry or journal and is also part of the double entry system. 4. The cash book has its own particular format, which is a columnar T-Account format. 5. Cash discounts allowed and received are recorded in the cash book put posted to accounts in the general ledger. 6. The cash book is used strictly for transactions that involve the immediate transfer of cash, which makes it easier to track the inflows and outflows of cash. The Cash Book is written up from information provided by several source documents, which include Cash bills and receipts cheques cash vouchers credit and debit card receipts Introduction to Accounting Page | 55
  • 57. Bank Statement Cash Book Date Details Folio Discount Cash Bank Date Details Folio Discount Cash Bank 2006 $ $ $ 2006 $ $ $ 01 Sept Balance b/d 150.00 800.00 25 Sept A M Byden 100.00 21 Sept Sales 48.00 27 Sept AJ Wholesale 75.00 30 Sept Sales 104.00 TOPIC SUMMARY In this topic, you studied source documents and the information contained and also the books of original entry their content and uses. You learned to identify different source documents and transfer the information from these source documents to the relevant books of original entry. Introduction to Accounting Page | 56
  • 58. UNIT ASSIGNMENT Unit 2 Assignment A A sole trader has the following opening balances at the beginning of November 2008 $ Motor Van 1 500 Bank 2 910 Cash 2 600 Premises 2 000 Fixtures 600 Stock 1 289 Debtors: H. Woods 120 J Benjamin 40 H Ross 180 Creditors: A. Jackson 200 L Luke 60 Loan: R. Richardson 4 000 During the month of September the following transactions occurred. Nov 1 Receipt for rent paid by Cheque $15 2 Bought good on credit from A. Jackson $20, L Luke $38, C Harris $56, F. Walker $69 3 Paid motor expenses in cash $13 4 Antigua Commercial Bank Deposit slip for $1000 5 Sold good on credit to J Benjamin $56, H. Ross $78, A Lewis $98, J Jacobs $118 6 Good returned to A. Jackson $15, F. Walker $12 7 Paid staff by cheque $150 8 Bought a motor van on credit from Hadeed Motors $500 9 Goods returned to us by A Lewis $14 10 Sales Invoices A Lewis $25, J Benjamin $15 11 Credit notes: J Benjamin $10, J Jacobs $25 15 Debit note C Harris $10 16 Repaid R Richardson $175 by cheque 18 Cash Sales $250 19 Purchase goods by cheque $300 receiving a 5% cash discount 20 Receipt for rent paid by cheque $100 21 Antigua Commercial Bank deposit slip for $500 22 Paid carriage $218 by cash 23 H. Ross paid us in cash $150 receiving a 2% cash discount 24 The proprietor brought equipment $600 from his personal money for the business. 25 Cash Sales $ 300 Prepare the relevant books of original entry from the transactions of MMR Retail Store for the month ended 30 November 2008. Introduction to Accounting Page | 57
  • 59. TOPIC 2.2 RECORDING BUSINESS FINANCIAL TRANSACTIONS INTRODUCTION In this topic, we will examine how to identify business transactions and how to record the transactions in the financial records of your business. The raw data of accounting are the business transactions. We learned how to record the transactions in Unit One, based on the increases or decreases in the assets, liabilities, and owners' equity items of the accounting equation. This procedure illustrated how various transactions affect the accounting equation. When working through the sample transactions, you should have noted that listing all transactions as increases or decreases in the balance sheet would be too cumbersome in practice. Most businesses, even small ones, enter into many transactions every day. Unit Two will demonstrate how to actually record business transactions in the accounting process. We will learn how to post the information from the journal to the ledgers. The ledger will then be balanced and a Trial Balance extracted. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Identify business transactions. 2. Record transactions in a double entry set of books. 3. Define an account. 4. State the steps in the recording business transactions. 5. Identify the effects of business transactions. 6. Identify the information to transfer to the different ledgers. 7. Record merchandising transactions in the ledgers. 8. Record accounts receivable and accounts payable transactions. 9. Record transactions for assets, liabilities and owners’ equity. BUSINESS TRANSACTIONS To explain the dual procedure of recording business transactions with debits and credits, you need to understand how to use the following new tools: the T-account, the journal, and the ledger. Using these tools, you can follow your business through its various business transactions. Like accountants, you can use a trial balance to check the equality of your recorded debits and credits. Understanding this system enables you to better understand the content of financial statements so you can use the information provided to make informed business decisions. Introduction to Accounting Page | 58
  • 60. THE ACCOUNT AND RULES OF DEBIT AND CREDIT A business may engage in thousands of transactions during a year. An accountant classifies and summarizes the data in these transactions to create useful information. Business transactions are measurable events that affect the financial condition of a business. Illustration 2.1 – The Steps in Recording and Posting the Effects of a Business Transaction Look at illustration 2.1 and observe the steps in recording and posting the effects of a business transaction. Note that source documents provide the evidence that a business transaction occurred. These source documents include such items as bills received from suppliers for goods or services received, bills sent to customers for goods sold or services performed and cash register tapes. The information in the source document serves as the basis for preparing a journal entry. Then a firm posts (transfers) that information to accounts in the ledger. You can see from the illustration that after you prepare the journal entry, you post it to the accounts in the ledger. However, before you can record a journal entry, you must understand the rules of debit and credit. To understand these rules, you must first understand the nature of an account. Most business transactions are repetitive. This makes the task of accountants somewhat easier because they can classify the transactions into groups having common characteristics. For example, a business may have thousands of receipts or payments of cash during a year. Part of every cash transaction must be recorded and summarized in a single place called an account. AN ACCOUNT An account is a part of the accounting system used to classify and summarize the increases, decreases, and balances of each asset, liability, owners' equity, revenue, and expense items. Businesses set up accounts for each different business element, such as cash, accounts receivable, and accounts payable. Every business has a Cash account in its accounting system because knowledge of the amount of cash on hand is useful information. Accountants may differ on the account title (or name) they give the same item. For example, one might name an account Notes Payable and another might call it Loans Introduction to Accounting Page | 59
  • 61. Payable. Both account titles refer to the amounts borrowed by the business. The account title should be logical to help the accountant group similar transactions into the same account. Once you give an account a title, you must use that same title throughout the accounting records. The number of accounts in a business's accounting system depends on the information needs by those interested in the business. The main requirement is that each account provides information useful in making decisions. Thus, one account may be set up for all cash rather than having a separate account for each form of cash (coins on hand, currency on hand, and deposits in banks). The amount of cash is useful information; the form of cash often is not. To illustrate recording the increases and decreases in an account, texts use the T-account, which looks like a capital letter T. The name of the account, such as Cash, appears across the top of the T. We record increases on one side of the vertical line of the T and decreases on the other side. A T-account appears as follows: Debit (Dr) Cash Credit (Cr) Dr Cash Cr Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount o D o o Date - day, month, year. o Details – account titles are written here. o Folio - this is a reference column showing the journal page to which each entry is transferred from. o Amount - the monetary amount is shown. Accountants use the term debit instead of saying, "Place an entry on the left side of the T- account". They use the term credit for "Place an entry on the right side of the T-account". Debit (abbreviated Dr) simply means left side; credit (abbreviated Cr) means right side. Thus, for all accounts a debit entry is an entry on the left side, while a credit entry is an entry on the right side. After recognizing a business event as a business transaction, you must analyse it to determine if it is an increase or decrease effect on the assets, liabilities owners’ equity Introduction to Accounting Page | 60
  • 62. items, revenues, or expenses of the business. Then you must translate these increase or decrease effects into debits and credits. The accounting requirement that each transaction be recorded by an entry that has equal debits and credits is called double-entry procedure, or duality. This double-entry procedure keeps the accounting equation in balance. The dual recording process produces two sets of accounts—those with debit balances and those with credit balances. The totals of these two groups of accounts must be equal. Then, some assurance exists that the arithmetic part of the transaction recording process has been properly carried out. Below is an example of how to record business transactions in T-accounts using debits and credits. While recording business transactions, remember that the foundation of the accounting process is the following basic accounting equation: Assets = Liabilities + Owners’ Equity Recording transactions into the T-accounts is easier when you focus on the equal sign in the accounting equation. Assets, which are on the left of the equal sign, increase on the left side of the T-accounts. Liabilities and owners' equity, to the right of the equal sign, increase on the right side of the T-accounts. Remember the left side of the T-account is the debit side and the right side is the credit side. So you should be able to fill in the rest of the rules of increases and decreases by deduction, such as: Dr Assets Cr Increase Decrease Examples of Asset Accounts – Motor Vehicle Expenses, Equipment, Building, Goodwill, Copyrights, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Stock of Goods, Cash in Bank. Dr Liabilities Cr Decrease Increase Examples of Liability Accounts – Accounts Payable, Notes Payable or Loans, Mortgage. Dr Owners’ Equity Cr Decrease Increase Dr Revenue Amounts Cr Decrease Increase Introduction to Accounting Page | 61
  • 63. Examples of Revenue Accounts – Discount Received, Commission Received, Interest Received and Rent Received. Dr Expense Accounts Cr Increase Decrease Examples of Expense Accounts – Rent Payable, Salaries and Wages, Commission Payable, Interest Payable, Discount Allowed. To summarize: Assets increase by debits (left side) to the T-account and decrease by credits (right side) to the T-account. Liabilities and owners' equity decrease by debits (left side) to the T-account and increase by credits (right side) to the T-account. Owners’ equity decrease by debits and increase by credits Record increases in revenues on the right (credit) side of the T-account and decreases on the left (debit) side. The reasoning behind this rule is that revenues increase retained earnings, and increases in retained earnings are recorded on the right side. Record increases in expenses on the left (debit) side of the T-account and decreases on the right (credit) side. The reasoning behind this rule is that expenses decrease retained earnings, and decreases in retained earnings are recorded on the left side. Applying these two rules keeps the accounting equation in balance. Now we apply the debit and credit rules for assets, liabilities, and owners' equity to business transactions. REMEMBER EVERY BUSINESS TRANSACTION SHOULD HAVE A DEBIT AND CREDIT ENTRY IN THE ACCOUNTS. Let’s record a list of transactions for ORE Retail for the month of February 2011 in their various accounts. Dr Owners’ Equity CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 1 Cash CB 15, 000 Introduction to Accounting Page | 62
  • 64. 1 Feb - Started business with $15, 000 in cash o Debit Cash Account o Credit Owners’ Equity Account (Capital Account) Dr Cash CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 1 Owners’ Equity GL 15, 000 The money invested to start a business is recorded in the Owners’ Equity Account. This will need an increase in that account and also an increase in the cash account. To increase the Cash (which is an asset account) you debit that account as illustrated above. To increase the owners’ equity account you credit that account. Feb 4 Bought a Motor Vehicle paying by cash $2,000 o Debit Motor Vehicle Account o Credit Cash Account Dr Motor Vehicle CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 4 Cash CB 2, 000 Dr Cash CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 1 Owners’ Equity GL 15, 000 Feb 4 Motor Vehicle GL 2,000 Because you have taken $2,000 out of your cash account to pay for the Motor Vehicle your cash amount has decreased. This is indicated by a credit entry in your cash account. By purchasing that motor vehicle you have increase your motor vehicle account. This is done by a debit entry in the Motor Vehicle accounts. Both the motor vehicle and the cash accounts are asset accounts. Introduction to Accounting Page | 63
  • 65. Feb 8 Deposited $5, 000 of the cash into a bank account o Debit Cash at Bank Account o Credit Cash Account Dr Cash at Bank CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 8 Cash CB 5, 000 Dr Cash CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 1 Owners’ Equity GL 15, 000 Feb 4 Motor Vehicle GL 2,000 Y Feb 8 Cash at Bank CB 5,000 o u r Cash Account is being further reduced by taking some of the cash in that account and depositing it into the cash at bank account, which is now being increased. Feb 12 He paid his supplier Bargain Wholesale owed $1200 by cheque. o Debit Bargain Wholesale Account o Credit Cash at Bank Account Dr Cash at Bank CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 8 Cash CB 5, 000 Feb 12 Bargain Wholesale PL 1,200 Dr Bargain Wholesale CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 12 Cash at Bank CB 1,200 Bargain wholesale is a supplier that you owed money that makes it a liability to you. Because you are paying them the liability is decreasing, therefore, a debit entry is needed in bargain wholesale account and a credit entry in the cash at bank account to reflect the payment being made from your cash at bank account by cheque. Introduction to Accounting Page | 64
  • 66. Feb 15 Paid rent $500 by cash o Debit Rent Account o Credit Cash Account Dr Rent CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 15 Cash CB 500 Dr Cash CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 1 Owners’ Equity GL 15, 000 Feb 4 Motor Vehicle GL 2,000 Feb 8 Cash at Bank CB 5,000 Feb 15 Rent GL 500 Rent is an expense account, which should be debited to indicate that the expense has been paid. Your cash account is credited to indicate that funds were taken from the cash account to pay the rent. Feb 20 Received $150 interest on you cash at bank account o Debit Cash at Bank Account o Credit Interest Received Account Dr Cash at Bank CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 8 Cash CB 5, 000 Feb 12 Bargain Wholesale PL 1,200 Feb 20 Interest Received GL 150 Dr Interest Received CR Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ Feb 12 Cash at Bank CB 1,200 Feb 20 Cash at Bank CB 150 Interest Received is additional revenue received from your bank as an incentive for doing business with them. This account should be credited to indicate the receipt of the additional amount. Your cash at bank account is also increased by an additional $150 indicated by the entry in the account. Introduction to Accounting Page | 65
  • 67. TYPES OF LEDGERS The information in the various Journals is transferred to the ledgers. There are three types of ledgers. 1. Sales Ledger In the sales ledger are the individual accounts of your Accounts Receivable (Debtors). The information in these accounts are derived from the Sales Journal and the Sales Return Journal 2. Purchases Ledger The individual accounts of your Accounts Payable (Creditors). The information in the Purchase Journal or Purchases Return Journal is transferred to this Ledger. 3. General Ledger All other accounts not recorded in the Sales or Purchase Ledger is recorded in the General Ledger. MERCHANDISING TRANSACTIONS Merchandising Transactions requires that you understand how to record the asset of stock. The asset of stock is recorded in four different accounts. These accounts are purchases, sales, sales return and purchases accounts. Let us first look at a definition for these terms and then the use of the accounts. Purchases, in the accounting sense, are only those items of merchandise inventory that a firm buys to resell to customers in the normal course of business. Purchases Return – Merchandise purchased for resale would not always be as what the buyer expects. In this regard, buyers can return goods purchased due to a lot of reasons, for example, due to defects, wrong specifications, poor quality, etc. When merchandise bought is returned, or an allowance is requested, the buyer informs the seller in writing. The communication is done usually through the buyer’s printed business form called debit note. Sales, on the other hand, represent the selling price of merchandise previously bought and then sold. In the income statement, Sales is shown as an income item from which the cost of goods sold (consisting of merchandise inventory beginning and end and net cost of purchases), was deducted, the difference being the gross profit. Sales Return - When the customer returns goods to the seller or requests for a deduction from the price of the goods delivered to him, the seller accepts the return or grants the request through a credit note. Introduction to Accounting Page | 66
  • 68. The sale of merchandise may be for cash or on account. An invoice supports every sale. The seller’s sales invoice is the buyer’s purchase invoice. When a sale is for cash, the seller receives money in return for his merchandise. When the sale is made on credit, the seller acquires a receivable or right to collect from the buyer. The uses of the merchandising accounts are: 1. Sales Account – Sales of merchandise are recorded in this account at selling prices. This is a temporary or nominal account representing income from selling of merchandise. This account has a normal credit balance. 2. Purchases Account – This is a temporary account to which the cost of goods bought during the period is debited. This account usually has a debit balance at the end of the accounting period. 3. Sales Return Account – This account is debited for all the merchandise returned by customers. The debit entry is at the original selling price of the merchandise. This account is also being used for all goods delivered to customers but is found to be defective or not as ordered and still the buyer desiring to retain the goods as is. The customer in this case is normally permitted to deduct a certain amount from the selling prices of the goods delivered. 4. Purchases Return Account – Goods bought and returned to supplier, or goods bought and received as defective, or not as ordered, when not returned to the supplier but is subjected to a certain reductions from their acquisition prices. These deductions and returns of purchased goods are credited to this account. Purchase returns and allowances account is a deduction from the Purchases account. These accounts were briefly looked at above but let us now have a further look at these accounts as we take into account the double entries needed to record both credit and cash transactions in these accounts. Purchases Transactions Accounting Entries Used to Record the Purchase and Payment of Goods 1) When goods are purchased with cash, the following entry is necessary: o Debit Purchases o Credit Cash 2) When goods are purchased on credit, the following entry is necessary: o Debit Purchases o Credit Accounts Payable Introduction to Accounting Page | 67
  • 69. 3) When goods are purchased on credit, but are paid back early due to a cash discount incentive, the following entry is necessary. o Debit Accounts Payable o Credit Cash o Credit Purchases Discount (discount received). Purchases Discounts (Discount Received) A seller will often offer a cash discount to the buyer for an early payment. Credit terms are the conditions for the payment agreed upon by the buyer and the seller. Cash discounts are stated in a fractional form with the percentage of discount in the numerator and the number of days in the denominator. The credit period, or number of days a buyer can pay without incurring a finance charge, is stated in NET days or n/days. Example Terms 3/15, n/60 means a buyer will receive a 3% cash discount if paid within 15 days of the invoice date, and the buyer has a maximum of 60 days to pay the entire debt amount. Purchases Returns Rules For Recording Returns For Goods Purchased On Credit 1) If merchandise is returned or a price adjustment is necessary, the buyer should. o Debit Accounts Payable o Credit Purchases Returns account 2) When the returned goods were purchased on credit, and a cash discount for early payment is available, the discount only applies to the price of the goods that are kept, (in addition, discounts are not taken on freight costs). SALES ACCOUNTING When goods are sold for cash or on credit, the Sales account should be credited. To encourage early payment of goods purchased on credit, the seller will often offer a cash discount. These discounts are recorded in the Sales Discounts Account (Discount Allowed). When goods are returned or an allowance is requested, the adjustment is made to the Sales Returns account. All sales discounts, returns, and allowances reduce sales revenues. Sales Accounting - Rules for Recording Sales Transactions 1) When goods are sold and payment is made in cash. o Debit Cash o Credit Sales Introduction to Accounting Page | 68
  • 70. 2) When goods are sold on credit. o Debit Accounts Receivable o Credit Sales Sales Accounting - Recording Sales Discounts 3) When a buyer takes advantage of a cash discount. o Debit Cash o Debit Sales Discount (Discount Allowed) o Credit Accounts Receivable Example Invoice for $950 with terms 3/15, n/30 is paid early by the buyer. o Debit Cash $921.50 o Debit Sales Discount $28.50 o Credit Accounts Receivable $950 SALES ACCOUNTING - RECORDING SALES RETURNS When a seller grants a return or an allowance, o Debit Sales Returns o Credit Accounts Receivable A buyer of goods can only take a cash discount on the goods that are actually kept (cash discounts do not apply to freight either). Example A seller issues a credit note for $70 of goods that were not ordered by ABC company. If the return is granted, the following entry is necessary. Debit Sales Returns $70 Credit Accounts Receivable ABC company $70 SALES ACCOUNTING Manufacturers and wholesalers often reduce catalogue list prices by allowing trade (or quantity) discounts. The discounts vary depending on customer and order size. Trade discounts permit flexible prices without having to print new catalogues. Trade discounts are Introduction to Accounting Page | 69
  • 71. not reflected in accounting records, only the agreed upon price between a buyer and seller is recorded. TRANSPORTATION COSTS Whenever goods are sold, the buyer and the seller must agree upon who pays shipping costs. When goods are shipped FOB shipping point, the buyer agrees to pay for shipping costs and ownership passes to the buyer when the merchandise is delivered to the shipper. When goods are shipped FOB destination, the seller agrees to pay for transportation costs and ownership of goods passes to the buyer when the goods are delivered. ACTIVITY 2 - A A Local Book Shop ordered 600 copies of an introductory accounting textbook from a publisher on March 21, 2011. The books were delivered on September 12, at which time a bill was sent requesting payment of $60 per book. However, a 5% discount was allowed if the publisher received payment by October 15. Local Book Shop sent the proper payment, which was received by the Publisher on October 10. On December 18, Local Book Shop returned 60 books to the publisher for a full cash refund. 1. Prepare the journal entries (if any) for the publisher on a. March 21 b. September 12 c. October 10 d. December 18. Include appropriate narratives. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE AND ACCOUNTS PAYABLE These accounts deal with our debtors (customer who we sell our goods and service to on credit) and our creditors (suppliers we purchase our goods and services from on credit). The list of your accounts receivables account are recorded in your Sales Ledger and Accounts Payable accounts in your Purchases Ledger Let us now continue with our worked example from Topic 2.1 above. You now need to transfer the information in the various journals to the different ledgers and accounts. Begin with the Sales and Sales Return Journals. The information included in these two journals is transferred to the respective accounts in the sales ledger with the totals transferred to the general ledger. Introduction to Accounting Page | 70
  • 72. Sales Journal Folio Date Details No. Invoice No. Amount 2006 $ Sept 25 Malika Diantha SL 5324 422.85 Sept 27 Oren Peters SL 249 249.00 Total Credit Sales for the month GL 671.85 Sales Return Journal Date Details Folio No. Note No. Amount 2006 $ Sept 23 Malika Diantha SL 1235 72.00 Sept 29 Oren Peters SL 1236 137.70 Total Sales Return GL 209.70 Sales Ledger Oren Peters Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 27 Sales SJ 249.99 Sept 29 Sales Returns SRJ 137.70 Malika Diantha Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 25 Sales SJ 422.85 Sept 23 Sales Return SRJ 72.00 Introduction to Accounting Page | 71
  • 73. Purchases Journal Date Details Folio No. Invoice No. Amount 2006 $ Sept 7 AJ Wholesale 1654 272.80 Sept 9 A M Byden 234 248.80 Total Credit Purchases for the month 521.60 Purchase Return Journal Date Details Folio No. Note No. Amount $ Sept 17 A M Byden PL 236 94.00 Sept 25 AJ Wholesale PL 237 59.00 Total Purchases Returns GL 153.00 Purchases Ledger A.M. Bryden Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 17 Purchases Return PRJ 59.00 Sept 9 Purchases PJ 248.80 Sept 25 Bank CB 100.00 AJ Wholesale Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 25 Purchases Return PRJ 94.00 Sept 7 Purchases PJ 272.80 Sept 27 Bank CB 75.00 J Smith Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 1 Balance b/d 1 500.00 Introduction to Accounting Page | 72
  • 74. General Journal Date Details Folio No. Debit Credit 2006 $ $ 1 Sept Cash CB 150.00 Bank CB 800.00 Motor Van GL 2 500.00 Loan: J Smith PL 1 500.00 Equipment GL 1 200.00 *Capital GL 3 150.00 Assets and Liabilities as at 1 Sept 2006 4 650.00 4 650.00 General Ledger Motor Van Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 1 Balance b/d 2 500.00 Capital Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 1 Balance b/d 3 150.00 Equipment Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 1 Balance b/d 1 200.00 Sales Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 21 Cash CB 48.00 Sept 30 Cash CB 104.00 Sept 30 Total Credit Sales SJ 671.85 Purchases Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Total Credit Sept 30 Purchases PJ 521.60 Introduction to Accounting Page | 73
  • 75. Sales Return Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 30 Total Returns SRJ 209.70 Purchases Return Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 30 Total Returns PRJ 153.00 Cash Book Date Details Folio Discount Cash Bank Date Details Folio Discount Cash Bank 2006 $ $ $ 2006 $ $ $ Sept 1 Balance b/d 150.00 800.00 Sept 25 AM Byden PL 100.00 Sept 21 Sales SL 48.00 Sept 27 AJ Wholesale PL 75.00 Sept 30 Sales SL 104.00 Introduction to Accounting Page | 74
  • 76. UNIT ASSIGNMENT Unit 2 Assignment B Using your answers from Unit 2 Assignment A, prepare the double entry accounts for MMR Retail Store for the month of November 2008. TOPIC SUMMARY You would have observed from the examples given in this unit that the accounts on the balance sheet are affected by business transactions. In this unit we looked at the entries required to record different business transaction in a business. You would have learnt that every transaction affects two accounts one account is debited and the other credited. You would have also looked at the necessary entries needed to increase and decrease each type of account. We have completed the double entry recording of different types of accounts and transactions. We can now continue by balance off these accounts to determine the balance on the accounts to be transferred to the trial balance. Introduction to Accounting Page | 75
  • 77. TOPIC 2.3 BALANCING OFF ACCOUNTS INTRODUCTION We will now continue from where we left off in topic 2.2. In order for us to generate a trial balance we first need to balance off the ledger accounts. Balancing the accounts simply means that both the debit and credit side of each account should be equal. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. State what balancing off means. 2. list the steps of balancing off an account. 3. identify what figures are transferred to the income statement and the balance sheet. BALANCING THE BOOKS At the end of the financial accounting period a business must balance its books – the first step to summarizing and analyzing the financial position and income of the business. You have identified two sides of a ledger – a debit and a credit. All of your debit entries must equal your credit entries. You must balance off an account by taking a figure to the financial statements. All ledger accounts must be balances at the end of a period. Revenue and expense accounts do not have a brought down balance, since they are closed off and the figure transferred to the income statement. Other types of accounts use a balance brought down in order to determine the opening balance of the account in the subsequent trading period. Steps to balancing off the accounts 1. Calculate the total of both side of the account (one side in the case of revenue and expense accounts. 2. The larger of the two totals are place in the total boxes on both side of the account (debit and credit totals). If the debit total is greater than the credit total then the account has a debit balance and vice versa for the credit balance. 3. You balance your account by introducing your balancing figure (which the difference between the largest and smaller figure) on the side the smallest amount. This figure should be your balance carried down at the end of the period and would be brought down at the start of the next period. The balances carried down figures are those that affect the balance sheet. 4. You bring down the balancing figure by going to the opposite side of the account and detailing the balance brought down, which is the same figure as the balance carried down figure. The balancing figure appears before the total boxes while the brought down figure appear under the total boxes on the opposite side to that of the balancing figure. Introduction to Accounting Page | 76
  • 78. 5. For revenue and expense accounts the difference between both sides of the account is the figure to be transferred to the income statement. Balance sheet accounts have balancing figures, but revenue and expenses account do not. This is because the figures for revenue, expenses and drawing, when they are aggregated and offset in the income statement, to adjust the capital accounts. As such, the balances of those accounts appear in the capital account in the following period and do not just disappear in the next accounting period. Now let’s balance off the accounts in unit 2.2 Sales Ledger Oren Peters Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 25 Sales SJ 249.00 29-Sep Sales Returns SRJ 137.70 30-Sep Balance c/d 111.30 249.00 249.00 1-Oct Balance b/d 111.30 Malika Diantha Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Sept 30 Sales SJ 422.85 23-Sep Sales Return SRL 72.00 30-Sep Balance c/d 350.85 422.85 422.85 1-Oct Balance b/d 350.85 Purchases Ledger A.M. Bryden Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 25-Sep Bank CB 100.00 9-Sep Purchases PJ 248.80 26-Sep Purchases Return PRJ 59.00 30-Sep Balance c/d 89.80 148.80 248.80 1-Oct Balance b/d 89.80 Introduction to Accounting Page | 77
  • 79. AJ Wholesale Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 17-Sep Purchases Return PRJ 94.00 7-Sep Purchases PJ 272.80 27-Sep Bank CB 75.00 30-Sep Balance c/d 103.80 272.80 272.80 1-Oct Balance b/d 103.80 J Smith Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 30-Sep Balance c/d 1 500.00 1-Sep Balance b/d 1 500.00 1-Oct Balance b/d 1 500.00 General Ledger Sales Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 21-Sep Cash CB 48.00 30-Sep cash CB 104.00 30-Sep Income Statement 823.85 30-Sep Total Credit Sales SJ 671.85 823.85 823.85 1-Oct Balance b/d 823.85 Purchases Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ Total Credit 30-Sep PJ 521.60 30-Sep Income Statement 521.60 Purchases 1-Oct Balance b/d 521.60 Sales Return Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 30-Sep Total Returns SRJ 209.70 30-Sep Income Statement 209.70 1-Oct Balance 209.70 Introduction to Accounting Page | 78
  • 80. Purchases Return Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 30-Sep Income Statement 153.00 Sept 30 Total Returns PRJ 153.00 1-Oct Balance 153.00 Motor Van Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 2 1-Sep Balance b/d 2 500.00 30-Sep Balance c/d 500.00 1-Oct Balance b/d 2 500.00 Equipment Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 1 1-Sep Balance b/d 1 200.00 30-Sep Balance c/d 200.00 1-Oct Balance b/d 1 200.00 Capital Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2006 $ 2006 $ 3 30-Sep Balance c/d 3 150.00 1-Sep Balance b/d 150.00 3 1-Oct Balance b/d 150.00 Cash Book Date Details Folio Discount Cash Bank Date Details Folio Discount Cash Bank 2006 $ $ $ 2006 $ $ $ 1-Sep Balance b/d 150.00 800.00 25-Sep AM Byden PL 100.00 21-Sep Sales Gl 48.00 27-Sep AJ Wholesale PL 75.00 30-Sep Sales GL 104.00 30-Sep Balance c/d 302.00 625.00 302.00 800.00 302.00 800.00 1-Oct Balance b/d 302.00 625.00 Introduction to Accounting Page | 79
  • 81. Take note that at the end of the month those accounts with balances to be transferred to the Income Statement use the word income statement instead of balance c/d. UNIT ASSIGNMENT Unit 2 Assignment C Let us continue the unit 2 assignment from topic 2.1 and 2.2. You have recorded the transactions in the books and original entry and post them to the various ledgers. You now need to balance off those ledger accounts. TOPIC SUMMARY You are doing well. You have balance off your accounts in the various ledgers. With this information you can now prepare your trial balance. You will also be able to determine which final account the balances will be transferred. Introduction to Accounting Page | 80
  • 82. TOPIC 2.4 TRIAL BALANCE INTRODUCTION Now that we have balanced off our accounts we are now ready to prepare our trial balance. This will be prepared from the balances on the ledger accounts. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this unit you should be able to: 1. Define trial balance. 2. State the uses of the trial balance. DEFINITION OF TRIAL BALANCE A Trial Balance is an essential stage in ensuring the accuracy of the book-keeping entries prior to the preparation of the financial statements. The trial balance lists the name of each account together with the balance shown in either the debit or credit columns. (Wood and Robinson, 2007) It is a list of the account balances in your records. You can extract your trial balance from the balances on your ledger accounts. Before you prepare your trial balance let us look at the uses of the trial balance. USE OF THE TRIAL BALANCE According to Wood and Robinson (2007) Trial Balances may be used: To check that the books ‘balance’, i.e. every debit entry has been accompanied by a credit entry. To ascertain the net amount of the error(s), should an error(s) have been made. As a basis from which the financial statement are prepared. The trial balance is used to check the arithmetically balance of our accounts. The trial balance has two monetary columns a debit and credit column. You would have seen in your ledger account that some balance b/d are on the debit side of the account and others are on the credit side. When you are transferring the balances from the ledger accounts to the trial balance the balances remain on the same side as the ledger accounts. Below is the Trial Balance from the examples in this unit. Take note that it should have the following: 1. Heading that states the name of the business, the words Trial Balance as at (the date the trial balance is being prepared). 2. A details column for the name of the accounts 3. Folio column indicating the reference information 4. A debit and credit monetary column Introduction to Accounting Page | 81
  • 83. MJ Retailers Trial Balance as at 30th September 2006 Dr. Cr. $ $ Accounts Receivable Oren Peters SL 111.30 Malika Diantha SL 350.85 Accounts Payable A.M. Bryden PL 89.80 AJ Wholesale PL 103.80 J Smith PL 1,500.00 Sales GL 823.85 Purchases GL 521.60 Sales Return GL 209.70 Purchases Return GL 153.00 Cash CB 302.00 Equipment GL 1,200.00 Motor Van GL 2,500.00 Capital GL 3,150.00 Bank CB 625.00 5,820.45 5,820.45 Take not that both columns of your trial balance are equal. The information is recorded on the same side as the balances b/d in the ledger accounts. If your trial balance included expenses and revenue your expenses would be recorded in the debit column and revenue in the credit column. TOPIC SUMMARY Upon completion of this topic you should be able to balance your accounts. In addition you should be able to describe how to use the trail balance to help analyze your business activities. Introduction to Accounting Page | 82
  • 84. UNIT SUMMARY We have now completed the bookkeeping stage of the accounting process with our trial balance. Now that you have completed unit two take some time to review the content in both Units One and Two before you proceed to unit 3. It is very important that you fully understand the contents in these two units if you are to understand the information in the upcoming units. Also, review the activities and assignments and check your answers with the answers given. At this stage you should be able to identify source document and transfer the information to the different books of original entry. You should also be able to post to you ledgers and balance them off and transfer those balances to the Trial Balance. The next step is to examine the adjustments necessary to ensure that your Financial Statements represents a true and fair view of your business. Self-Reflection Questions Now that you have completed Unit Two take some time to review the content in both Units One and Two before you proceed to Unit 3. Reflect on these questions: 1. Do I know who are my accounts receivable and accounts payable? 2. Are you able to distinguish between accounts payable and accounts receivable? 3. Do you know the entries necessary to increase or decrease the amount on account based on the type of accounts? 4. Do you understand when different types of accounts should be debited and when it should be credited? UNIT ASSIGNMENT Unit 2 Assignment D You can now complete the unit assignment by preparing the Trial Balance from the balances on your ledger accounts. Introduction to Accounting Page | 83
  • 85. UNIT REFERENCES Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations. Macmillan Publishers Ltd. Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.). England, Pearson Education Limited. http://www.accountingunplugged.com/2008/08/27/accounting-basics/ http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Credit_note http://www.printablecashreceipts.com/ http://www.wisegeek.com/what-is-a-cash-receipt.htm http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cheque http://www.scribd.com/doc/7216082/Unit-I-Accounting-for-Merchandising-Business1 http://www.peoi.org/Courses/Coursesen/ac/fram9.html http://www.investorwords.com/46/account_balance.html#ixzz1HDhSFNDR http://www.helium.com/items/1740700-how-to-balance-a-ledger-account Introduction to Accounting Page | 84
  • 86. UNIT THREE – FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND ADJUSTMENTS INTRODUCTION In this unit you will look at the adjustments necessary before your financial statements can be prepared. You would look at the adjustments for prepaid and accrued expenses and revenue, depreciation and disposal of assets, bad debts and provision for bad debts. You will also take a look at the various methods to value closing stock. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this unit you should be able to: 1. Determine the various adjustments necessary before financial statement can be prepared. 2. Make the necessary adjustments for accrued and prepaid expense and revenue accounts. 3. Make adjustments for the depreciation and disposal of fixed assets. 4. Make adjustments for bad debts and provision for bad debts. 5. Identify and prepare different types of financial statements. 6. Illustrate the different layouts for financial statements. UNIT READINGS The instructor will provide a list of readings. ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions. Introduction to Accounting Page | 85
  • 87. TOPIC 3.1 DEPRECIATION AND DISPOSAL OF ASSETS INTRODUCTION There is a time period attached to the useful life of all assets owned by a business. Since assets depreciates in value as it is being used it can no longer be valued at cost price. In this topic you will calculate depreciation and determine the disposal value of assets. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Define depreciation. 2. State reasons for depreciating assets. 3. Identify methods of calculating depreciation. 4. Determine book value and disposal value of assets. 5. Examine the different methods of calculating depreciation (straight line and diminishing balance method). 6. Show the treatment of depreciation in the financial statements. WHAT IS DEPRECIATION? Let us begin by defining depreciation. According to Woods and Robinson (2007), Depreciation is the part of the original purchase cost of a fixed asset consumed during its period of use by the business. It is an expense for services consumed and will be charged to the income statement and will therefore, reduce net profit. Depreciation is a process of allocation, not valuation. Eventually, all assets except land wear out or become so inadequate or outmoded that they are sold or discarded; therefore, firms must record depreciation on every plant asset except land. They record depreciation even when the market value of a plant asset temporarily rises above its original cost because eventually the asset is no longer useful to its current owner. CAUSES OF DEPRECIATION Major causes of depreciation are: physical deterioration, inadequacy for future needs, and obsolescence. Physical deterioration results from the use of the asset—wear and tear—and the action of the elements. For example, an automobile may have to be replaced after a time because its body rusted out. Introduction to Accounting Page | 86
  • 88. Inadequacy of a plant asset is its inability to produce enough products or provide enough services to meet current demands. For example, an airline cannot provide air service for 125 passengers using a plane that seats 90. Obsolescence of an asset is its decline in usefulness brought about by inventions and technological progress. For example, the development of the xerographic process of reproducing printed matter rendered almost all previous methods of duplication obsolete. To compute depreciation expense, accountants consider four major factors: COST OF THE ASSET Estimated salvage value of the asset. Salvage value (or scrap value) is the amount of money the company expects to recover, less disposal costs, on the date a plant asset is scrapped, sold, or traded in. Estimated useful life of the asset. Useful life refers to the time the company owning the asset intends to use it; useful life is not necessarily the same as either economic life or physical life. The economic life of a car may be 7 years and its physical life may be 10 years, but if a company has a policy of trading cars every 3 years, the useful life for depreciation purposes is 3 years. Various firms express useful life in years, months, working hours, or units of production. Obsolescence also affects useful life. Depreciation method used in depreciating the asset. We describe the four common depreciation methods in the next section. HOW IS DEPRECIATION CALCULATED? In order to have free and fair view of the Balance Sheet it is important that the assets on the balance sheet are correctly valued. Today, businesses can use many different methods to calculate depreciation on assets. This section discusses and illustrates the two most common methods—straight-line, and reducing balance method. According to accounting theory, a business should use a depreciation method that reflects most closely their underlying economic circumstances. Thus, businesses should adopt the depreciation method that allocates asset cost to accounting periods according to the benefits received from the use of the asset. Before studying some of the methods that companies use to depreciate assets, make sure you understand the following definitions. Useful life is an estimate of the productive life of an asset. Although usually expressed in years, an asset's useful life may also be based on units of activity, such as items produced, hours used, or miles driven. Introduction to Accounting Page | 87
  • 89. Salvage value equals the value, if any that a company expects to receive by selling or exchanging an asset at the end of its useful life. Depreciable cost equals an asset's total cost minus the asset's expected salvage value. The total amount of depreciation expense assigned to an asset never exceeds the asset's depreciable cost. Net book value is an asset's total cost minus the accumulated depreciation assigned to the asset. Net book value rarely equals market value, which is the price someone would pay for the asset. In fact, the market value of an asset, such as a building, may increase while the asset is being depreciated. Net book value simply represents the portion of an asset's cost that has not been allocated to expense. (CliffsNotes.com. Depreciation of Operating Assets. 18 Apr 2011) STRAIGHT-LINE DEPRECIATION This is the method most commonly used by businesses for financial reporting. In this method the assets annual depreciation expense is calculated by dividing the assets cost by the number of years of useful life of the assets. Equal amount is transferred to the income statement for depreciation each year. The assumption is that each accounting period equally benefits from the use of the asset. The straight line method calculates an annual charge by: using a formula; or applying a fixed percentage to the depreciable amount of the asset. Straight-line Depreciation Formula Depreciation = Cost - Scrap Value Number of years Cost – cost of the asset Scrap Value – the business’s best estimate of the worth of the assets at the end of its useful life Numbers of years – the years the asset is expected to be useful to the business. The fixed percentage is calculated by dividing 100% by the number of years of useful life 5 years of useful life 100 = 20 % 5 Introduction to Accounting Page | 88
  • 90. Example 3.1 A On the 1st January 2011, a business purchases a Motor Vehicle for $50,000. It is expected to give five years of service after which it will be sold for $5,000. Calculate the annual depreciation to be charged to the income statement for each of the five years. Depreciation = Cost - Scrap Value Number of Years = 50, 000 - 5, 000 5 = 45,000 5 = $9,000 $9,000 will be charge to the Income Statement for depreciation annually. Using the fixed percentage 100 = 20% 5 45,000 x 20% = 9,000 The following table summarizes the application of straight-line depreciation during the Motor Vehicle five-year useful life. Straight-Line Depreciation Year Ending Depreciable Annual Accumulated Net Book Value 31 December Cost Depreciation Depreciation 2011 50,000 9,000 9,000 41,000 2012 50,000 9,000 18,000 32,000 2013 50,000 9,000 27,000 23,000 2014 50,000 9,000 36,000 14,000 2015 50,000 9,000 45,000 5,000 At the end of year five, the $45,000 shown as accumulated depreciation equals the asset's depreciable cost, and the $5,000 net book value represents its estimated salvage value. To record depreciation expense on the Motor Vehicle each year, the company debits depreciation expense–vehicles for $9,000 and credits accumulated depreciation–vehicles for $9,000. Introduction to Accounting Page | 89
  • 91. REDUCING BALANCE METHOD In this method also called the diminishing balance, a different amount is charged to the Income Statement each year for depreciation. A fixed percentage is applied to the net book value of the asset at the beginning of each year. The net book value reduces as the asset ages and the depreciation charge diminishes Example 3.1 B Looking at the same example above of a business that purchases a Motor Vehicle for $50,000. If the reducing balance is used at a fixed percentage of 20% per annum. Calculate the annual depreciation to be charged to the income statement for each of the five years. Reducing Balance Depreciation Year Ending Depreciable Net Book Depreciation 31 December Cost Value 2011 50, 000.00 10,000.00 40,000.00 2012 40,000.00 8,000.00 32,000.00 2013 32,000.00 6,400.00 25,600.00 2014 25,600.00 5,120.00 20,480.00 2015 20,480.00 4,096.00 16,384.00 Year 1 50,000 x 20 % = 10,000 Net Book Value 50,000 – 10,000 = 40,000 Year 2 40, 000 x 20% = 8,000 Net Book Value 40,000 - 8,000 = 32,000 The table below summarizes the application of reducing balance of depreciation during the Motor Vehicle five-year useful life. In this method the depreciation was charge yearly to the net book value of the asset. RECORDING DEPRECIATION Usually separate records of the cost of each type of non-current asset and the accumulating depreciation on each type of non-current assets are kept. The provision for depreciation account is updated at the end of each financial year with the annual depreciation charge. This is done as follows: Record the annual depreciation charge in the general journal Introduction to Accounting Page | 90
  • 92. Post the journal entries to the accounts o Debit Profit & loss Account o Credit Provision for Depreciation Account The Profit & loss account section of the income statement is debited with the depreciation to ensure that profits are reduced for the year under review. The credit entry in the provision account has the effect of reducing the value of the non-current asset. (Austen et al 2011) Let us now prepare the double entry records for the reducing balance example above. Example 3.1 C At the end of each year prepare the journal entries to record the depreciation to be charged for the year as indicated below. Journal Date Details Dr Cr $ $ 31 Dec. 2011 Profit & loss 10,000.00 Provision for Depreciation 10,000.00 31 Dec. 2012 Profit & loss 8,000.00 Provision for Depreciation 8,000.00 31 Dec. 2013 Profit & loss 6,400.00 Provision for Depreciation 6,400.00 31 Dec 2014 Profit & loss 5, 120.00 Provision for Depreciation 5, 120.00 31 Dec. 2015 Profit & loss 4,096.00 Provision for Depreciation 4,096.00 The journal entries are then posted to the accounts. Introduction to Accounting Page | 91
  • 93. Example 3.1 D Motor Vehicle 2011 $ 2011 $ 1-Jan Bank 50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d 50,000 2012 2012 1-Jan Balance b/d 50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d 50,000 2013 2013 1-Jan Balance b/d 50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d 50,000 2014 2014 1-Jan Balance b/d 50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d 50,000 2015 2015 1-Jan Balance b/d 50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d 50,000 Profit & loss Account (extract) for the year ended 31 December $ 2011 Depreciation 10,000.00 2012 Depreciation 8,000.00 2013 Depreciation 6,400.00 2014 Depreciation 5,120.00 2015 Depreciation 4,096.00 Provision for Depreciation of Motor Vehicle 2011 $ 2011 $ 31-Dec Balance c/d 10,000 31-Dec Profit & loss 10,000 2012 2012 31-Dec Balance c/d 18,000 1-Jan Balance b/d 10,000 31-Dec Profit & loss 8,000 18,000 18,000 2013 2013 31-Dec Balance c/d 24,400 1-Jan Balance b/d 18,000 31-Dec Profit & loss 6,400 24,400 24,400 2014 2014 31-Dec Balance c/d 29,520 1-Jan Balance b/d 24,400 31-Dec Profit & loss 5,120 29,520 29,520 2015 2015 31-Dec Balance c/d 33,616 1-Jan Balance b/d 29,520 31-Dec Profit & loss 4096 33,616 33,616 Introduction to Accounting Page | 92
  • 94. How Does Depreciation Affect the Balance Sheet? The balance sheet at the end of each financial year should show the noncurrent assets at cost less the balance on the provision for depreciation account. At the end of each year that year’s depreciation is charged to the Profit & loss account but it is the accumulated depreciation to date that is charged to the balance sheet. Let’s have a look at the balance sheet extract for the example above. Example 3.1 E Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011 Cost Accumulated Depreciation Net Book Value $ $ $ Motor Vehicle 50,000 10,000 40,000 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2012 Cost Accumulated Depreciation Net Book Value $ $ $ Motor Vehicle 50,000 18,000 32,000 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2013 Cost Accumulated Depreciation Net Book Value $ $ $ Motor Vehicle 50,000 24,400 25,600 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2014 Cost Accumulated Depreciation Net Book Value $ $ $ Motor Vehicle 50,000 29,520 20,480 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2015 Cost Accumulated Depreciation Net Book Value $ $ $ Motor Vehicle 50,000 33,616 16,384 The Sale of an Asset When an asset is sold it should be deleted from your records. This is done by take out the cost from the asset account, the amount of accumulated depreciation removed from the provision for depreciation account, and then the profit or loss on sale is calculated. These entries are record in the asset disposal account. Introduction to Accounting Page | 93
  • 95. The Account Entries Needed On the sale of non-current asset, example Motor Vehicle, the following entries are needed. 1. Transfer the cost of the asset to be sold to an asset disposal account (for this example a Motor Vehicle Disposal Account). Debit Motor Vehicle Disposal Account Credit Motor Vehicle Account 2. Transfer the accumulated depreciation to the asset disposal account. Debit Provision for Depreciation – Motor Vehicle Credit Motor Vehicle Disposal Account 3. Record the funds received from the sale of the asset. Debit Cash Book Credit Motor Vehicle Disposal Account 4. Transfer the balance on the asset disposal account to the Profit & loss account. a) If the Motor Vehicle Disposal Account show a balance on the debit side of the account then it is a profit on sale. Debit Motor Vehicle Disposal Account Credit Profit & loss Account b) If the Motor Vehicle Disposal Account shows a balance on the credit side of the account then it is a loss on sale. Debit Profit & loss Account Credit Motor Vehicle Disposal Account Now let us assume that the motor vehicle in the example above was disposed of at the end three years. Assume that on the 1st January 2014 the Motor Vehicle was sold for $20,000 by cheque, then the following entries would be made to record this disposal. Introduction to Accounting Page | 94
  • 96. Motor Vehicle 2011 $ 2011 $ 1-Jan Bank 50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d 50,000 2012 2012 1-Jan Balance b/d 50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d 50,000 2013 2013 1-Jan Balance b/d 50,000 31-Dec Balance c/d 50,000 2014 2014 Motor Vehicle Disposal 1-Jan Balance b/d 50,000 1-Jan Account 50,000 Provision for Depreciation of Motor Vehicle 2011 $ 2011 $ 31-Dec Balance c/d 10,000 31-Dec Profit & loss 10,000 2012 2012 31-Dec Balance c/d 18,000 1-Jan Balance b/d 10,000 31-Dec Profit & loss 8,000 18,000 18,000 2013 2013 31-Dec Balance c/d 24,400 1-Jan Balance b/d 18,000 31-Dec Profit & loss 6,400 24,400 24,400 2014 2014 1-Jan Motor Vehicle Disposal Account 24,400 1-Jan Balance b/d 24,400 24,400 24,400 Example 3.1 F Cash Book Date Cash Bank Date Cash Bank 2014 $ $ 2014 $ $ 1-Jan Motor Vehicle Disposal 20,000 Introduction to Accounting Page | 95
  • 97. Motor Vehicle Disposal Account 2014 $ 2014 $ 1-Jan Motor Vehicle 50,000 1-Jan Provision for Depreciation 24,400 1-Jan Cash Book 20,000 1-Jan Profit & loss (loss on Sale) 5,600 50,000 50,000 Profit & loss Account (extract) for the year ended 31 December 2014 $ Gross Profit x xxxx Less Loss on sale of Motor Vehicle 5,600 TOPIC SUMMARY You have just looked at the entries necessary to record depreciation of non-current assets and the disposal of non-current assets. You should remember that the depreciation for the current year is charged to Profit & loss account but the accumulated depreciation is charged to the balance sheet each year. You will now continue by look at other necessary adjustment that are required before the final accounts can be prepared. Introduction to Accounting Page | 96
  • 98. TOPIC 3.2 ADJUSTMENTS FOR FINANCIAL REPORTING INTRODUCTION In order to give true and fair view of your financial statement there are adjustments required to account for prepaid and accrued expenses and revenue. These adjustments should be dealt with before you proceed to your financial statements. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able: 1. Define the terms accrued and prepaid. 2. Make the necessary adjustment to expense and revenue accounts. 3. Account for these adjustments in the financial statements. 4. Understand why it is necessary to adjust expense and revenue accounts for amounts accrued or prepaid. MAKING ADJUSTMENTS So far we have assumed that all the expense and revenue incurred are for the present financial period. However there are instances where the amounts paid for expense or received for revenue would be for the previous financial period (accrued) or the upcoming financial period (prepaid). When this happens the figure charged to the financial statements for this period need to be adjusted to reflect the accrued or prepaid amounts. Let’s first look at the entries necessary for accrued and prepaid expenses. Let us assume that two businesses paid rent for the premises $8,000 by cheque per year. For the year 2011 the following accrued Business A pays $6,500 during the year and owes $1,500 at the end of the year Rent for the year $8,000 Rent paid $6,500 Rent owed $1,500 Business B pays $9,000 during the year which includes $1,000 prepaid for the following year. Rent for the year $8,000 Rent paid $9,000 Rent prepaid $1,000 Introduction to Accounting Page | 97
  • 99. ACCRUED EXPENSES (EXPENSES OWING) Remember that expenses are the cost of doing business for example salary, rent, utilities, carriage outwards, discount allowed and interest on money borrowed. From the example above the amount that should be debited to the Profit & loss account for rent should be $8,000 since that is amount that should be used up for this period. Example 3.2A Business A Rent Account Date Details folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ 31-Dec Bank CB 6,500 31-Dec Profit & Loss 8,000 31-Dec Accrued c/d 1,500 8,000 8,000 2012 2012 Jan 1 Accrued b/d 1,500 1-Jan Accrued b/d 1,500 Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011 $ $ Rent 6,500 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011 Current Liabilities $ Expenses Accrued 1,500 Add Rent Accrued 1,500 8,000 Observe that even though only $6,500 was paid for rent during the year the Profit & loss should include the total amount that should have been paid for the year. Also observe that accrued expense is added in the Profit & loss account. Accrued expenses are a liability to your business therefore any accrued expenses should be shown as a current liability in your balance sheet. PREPAID EXPENSES Let us now look at Business B and the entries necessary in your records to record prepaid expenses. Remember that the amount that should be debited to the Profit & loss account for rent is $8,000. Introduction to Accounting Page | 98
  • 100. Example 3.2 B Business B Rent Account Date Details folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ 31-Dec Bank CB 9,000 31-Dec Profit & loss 8,000 31-Dec Prepaid c/d 1,000 9,000 9,000 2012 1-Jan prepaid b/d 1,000 Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011 $ $ Rent 9,000 Less Prepaid Rent 1,000 8,000 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011 Current Assets $ Prepaid Expenses 1,000 Looking at the entries above you will see that prepaid expenses is subtracted in the Profit & loss account and included in the current assets in the balance sheet. We can now continue by looking at accrued and prepaid revenue. Remember that revenue accounts are those accounts that bring income into the business, for example discount received, interest received, rent received and commission received. Let us look at two businesses that sublet their premises for $5,000 per year. In 2011 the following accrued Business C received $4200 by cheque for rent in 2011 Rent that should be received for the year $5,000 Rent received $4,200 Rent received owed for the year $ 800 Business D received $6,800 by cheque for rent in 2011 Rent that should be received for the year $5,000 Introduction to Accounting Page | 99
  • 101. Rent received $6,800 Rent received prepaid for the year $1,800 ACCRUED REVENUE (REVENUE OWING) From our example the amount that should be credited to the Profit & loss account for rent received is $5,000. Therefore the following entries are required to show the adjustment for revenue owing. Example 3.2 C Business C Rent Received Account Date Details folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ 31-Dec Profit & loss 5,000 31-Dec Bank CB 4,200 31-Dec Owings c/d 800 5,000 5,000 2012 1-Jan Owings b/d 800 Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011 $ $ Gross Profit xxxx Add Revenue Rent Received 4,200 Add Owings 800 5,000 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011 Current Assets $ Revenue owing 800 Take note that revenue is added to the gross profit in the Profit & loss account and that revenue owing is recorded as a current asset in the balance sheet. PREPAID REVENUE Observe in the entries below that prepaid revenue is recorded as a current liability in the balance sheet. Introduction to Accounting Page | 100
  • 102. Example 3.2 D Business D Rent Received Account Date Details folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ 31-Dec Profit & Loss 5,000 31-Dec Bank CB 6,800 31-Dec Prepaid c/d 1,800 6,800 6,800 2012 1-Jan Prepaid b/d 1,800 Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011 $ $ Gross Profit xxxx Add Revenue Rent Received 6,800 Less Prepaid 1,800 5,000 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011 Current Liabilities $ Revenue prepaid 1,800 There is a credit entry in the rent received account above to indicate the cash received for the rent the debit entry is recorded in the cash book since the funds was received by the business. TOPIC SUMMARY There are number of things to remember from this topic 1. Accounts should be adjusted at the end of each period to account for any prepayments or accruals during the period. 2. Accruals are added in the Profit & loss account while prepayments are subtracted. 3. In the balance sheet prepaid expenses and revenue owing is included in the current assets while expenses owing and revenue prepaid are included in the current liabilities Introduction to Accounting Page | 101
  • 103. TOPIC 3.3 BAD DEBTS AND PROVISION FOR BAD DEBTS INTRODUCTION Once a business decides to offer its goods and/or services on credit to its customers that business has to be prepared for some of its customers not paying for the goods and/or services they received. When this occurs the necessary adjustment should be made to account for these unpaid debts. In accounting when a business is unable to collect the amount due from its customers the amounts owed should be transferred to a bad debts account. In this topic you will look at bad debts and provisions that should be made for bad debts in your business. OBJECTIVES Upon the completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. identify a bad debt; 2. describe how bad debts are written off; 3. explain how provisions for bad debts are made; 4. make accounting entries, (a) to recorded bad debts and provision for bad debts, (b) for increasing and reducing the provision for bad debts, and (c) for bad debts recovered. BAD DEBTS When a business decides to sell its goods/services to customers for credit there is a possibility of some of these customers not paying for the goods/services received. A customer may not be able to pay because their business has suffered a loss or they may have gone bankrupt. Bad debt is an expense to your business. Bad Debt is a debt that is unlikely to be paid Examine the following example. Example 3.4 A You sold goods on credit to M. Label for $500 on the 21 January 2011. On March 15, you sold $725 goods on credit to J. Jackets. On the 1st June you received $375 by cash from M Label and on the 30 August you received $650 by cheque from J Jackets. At the end of your financial year you were notified that both M Label and J Jacket would not be able to pay the balance of their debts. You then decide to write the debts off. Introduction to Accounting Page | 102
  • 104. The following accounting entries are required: Debit - Bad Debt Account - to transfer the amount of the unpaid debit. Credit - Debtors Account - to reduce the liability for the debtor who is unable to pay. _____________________________________________________________________ Debit - Profit & loss Account - to record the amount of bad debt for the accounting period. Credit - Bad Debt Account - to transfer the amount of bad debt to the profit and loss account. ___________________________________________________________________ Your accounts should be as follows: M. Label Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ 21-Jan Sales GL 500 1-Jun Cash CB 375 31-Dec Bad Debts Account GL 125 500 500 J Jacket Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ 15- Mar Sales GL 725 30-Aug Bank CB 650 31-Dec Bad Debts Account GL 75 725 725 Bad Debts Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ 31-Dec M. Label SL 125 31-Dec Profit & loss a/c 200 31-Dec J. Jacket SL 75 200 200 Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011 $ $ Gross Profit xxxx Less Expenses Bad Debts 200 PROVISION FOR BAD DEBTS Introduction to Accounting Page | 103
  • 105. Because your business sell goods to its customers on credit you should make provision for the likely hood that some of customers will not pay their debt in full. A provision for bad debts account is created to show the estimated amount of debts that your business may not be able to recover. The amount for provision for bad debts can be estimates as follows By looking at each debt and estimate which one will be bad On the basis of experience estimate what percentage of the debts will result in bad debts Normally a business decides what percentage of its debtors at the end of financial year it would estimate as being unrecoverable. Once the percentage is decide then the accounting entries are required In the first year: Debit - Profit & loss Account with the amount of the provision Credit - Provision for Bad Debts Account Increase in Provision of Bad Debts Amount In the years that follows if the amount of the provision is greater than the year before then the difference between both years is recorded as follows Debit - Profit & loss Account (with the difference between previous and present year) Credit - Provision for Bad Debts (with the difference between the previous and present year) Decrease in Provision of Bad Debts Amounts If the amount of the provision is less than the previous year the entries would be Debit - Provision for Bad Debts (with the difference between the previous & present year) Credit - Profit & loss Account (with the difference between previous and present year) Example 3.4 B A business estimates that 2% of its debtors at the end of each year will be bad debts. The debtors figure for that business for the years 2011 – 2013 are: 2011 Debtors $ 10,000 2012 Debtors $ 12,000 2013 Debtors $ 8,000 Show the accounting entries necessary to record the above. The calculation is shown in the table below: Introduction to Accounting Page | 104
  • 106. Provision Provision Profit & Year Debtors Percentage Amount Loss $ % $ $ 2011 10,000 2 200 200 2012 12,000 2 240 40 2013 8,000 2 160 80 You can how show the accounting entries to record these calculations Provision for Bad Debts Account Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2011 $ 2011 $ 31-Dec Balance c/d 200 31-Dec Profit & Loss a/c 200 2012 2012 31-Dec Balance c/d 240 1-Jan Balance b/d 200 31-Dec Profit & Loss a/c 40 240 240 2013 2013 31-Dec Profit & Loss a/c 80 1-Jan Balance b/d 240 31-Dec Balance c/d 160 240 240 2014 1-Jan Balance b/d 160 Profit & loss (extract) for year ended 31 December 2011 - 2013 $ $ 2011 Provision for Bad Debts 200 2012 Provision for Bad Debts 40 2013 Provision for Bad Debts 80 Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December 2011 - 2013 $ $ 2011 Debtors 10,000 Less Provision for bad debts 200 9,800 2012 Debtors 12,000 Less Provision for bad debts 240 11,760 2011 Debtors 8,000 Less Provision for bad debts 160 7,840 Introduction to Accounting Page | 105
  • 107. Take note that a reduction in the provision for bad debts is revenue to your business and should be added to your gross profit. Also note that the balance on the provision for bad debts account at the end of each financial period is subtracted from the debtors figure in the balance sheet. Let now look at fully worked example: Example 3.4 C A business started on 1 January 2005 and its financial year end is 31 December annually. The table of the debtors, the bad debts written off and the estimated provision for bad debts at the end of the year is: Bad Debts Provision for Bad Year Debtors written off Debts Amount $ $ $ 2005 12,000 298 100 2006 15,000 386 130 2007 14,000 344 115 2008 18,000 477 150 You are required to show the bad debts account and the provision for bad debts account, as well as the extracts from the Profit & loss account for each year and the balance sheet extracts. The double entry records to show the above is as follows Provision for Bad Debts Date Details Folio Amount Date Details Folio Amount 2005 $ 2005 $ 31-Dec Balance c/d 100 31-Dec Profit & loss a/c 100 2006 2006 31-Dec Balance c/d 130 1-Jan Balance b/d 100 31-Dec Profit & loss a/c 30 130 130 2007 2007 31-Dec Profit & loss a/c 15 1-Jan Balance b/d 130 31-Dec Balance c/d 115 130 130 2008 2008 31-Dec Balance c/d 150 1-Jan Balance b/d 115 31-Dec Profit & loss a/c 35 Introduction to Accounting Page | 106
  • 108. 150 150 2009 2009 1-Jan Balance b/d 150 Profit & loss Account (extracts) for the year ended 31 December $ $ 2005 Bad Debts 298 Provision for Bad Debts 100 2006 Bad Debts 386 Provision for Bad Debts 30 Reduction in Provision for Bad 2007 Bad Debts 344 Debts 15 2008 Bad Debts 477 Provision for Bad Debts 35 Introduction to Accounting Page | 107
  • 109. Balance Sheet (extract) as at 31 December $ $ 2005 Debtors 12,000 Less Provision for Bad Debts 100 11,900 2006 Debtors 15,000 Less Provision for Bad Debts 130 14,870 2007 Debtors 14,000 Less Provision for Bad Debts 115 13,885 2008 Debtors 18,000 Less Provision for Bad Debts 150 17,850 There are instances where bad debts that are written off are recovered in the future. When this occur the debt should be reinstate by: Debit - Debtors Account Credit - Bad Debts recovered Account When cash or a cheque is received from the debtor in settlement of the account the entries should be: Debit - Cash Book Credit - Debtors Account TOPIC SUMMARY You just looked at the accounting entries required to bad debts and provision for bad debts. You should remember that after the first entry for provision for bad debts in the Profit & loss account the difference between the previous year and the present year is recorded in the Profit & loss account. Note that balance on the provision for bad debts account at the end of the financial period is deducted from the balance on the debtors account in the balance sheet. You should also remember that a reduction in the provision of bad debts is revenue to your business and should be added to your gross profit while an increase is an expense and should be deducted from your gross profit. Introduction to Accounting Page | 108
  • 110. TOPIC 3.4 INVENTORY ACCOUNTING INTRODUCTION At the beginning and end of every period there will be items of stock remain on your selves and in your warehouse. These stocks have to be valued and accounted for in the financial statements. In this topic we will look at the valuation of stock and the various methods of valuing closing stock. OBJECTIVES Upon the completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Identify different methods of stock valuation. 2. Examine different methods of stock valuation (LIFO, FIFO, AVCO). 3. Illustrate the different adjustment required to arrive at the closing stock. 4. Show how the necessary adjustments are recorded in the financial statements. STOCK VALUATION Stock are goods purchased for re-sale. Keeping a record of stock involves adding new stock purchased and deducting any stock sold. Stocktaking (taking inventory) is the process of physically checking stock. This involves physically counting the stock on hand and comparing the findings with figures on the stock record. Stocktaking helps to assess the amount of loss due to theft or breakage and ensure that ht stock records are being kept effectively. There are two ways that stock may be recorded by a business. 1. Perpetual method or continuous method where stocks are updated after each purchase, sale or return of stock. 2. Periodic method where the closing stock figure is determined by physically counting and valuing stock on hand at the end of a period. Methods of Stock Valuation There are three methods of valuing stock. These are: 1. First In First Out (FIFO) assumes that the first set of stocks purchased are the first set of stocks that would be sold. 2. Last In First Out (LIFO) assumes that last set of stocks purchase are the first set of stock that would be sold. 3. Average Cost (AVCO) values closing stock by using the average cost of the stocks available for sale. This is done as follows: Cost of goods available for sale Introduction to Accounting Page | 109
  • 111. Average Cost = number of units available for sale You can now examine the valuation of closing stock using each method in the example below. Example 3.4 A For 2011 the receipt and issue of stocks are as follows Receipt Sales Jan 20 items at $30 each June 6 items for $45 each May 10 items at $33 each Aug 22 items for $46 each July 16 items at $38.50 each Dec 10 items for $48 each Oct 12 items at $39 each There was no opening stock. Calculate the closing stock using (i) FIFO (ii) LIFO (iii) AVCO. Draw up the trading account for the year ended 31 December 2011 showing the different reported gross profits from the figures given in (a) Stock after each FIFO Received Issued $ $ transaction January 20 @ $30 20 @ $30 600 20 @ $30 600 May 10 @ $33 930 10 @ $33 330 14 @ $30 420 June 6 @ $30 750 10 @ $33 330 14 @ $30 420 July 16 @ 38.50 10 @ $33 330 1,366 16 @ $38.50 616 14 @ $30 2 @ $33 66 August 682 8 @ $33 16 @ $38.50 616 2@ $33 66 October 12 @ $39 16 @ $38.50 616 1,150 12 @ 39 468 2 @ $33 8 @ $38.50 308 December 682 8 @ $38.50 12 @ $39 468 Introduction to Accounting Page | 110
  • 112. Take note that the first items of stock purchased are the first to be sold. Also note that stock is valued at cost price not at selling (sales) price. The valuation of stock should not include profit amounts. Stock after each LIFO Received Issued $ $ transaction January 20 @ $30 20 @ $30 600 20 @ $30 May 10 @ $33 600 930 10 @ $33 330 20 @ $30 600 June 6 @ $33 732 4 @ $33 132 20 @ $30 600 July 16 @ 38.50 4 @ $33 132 1,348 16 @ $38.50 616 16 @ $38.50 August 4 @ $33 18 @ $30 540 2 @ $30 18 @ $30 540 October 12 @ $39 1,008 12 @ $39 468 18 @ $30 540 December 10 @ $39 618 2 @ $39 78 You can observe that when the LIFO method of valuation is used the last item of stock received becomes the first item of stock to be issued. Average Cost per Number of Value of AVCO Received Issued unit units stock $ $ January 20 @ $30 30 20 600 30 + 33 = 31 May 10 @ $33 930 10 + 20 30 June 6 @ $31 31 24 744 31 + 38.50 July 16 @ 38.50 40 1,360 24 + 16 = 34 August 22 @ $34 34 18 612 34 + 39 October 12 @ $39 30 1,080 40 + 12 = 36 Introduction to Accounting Page | 111
  • 113. Average Cost per Number of Value of AVCO Received Issued unit units stock December 10 @ $36 36 20 720 You can move on to look at the trading account taking into account the different valuations of stock just calculated. Trading Account for the year ended 31 December 2011 FIFO LIFO AVCO $ $ $ $ $ $ Sales 1,762 1,762 1,762 Less Cost of Goods Sold Purchases 2014 2014 2014 Less Closing Stock 776 1,238 618 1,396 729 1,294 Gross Profit 524 366 468 The sales figure is calculated by adding all the sales June 6 x 45 270 August 22 x 46 1,012 December 10 x 48 480 1,762 The purchase figure is calculated by adding all the purchase amounts January 20 x 30 600 May 10 x 33 330 July 16 x 38.50 616 October 12 x 39 468 2014 The use of different methods of valuation of stock would give a different value of gross profit and net profit for the same business. TOPIC SUMMARY You just observed that different methods can be used to value closing stock. You would have noted that these different methods of valuation have a different effect on the profit calculation. Introduction to Accounting Page | 112
  • 114. TOPIC 3.5 FINAL ACCOUNTS FOR SOLE TRADER INTRODUCTION So far in this unit you have looked at different adjustment needed before the final accounts can be prepared. The final accounts for a sole trader business are the Income Statement (Trading and Profit & loss Account) and the Balance Sheet. The final accounts give a picture of the financial position of your business. It shows where or not your business has made a profit or loss during the accounting period and whether you are able to pay your debts as they become due. Let’s now have a look at the final accounts of a sole trader business. OBJECTIVES Upon the completion of this topic you should be able to; 1. understand how profit/loss is calculated, 2. calculate the cost of goods sold, gross profit and net profit, 3. transfer net profit and drawings to the capital account at the end of the period, and 4. prepare an Income Statement from a trial balance. FINAL ACCOUNTS After your trial balance is completed your final accounts are prepared. The final accounts of a sole trader business include the Income Statement (trading and Profit & loss account) and the balance sheet. Remember that your trial balance is the summary of the balances in all your accounts. Some of these balances (those from your nominal accounts) affect the profit and are transferred to the Income statement; the others (real and personal accounts) are transferred to your balance sheet. The Income Statement and the Balance Sheet are prepared at the end of each financial period to record how well the business operated during that financial period. Income Statement One of the most important financial statements of any business is the Income Statement. It is used to determine the following: 1. how profitable a business is being run; and 2. comparing the results received with the results expected. The Income Statement can be divided into two sections the trading account and the Profit & loss account. The gross profit which is the amount of profit made before the expenses are deducted is calculated in the trading account. The purpose of the trading account is to determine the gross profit made from sales. Therefore the accounts that are directly related to buying and selling (trading) will be transferred to the trading account. The accounts directly related to trading are: Sales Introduction to Accounting Page | 113
  • 115. Purchase Sales Return Purchases Return Carriage Inwards Gross profit is calculated as: Gross Profit = Net Sales – Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) Along with gross profit the net sales, cost of goods sold and the cost of goods available for sale is also calculated in the trading account: Net Sales = Sales – Sales Return (Return Inwards) Net sales are the total sales figure after allowances have been made for sales returned to the business. COGS = Cost of goods available for sale (COGAFS) – Closing Stock COGAFS = Opening Stock + (Purchases – Purchases Return) + Carriage Inwards The net profit of your business is calculated in the Profit & loss account. Net profit is the balance of profit after allowance is made for revenue and expenses. It is calculated as: Net Profit = Gross profit + Revenue – expenses The revenue and expense charged to the Profit & loss account are those that are not directly related to trading but more to do with the running of the business. Some of these accounts are: Rent Telephone Carriage outwards Discount allowed Discount received Commission received Commission paid Salary In Unit Two these accounts were closed off and transferred to the income statement. The income statement can be shown horizontally or vertically. Introduction to Accounting Page | 114
  • 116. BALANCE SHEET The other half of our final accounts is the Balance Sheet. The Balance Sheet is a financial statement showing the book values of the assets, liabilities and capital at the end of the financial period. It shows what the business owes and what it owns. The assets of the business is divided into two categories and recorded as follows 1. Non-Current Assets are assets that: are expected to be of use in the business for long time; are to be used in the business; and were not bought only for the purpose of resale. Non-current assets are recorded in the balance sheet starting with those assets that will in the business the longest down to those that will be kept for a shorter period. Example of non-current assets and the order of record are: Land and Buildings. Fixtures and Fittings. Machinery. Motor Vehicles. 2. Current Assets are recorded next. These are assets will change within the next twelve months. They are recorded as follows: Stock (goods bought for resale) Debtors. Cash at Bank. Cash in Hand. 3. Non-current Liability - Sometime referred to as long term liability are those debts that take more than a year to settle. This includes large loans and mortgages. 4. Current Liability - are debts that will be settled in one year or less. This includes creditors and small loans. Let’s now prepare the final accounts from the trial balance on the next page. Introduction to Accounting Page | 115
  • 117. Example 3.5A MDAR Retailer Trial Balance as at 31 December 2011 Dr. Cr. $ $ Discount Allowed 410 Discount Received 506 Carriage Inwards 309 Carriage Outwards 218 Return Inwards 1,384 Return Outwards 810 Sales 120,320 Purchases 84,290 Stock 31 December 2010 30,816 Motor expenses 4,917 Repairs to premises 1,383 Pay 16,184 Sundry expenses 807 Rates and insurance 2,896 Premises at cost 40,000 Motor Vehicle at cost 11,160 Provision for depreciation motors as at 31 December 2010 3,860 Debtors 31,640 Creditors 24,320 Cash at bank 4,956 Cash in hand 48 Drawings 8,736 Capital 50,994 Loan from P. Holland 40,000 Bad Debts 1,314 Provision for bad debts as at 31 December 2010 658 241,468 241,468 The following should be considered on 31 December 2011 1) Stock $36,420 a) Expenses owing b) Sundry expenses $62 2) Motor expenses $33 3) prepayments a) Rates $166 4) Provision for bad debts to be reduced to $580 5) Depreciation for motors to be $2,100 for the year 6) Part of the premises were let to a tenant who owed $250 at 31 December 2011 7) Loan interest owing to P. Holland, $4,000 Prepare the Income Statement and Balance Sheet as at 31 December 2011. Introduction to Accounting Page | 116
  • 118. Horizontal presentation of the Income Statement and Balance Sheet. MDAR Retailer Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2011 $ $ $ $ Opening Stock 30,816 Sales 120,320 Add Purchases 84,290 Less Sales Returns 1,384 118,936 Less Purchases Return 810 83,480 Add Carriage Inwards 309 COGAFS 114,605 Less Closing Stock 36,420 COGS 78,185 Gross Profit c/d 40,751 118,936 118,936 Less Expenses Gross Profit b/d 40,751 Motor Expenses 4,917 Add Revenue Add Motor expenses owing 33 4,950 Discount Received 506 Pay 16,184 Rent Receivable 250 Reduction in Provision Carriage Outwards 218 for Bad Debts 78 834 Discount Allowed 410 41,585 Repairs to Premises 1,383 Sundry Expenses 807 Add sundry expenses owing 62 869 Bad Debts 1,314 Rates and Insurance 2,896 Less prepaid rates and insurance 166 2,730 Loan Interest 4,000 Depreciation: Motor 2,100 Net Profit 7,427 41,585 41,585 Introduction to Accounting Page | 117
  • 119. MDAR Retailer Balance Sheet as at 31 December 2011 Non-Current Assets $ $ $ Capital $ $ $ Premises at cost 40,000 Balance as at 1 Jan 2011 50,994 Motor Vehicle at cost 11,160 Add Net Profit 7,427 Less Depreciation to date 5,960 5,200 58,421 45,200 Less Drawings 8,736 Current Assets 49,685 Stock 36,420 Non-Current Liability Debtors 31,640 Loan from P. Holland 40,000 Less Provision for Bad Debts 580 31,060 89,685 Prepaid Expense 166 Revenue owing 250 Current Liabilities Cash at bank 4,956 Creditors 24,320 Cash in hand 48 72,900 Expenses owing 4,095 28,415 118,100 118,100 Vertical presentation of the Income Statement and the Balance Sheet. The vertical presentation is the most common method of presenting final accounts today. In the vertical presentation of the balance sheet the working capital is indicated. This is calculated as: Working Capital = Current Assets - Current Liabilities The working capital indicates the liquidity of your business. This means the ability of your business to pay its debts when they become due. It gives an idea of the amount of funds available to run the business on a day to day basis. Introduction to Accounting Page | 118
  • 120. MDAR Retailer Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2011 $ $ $ Sales 120,320 Less Sales Returns 1,384 Net Sales 118,936 Opening Stock 30,816 Add Purchases 84,290 Less Purchases Return 810 83,480 Add Carriage Inwards 309 COGAFS 114,605 Less Closing Stock 36,420 COGS 78,185 Gross Profit 40,751 Add Revenue Discount Received 506 Rent Receivable 250 Reduction in Provision for Bad Debts 78 834 41,585 Less Expenses Motor Expenses 4,917 Add Motor expenses owing 33 4,950 Pay 16,184 Carriage Outwards 218 Discount Allowed 410 Repairs to Premises 1,383 Sundry Expenses 807 Add sundry expenses owing 62 869 Bad Debts 1,314 Rates and Insurance 2,896 Less prepaid rates and insurance 166 2,730 Loan Interest 4,000 Depreciation: Motor vehicles 2,100 34,158 Net Profit 7,427 Introduction to Accounting Page | 119
  • 121. MDAR Retailer Balance Sheet as at 31 December 2011 Non-Current Assets $ $ $ Premises at cost 40,000 Motor Vehicle at cost 11,160 Less Depreciation to date 5,960 5,200 45,200 Current Assets Stock 36,420 Debtors 31,640 Less Provision for Bad Debts 580 31,060 Prepaid Expense 166 Revenue owing 250 Cash at bank 4,956 Cash in hand 48 72,900 Current Liabilities Creditors 24,320 Expenses owing 4,095 28,415 Working Capital 44,485 89,685 Financed by Balance as at 1 January 2011 50,994 Add Net Profit 7,427 58,421 Less Drawings 8,736 49,685 Non-Current Liability Loan from P. Holland 40,000 89,685 Introduction to Accounting Page | 120
  • 122. TOPIC SUMMARY You have just examined the final account of a sole trader business. Remember that the final accounts are made up of the income statement and the balance sheet. The income statement can be further divided into a trading account and also a Profit & loss account. You would have noted that the information to draw up the final accounts is taken from your trial balance. Some of the information in your trial balance is transferred to the income statement and others to the balance sheet. A number of important information about your business is calculated in the income statement. This included the gross profit/loss and net profit/loss of your business. These indicate how well your business is running. Your balance sheet shows your assets in relation to your capital and liabilities. In the vertical presentation of the balance sheet you are able to calculate your working capital which is an indication of liquidity of your business. Introduction to Accounting Page | 121
  • 123. UNIT SUMMARY In this unit you had a look at adjustments that should be made to your accounts before your final accounts are prepared. These adjustments included adjustments for depreciation and provision for depreciation, bad debts and provision for bad debts, accrued and prepaid expenses and revenue and also at the different valuation of closing stock. All these adjustments are necessary if your final accounts are to present a true and fair view of your business. Once you would complete all the necessary adjustment your final accounts can be prepared. Your final accounts include your income statement and balance sheet. Your income statement comprise of your trading account where your gross profit/loss is calculated and your Profit & loss account where your net profit/loss is calculated. You also had a look at the two ways to present your final account the horizontal and vertical presentations. Now that you have completed the final accounts for a sole trader you will now continue by analysing and interpreting these financial statements and have a look at the control systems of a business in Unit 4. UNIT REFERENCES Austen, D., Ellis, D., et al (2011). Principles of Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom, Nelson Thornes Ltd. Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations. Macmillan Publishers Ltd. Whitcomb, A., & Clarke, G., (202). Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom, Heinemann Educational Publishers Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.). England, Pearson Education Limited CliffsNotes.com. Depreciation of Operating Assets. 18 Apr 2011 http://www.cliffsnotes.com/study_guide/topicArticleId-21081,articleId-21076.html http://docs.globaltext.terry.uga.edu:8095/anonymous/webdav/Accounting%20Principles/A ccounting%20Principles%20Vol.%201.pdf Introduction to Accounting Page | 122
  • 124. UNIT FOUR – ANALYSING/INTERPRETING FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS INTRODUCTION In this unit you will analyse and interpret the information in the financial statements. Earlier you learnt that the financial statements are used by different persons for various reasons. You can tell a lot about a business by looking at its financial statements, however to get a true picture of the performance of your business these record can be further analysed by the use of different ratios and formulas. We would have a more in-depth look at the financial statements of a business in this unit. You will also have a look at control systems that business put in place to monitor various aspects of their business OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this unit you will be able to: 1. identify ratios that can analyse the performance of sole trader business; 2. state he formula to be used when calculating accounting ratios; 3. calculate ratios based on the end of period financial statements; 4. calculate and analyse ratios on profitability, liquidity and efficiency to assess your business performance; 5. employ accounting ratios to calculate missing figures in financial statements; 6. explain why the petty cash book is used; 7. describe the imprest system; 8. list the need for control accounts; 9. examine the double entry aspect of control accounts; 10. reconcile cash book balances with bank statement balances; 11. state the reasons for preparing bank reconciliation statement; 12. list the functions of the payroll; 13. calculate employees’ pay using various methods; 14. distinguish between statutory and non-statutory deductions; 15. complete the payroll and wage documents from time cards; 16. distinguish between the different types of errors; and 17. correct errors using the journal. UNIT READINGS The instructor will provide a list of readings. ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions. Introduction to Accounting Page | 123
  • 125. TOPIC 4.1 ACCOUNTING RATIOS INTRODUCTION There are a number of ratios used to analyse and interpret the performance of a business. They are valuable means of comparing the performance of your business. These ratios can be classified as trading account ratios, profit and loss ratios and balance sheet ratios. In this topic we will examine each of these ratios. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to: 1. identify ratios that can be used to analyse the performance of your business; 2. calculate ratios based on the end of year financial statements; 3. state the formulas to be used when calculating accounting ratios; and 4. calculate and analyse ratios on profitability, liquidity and efficiency to assess a business’s performance. INTERPRETATION OF ACCOUNTS In order to assess the performance of business, financial information is recorded, classified and communicated to the different users of accounting information. The financial information can be evaluated by the use of accounting ratios. Ratios provide a valuable means of comparing the performance of a business From one year to the next With other similar businesses They enable changes in important aspects of a business’s performance to be pinpointed and quantified. If ratios are calculated every year, it is possible to see whether any significant trends are becoming apparent. (David, A., et al 2011) An important factor in a business is to ensure that it operates at a profit and that it can pay its creditors and expenses when they become due. The ability for a business to pay its debts when they become due is known as liquidity and the ability to make a profit is known as profitability. We will have a look at the profitability and liquidity ratios and which part of the financial statement should be used to calculate these ratios. Introduction to Accounting Page | 124
  • 126. TRADING ACCOUNT RATIOS Accounting ratios that uses the information from your trading account can be classified as trading account ratios. These ratios are 1. Margin which is gross profit is shown as a percentage of selling price Gross Profit x 100 Selling Price 2. Mark-up is gross profit shown as a percentage of cost price Gross Profit x 100 Cost Price 3. Rate of stock turnover or stock turn measures quickly a business sells its goods without losing its profitability. Cost of goods sold = stock turnover Average stock Average stock = opening stock + closing stock 2 4. Gross profit as percentage of sales this measures the amount of gross profit from ever $100 of sales Gross Profit x 100 Sales The gross profit as a percentage of sales and rate of stock turnover ratios are ratios that measures the profitability of a business. Example 4.1 A business’s trading account include the following information Trading Account For the year ended 31 December 2010 $ $ $ Sales 240,000 Opening Stock 16,000 Add Purchases 178,000 194,000 Less Closing Stock 14,000 180,000 Gross Profit 60,000 Introduction to Accounting Page | 125
  • 127. Margin Gross Profit x 100 60,000 x 100 25% Selling Price 240,000 Mark-up Gross Profit x 100 60,000 x 100 33 1/3 % Cost Price 180,000 Rate of Stock Cost of goods sold 180,000 12 times Turnover Average stock 15,000 Gross Profit as a Gross Profit x 60,000 25 % percentage of Sales 100 240,000 Sales PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT RATIOS Accounting ratios classified as profit and loss account ratios are 1. Net profit as a percentage of sales this shows how much net profit has been made for every $100 of sales. Net Profit x 100 Sales This ratio takes into account the expenses incurred and shows the amount of profit remaining. Changes in this ratio can be linked to Changes in the gross profit/sales percentage Changes in the expenses. 2. Expenses to sales ratio Expenses x 100 Sale Introduction to Accounting Page | 126
  • 128. Example 4.2 A business’s total sales for the year ended 31 December 2010 was $400,000. Its Profit and Loss included the following information. $ $ $ Gross Profit 140,000 General expenses 24,000 Wages 82,000 106,000 Profit 34,000 Net Profit as Net Profit x 100 34,000 x 100 Percentage of sales Sales 400,000 8.5% Expenses as Expenses x 100 Percentage of Sales Sales 106,000 x 100 26.5% 400,000 BALANCE SHEET RATIOS Manager uses different information to determine the performance of the business. The ratios that analyse the balance sheet are 1. Current ratio Current Assets Current Liabilities This shows the relationship between the current assets and the current liabilities. It determines the amount of money the business has to pay its debts as they become due. The ability of a business to pay its debts when they become due is called liquidity. The business will have liquidity problems if this ratio is below 2:1. 2. Acid Test Ratio Current Assets – Stock Current Liabilities The acid test ratio also measures the liquidity of a business since it measures the amount of liquid assets it has to pay its current liabilities 3. Return on Capital Employed Profit x 100 Capital Invested This ratio compares the amount of profit made in relation to the amount of money invested into the business. Introduction to Accounting Page | 127
  • 129. 4. Debtors Ratio Debtors x 12 Sales The debtor’s ratio measures how long the debtors take to pay what they owe to the business. 5. Creditors Ratio Creditors x 12 Purchases This measures how long it takes the business to pay the debts owed to its suppliers within a year. Example 4.3 J. Richardson Retail Store Balance Sheet as at 31 December 2011 is as follows: J. Richardson Retail Store Balance Sheet As at 31 December 2011 Fixed Assets $ $ Equipment at cost 10,000 Less Depreciation to date 8,000 2,000 Current Assets Stock 15,000 Debtors 25,000 Bank 5,000 45,000 Less Current Liabilities Creditors 5,000 40,000 42,000 Financed by: Capital 38,000 Add Net Profit 10,000 48,000 Less Drawings 6,000 42,000 The following information is also available Sales $80,000 Purchases $50,000 Net Profit $10,000 Introduction to Accounting Page | 128
  • 130. Current ratio Current Assets 45,000 9:1 Current liabilities 5,000 Current Assets – Stock 30,000 6:1 Acid Test Ratio Current Liabilities 5,000 Profit x 100 10,000 x 100 25% Return on Capital Invested (38,000 + 42,000)÷2 Capital Employed Debtors Ratio Debtors x 12 25,000 x 12 3.75 Sales 80,000 months Creditors Ratio Creditors x 12 5,000 x 12 1.2 Purchases 50,000 months TOPIC SUMMARY You have completed the examination of your financial records with the use of accounting ratios. You would have learnt that ratios shows and identifies different performances of your business. You can now compare how your business performs from one period to the next and with similar businesses. They inform you and guide you to make necessary changes to improve your business performance. Introduction to Accounting Page | 129
  • 131. TOPIC 4.2 CORRECTION OF ERRORS INTRODUCTION A Trial Balance is drawn up at the end of the accounting period using the balances on each account in the ledgers. Even thought the trial balance totals may agree there are instances where errors may be made in the recording of accounting entries. In this topic you will look at those errors that may occur that do not affect the trial balance and agreement and how these errors are corrected. We will also look at those errors that will affect the agreement of the trial balance totals and how to correct these errors. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to: 1. understand that there are two types of errors; 2. appreciate that errors are identified after a period of time; 3. distinguish between the different types of errors; and 4. use the journals to correct errors. TYPES OF ERRORS There are two types of errors. 1. Those that affect the trial balance totals agreement. 2. Those that don’t affect the trial balance agreement. Whenever these errors are identified they are corrected by using the journal. You have learnt how the trial balance is used to check the arithmetic accuracy of the financial records. You will how learn that not all errors are revealed in the trial balance. We will now look at these errors in more detail Introduction to Accounting Page | 130
  • 132. Errors that don’t affect the trial balance agreement Your trail balance can still balance even though errors were made in your records. These errors are 1. Errors of Commission – this occurs when the correct amount is entered in the records but in the wrong persons account. Example V. Peters paid us $150 by Cheque on 7th September 2011. This is correctly entered in the cash book, but was entered by error in A. Peters. The error was found on 30 September 2011. This will now have to be corrected and requires two entries Debit A Peters’ Account To cancel out the error on the credit side of that account Credit V Peters Account To enter the amount in the correct account A Peters 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 31 V Peters: Error Corrected 150 Sept 7 Bank 150 V. Peters 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 1 Balance b/d 150 Sept 31 Cash entered in error In A. Peters account 150 Introduction to Accounting Page | 131
  • 133. 2. Errors of Principle – occurs when an item is entered in the wrong type of account. Eg. A fixed asset entered in an expense account. Example You purchase motor car for $6,700 by cheque on 12 September 2011 has been debited in error to the motor expenses account. In the cash book it is shown correctly. This means that there has been both a debit of $6,700 and a credit of $6,700. The error is detected on 30 September 2011 and is corrected. To do so two entries are needed; Debit Motor Car Account to put the amount in the correct account Credit Motor Expenses to cancel the error previously made in the motor expenses account Motor Expenses 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 12 Bank 6,700 Sept 30 motor car (error corrected) 6,700 Motor Car 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 30 Bank (error corrected) 6,7000 3. Error of Omission – occurs when a transactions has been completely omitted from the books Example You sold goods to P. Jackson for $250 on 7th September 2011 but did not enter the transaction in the accounts. There were no debit and credit entries made. The error was identified on 30 September. The entries to correct it will be thus: Sales 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 30 P. Jackson 250 P. Jackson 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 30 Sales 250 Introduction to Accounting Page | 132
  • 134. 4. Error of Original Entry – occurs when an item is entered, but both debit and credit entries are of the same incorrect amount. Example Purchases of $150 to T Henry on 13 September 2011 have been entered as both a debit and credit of $125. The account would appear thus: T. Henry 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 13 Purchases 125 Purchases 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 13 T Henry 125 The error is found 30 September 2011, The entries to correct is are now shown: T. Henry 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 13 Purchases 125 Sept 30 purchases (error corrected) 25 Purchases 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 13 T Henry 125 Sept 30 T. Henry (error corrected) 25 Introduction to Accounting Page | 133
  • 135. 5. Compensating Errors – where two or more unrelated errors cancel each other out. Example In a case where incorrect totals has purchases of $7,900 and sales of $9,900. The purchases day book adds up to be $200 too much. In the same period, the sales day book also adds up to be $200 too much. If these were the only errors in your books, the trial balance totals would equal each other. Both totals would be wrong – they would both be $200 too much- but they would equal. In this case, the accounts would have appeared as follows: Sales 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 13 Total sales 9,900 Purchases 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 13 Total Purchases 7,900 When corrected, the accounts will appear as: Sales 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 30 Journal (error corrected) 200 Sept 13 Total sales 9,900 Purchases 2011 $ 2011 $ Sept 13 Total Purchases 7,900 Sept 30 Journal (error corrected) 200 The Journal entries to correct these two errors will be Journal 2011 DR CR $ $ Sept 30 Sales 200 Purchases 200 Correction of compensating error Introduction to Accounting Page | 134
  • 136. Errors that affect the trial balance agreement These errors will cause a difference in the trial balance totals. These errors are 1. Under-casting and over-casting – figures that are larger or smaller than they should be. 2. Transposition – that is figures turned around eg. 23 instead of 32 3. Entries made on the wrong side of accounts – that is a debit entry made instead of a credit entry. 4. Half the double entry omitted – only one part of the double entry completed When there is difference in the trial balance, the amount is transferred to the suspense account on the same side as the difference in the trial balance. A suspense account is opened to record the difference in the trial balance totals. When the errors are located they are first recorded in the journal and the correction is recorded in the suspense account. In order to correct these errors several entries are needed to make a correction, first entries to cancel the original entry which is wrong and second the entries that should have been made in the first place. Example Your Trial Balance on 31 December 2010 shows a difference of $350. It was a shortage on credit side. A suspense account is opened and the difference of $350 is entered on the credit side. On 30 September 2011 the error is found. You had received payment of $350 from V. Peters to close her account. It was correctly entered in the cash book, but it was not entered in V. Peters’ account. To correct the error, the account of V. Peters is credited with $350, as it should have been 2010, and the suspense account is debited with $350 so that the account can be closed. V. Peters 2011 $ 2011 $ Jan 1 Balance b/d 350 Sept 30 Bank 350 Suspense Account 2011 $ 2010 $ Sept 30 V. Peters 350 Dec 31 Difference per trial balance 350 Introduction to Accounting Page | 135
  • 137. Journal 2011 DR CR $ $ Sept 30 Suspense Account 350 V. Peters 350 Correction of non-entry of payment made by V. Peters account TOPIC SUMMARY You would have learnt that all errors cannot be identified from simply looking at your records. You would also learnt that all errors do not affect your Trial Balance total. Some errors are only identified after careful examination of your books. You would also realize that an error has occurred once the trial balance totals doesn’t agree. When this happens the difference on the trial balance is transferred to a suspense account. Once the error is identified it is corrected through the Journal and then the suspense account. Introduction to Accounting Page | 136
  • 138. TOPIC 4.3 PAYROLL INTRODUCTION With any business with employees one of its major expenses are the payment of wages and/or salaries to its workers. In this section we will look at how wages and salaries are calculated and their various deductions OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to: 1. Understand the function of the payroll. 2. Use various methods to calculate salaries. 3. Identify the difference between statutory and non-statutory deductions. 4. Complete the payroll and wage documents from time cards. Every business pays its employees’ wages and/or salaries for the labour they supply to carry out the business activity. Wages are paid weekly or forth nightly at a rate that considers the number of hours or number of pieces of work produced. Salaries are a fixed amount paid monthly no matter the amount of pieces produced or hours worked. METHODS OF CALCULATING PAY Wages can be calculated using various methods or a combination of methods. The main methods of calculating wages are; Flat rate – a basic rate is based on a standard number of hours. This agreed monthly salary or weekly wage. Piece rate – employees are paid based on the number of units produced during the pay period. Example JYPR Ltd manufactures chairs. There are several process involved in assembling the chairs. Employees are paid the following piece rates: Process 1: $2.00 per chair Process 2: $3.00 per chair Process 3: $4.00 per chair Elrie works in the assembly department, during the week ended 30 September 2011 he completed the following tasks: Process 1: 20 Process 2: 40 Process 3: 30 Introduction to Accounting Page | 137
  • 139. Elrie will be paid the following $ Process 1 20 x 2 40.00 Process 2 40 x 3 120.00 Process 3 30 x 4 120.00 Total 280.00 Time rate – is a fixed rate per hours is paid multiplied by the number of hours worked. Example Ann works part-time at a supermarket. Ann is pay $24 per hour. During the week ended 30 September 2011, Ann was employed for 17 hours. Ann will be paid a wage of 17 hours x $24 = $408 Overtime rate – any hours worked above the regular standard working hours are paid at a higher rate. Overtime rates can be charged as one and half, two times and three times the regular rates. Example Catina is paid $30 per hour working in a restaurant. Catina is contracted to work 35 hours per week. During the week ended 23 September 2011, she worked 39 hours. Overtime is paid at time and a half. Catina will be paid 35 hours x $30 per week = $1,050 per week During the week ended 23 September 2011, she will be paid $1,050 plus overtime Overtime payment = 4 hours x ($30 x 1.5) = 4 hours x $45 = $180 Wage for the week ended 23th September is $1,230 Introduction to Accounting Page | 138
  • 140. Commission – is based on the amount of sales made by the employee. It could be paid in addition to the basic salary or instead of a salary. It is normally calculated as a percentage of the employee’s sale. Example Ulrick works in a department store. He is paid $3 000 per month, but is also entitled to a commission of 1.5% based on his department’s monthly sales. His department’s monthly sales were. $ August 2011 32 000 September 2011 27 400 Ulrick will be paid as follows Basic Salary Commission Total $ $ $ August 2011 3,000 1.5% x $32,000 = $480 3,480 September 2011 3,000 1.5% x 27,400 = $411 3,411 CALCULATING EMPLOYEES EARNINGS Each employee receives a pay slip at the end of their pay period. A pay slip shows the calculation of the employees’ gross pay their deductions and their net pay. Gross pay is the amount due to the employees at the end of their pay period for the work done before any deductions. Once the gross pay is calculated there are some statutory and non statuary deductions that must be deducted before we arrive at the net pay. Statutory deductions are those deductions that are required by law. These deductions includes 1. Income tax – many countries have a tax system known as the Pay As You Earn (PAYE). The amount paid in tax increases the higher your gross pay is. However most system allows a part of the gross to be exempt from tax (tax fee allowance) any amount above that allowance would be taxable 2. National Insurance or Social Security contributions – this deduction is paid to provide funds to provide income to workers during illness, injury, retirement etc. 3. Pension Plan contribution – some employers require employees to contribute to a scheme that will ensure that when they retire they are entitled to receive a pension from their employers as well from the state. Introduction to Accounting Page | 139
  • 141. Non-statutory deductions as those deductions that employees may request be made to meet their personal needs. Examples of non-statutory deductions are: Membership fees to clubs. Membership to union (union dues). Health insurance. Life insurance. Contribution to credit unions. SOURCE DOCUMENTS TO CALCULATE PAYROLL The information to calculate the employees earning are derived from various documents: Personal Record Card – this includes information about the employees. This information includes the employee’s correct name, address, contact number, tax numbers and other information. Employees Earning Records – is a history of the employees pay rates, gross pay, deductions, net pay over a period of time. Example JYPR LTD EMPLOYEE EARNING RECORD Name__________________________________ Employee No. _____________ Position ___________ Address ________________________________ Birth Date ______________________ Sex _________ _______________________________________ Marital Status _________ No. Of Dependents _______ Tel. No. ________________________________ NIS # ________________ Starting Date ____________ ACCUMULATED PERIOD OR YEAR TO NAT. INCOME LIFE CREDIT TOTAL NET ENDED DATE EARNINGS REGULAR OVERTIME GROSS INS. TAX INS. UNION DEDUC. PAY $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ Introduction to Accounting Page | 140
  • 142. Time Card – shows the number of hours worked by the employees. It is used to calculate the total house worked during the period. They are used to clock in and out of the work place. Example JYPR LTD TIME CARD Employee’s Name: J. Jackson Work Period: Sept 21 to Sept 27 . Employee;s Number: 09234 Department: Sales . AM PM DAY IN OUT IN OUT Sunday 21 September 7:50 12:02 Monday 22 September 6:50 12:06 12:55 4:01 Tuesday 23 September 6:55 12:05 12:59 4:02 Wednesday 24 September 6:57 12:05 12:58 7:05 Thursday 25 September 6:52 12:03 12:55 7:00 Friday 26 September 6:59 12:02 12:58 4:01 Saturday 27 September 7:55 12:02 Time Sheet – are used by employees to record the overall attendance of the employees. Example JYPR LTD TIME SHEET Employee’s Name: J. Jackson Work Period: Sept 21 to Sept 27 . Employee’s Number: 09234 Department: Sales . AM PM Regular Overtime Total DAY IN OUT IN OUT Hours Hours Hours Sunday 21 Sept. 7:50 12:02 - 4 4 Monday 22 Sept. 6:50 12:06 12:55 4:01 8 - 8 Tuesday 23 Sept. 6:55 12:05 12:59 4:02 8 - 8 Wednesday 24 6:57 12:05 12:58 7:05 8 3 11 Sept. Thursday 25 Sept. 6:52 12:03 12:55 7:00 8 3 11 Friday 26 Sept. 6:59 12:02 12:58 4:01 8 - 8 Saturday 27 Sept. 7:55 12:02 - 4 4 Total 40 14 54 Introduction to Accounting Page | 141
  • 143. Employees’ Payroll Sheet is completed at the end of work period for all employees. Example If the employees of JYPR LTD regular work week is 40 hours at a rate of $30 per hour. They received time and quarter (1 ¼) for any overtime worked during the regular work week and time and half (1 ½) for any overtime worked on Saturdays and double time (2) for any overtime worked on Sundays. Calculate J Jackson gross pay for the period 21 – 27 September. Employees Payroll Register Employee Regular Overtime Gross Names No. Pay Week Saturday Sunday Total Pay J. Jackson 09234 2400 225 180 240 645 3 045 Payslip – is prepared for each employee, who receives it on “pay day”. The information on the employee earnings record is transferred to the payslip. Example PAYSLIP SEPTEMBER 27, 2011 Name Gross Income Life Credit Total Net Nat. Ins Pay Tax Ins. Union Deductions Pay J. Jackson 3 045 PAYROLL The payroll is the document that summaries for each employees. It shows all the information used to calculate the Net Pay. Example With the following information calculate the net pay JYPR Ltd employees National Insurance 2 ½ % of Gross Income tax 15% of gross pay less credit union contribution Life insurance 2% of gross pay Credit union 1% of gross pay Credit union = 1% x $3045 = 30.45 National Insurance 2 ½% x $3045 = $76.13 Income tax 15% x (3045 – 30.45) = 452.18 Life insurance 2 % x 3045 = 60.90 Introduction to Accounting Page | 142
  • 144. JYPR LTD PAYROLL REGISTER Accumulated Deductions Regular Overtime Gross Net Total or year to Nat Income Life Credit Employees hours hours pay Total Pay hours date Ins Tax Ins Union $ $ $ $ $ earnings $ $ $ $ J. Jackson 54 2 400 645 3 045 3 045.00 76.13 452.18 60.90 30.45 619.70 2 423.34 TOPIC SUMMARY It is important to note the different ways in calculating your employees’ wages and salary. There are both statuary and non-statutory deductions that are deducted from the wages and salaries of your employees. Statutory deductions are those deductions required by law. Non statutory are requested by the employee. The information for preparing the wages and salaries are taken from the time cards of the employees. Each employee should receive a copy of their payslip which provides them with information about their pay before deductions (gross pay) and the take home pay after deductions (net pay). Introduction to Accounting Page | 143
  • 145. TOPIC 4.4 BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT INTRODUCTION In this unit you will learn how to reconcile your cash book so that its balance aggress with the balance on your bank statement OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to: 1. Explain terms used on the bank statement. 2. Compare the cash book with the bank statement. 3. Update the cash book. 4. Prepare the bank reconciliation statement. BANK STATEMENTS AND THE CASH BOOK When you make or receive payment by cheques they are recorded in the bank column of your cash book. When these cheques are presented at you bank there would be a part of your monthly bank statement. A bank statement is a copy of the bank’s record of your account. The balances on you bank statement is calculated after each transaction this is the running balance of recording. Items on the debit side of the cash book (bank column) would be recorded on the credit side of the bank statement and vice versa. At the end of each month they would be items on your bank statement that is not recorded in your cash book and items in the cash book not in bank statements. Items on the bank statement that is not recorded in the cash book 1. Returned cheques (dishonoured cheques) – these are cheques that are returned by the bank for various reasons. Reasons which include insufficient funds or word and figures on the cheque do not agree. On it written refer to drawer. 2. Bank charges – fees that the bank charges for operating your account. 3. Interest received – from the bank. 4. Standing order – is an agreement between you and your bank for it to make monthly payments, of fixed amount on a specific date, on your behalf. 5. Credit transfer – you may instruct your bank to pay a supplier on your behalf. Items in the Cash Book that is not recorded on the Bank Statement 1. Unrecorded Deposits - deposits made to the bank that is not recorded on your bank statement 2. Un-presented cheques - cheques written but has not been presented to bank for cashing. You can use either of two methods to reconcile your cash book with your bank statement after revising your Cash book. Introduction to Accounting Page | 144
  • 146. 1. Begin with balance on your revise cash book the end total should be the balance on your bank statement 2. Begin with the balance on bank statement with the end balance being the balance on you revised cash book. Step to reconciliation your cash book and bank statement. 1. Tick the items that are recorded on both your bank statement and your cash book 2. Revise you cash book by including the items in your bank statement that are not in your cash book and then find the new balance for your cash book. 3. You can now use either method and complete you reconciliation. The bank reconciliation statement would be as follows: Name of business Bank Reconciliation as at (date) Balance per revised cash book Add unpresented cheques Less unrecorded deposits Balance per bank statement OR Name of business Bank Reconciliation as at (date) Balance per bank statement Add unrecorded deposits Less unpresented cheques Balance per revised cash book Introduction to Accounting Page | 145
  • 147. Let now look at an example. Example The following is an extract from the bank statement and cash book (bank column) of JYPR Ltd for the month of September 2011 Cash Book (bank column only) Sept 1 Balance 800 Sept 3 Insurance (chk 0892) 360 Sept 16 Sales 890 Sept 11 Drawings (chk 0893) 250 Sept 27 Sales 750 Sept 19 E. Peters (chk 0894) 440 Sept 27 Electricity (chk 0895) 220 Sept 31 Balance c/d 1,170 2,440 2,440 Oct 1 Balance b/d 1,170 Peters Bank Ltd Bank Statement for JYPR Ltd Date Details Dr Cr Balance 2011 $ $ $ Sept 1 Balance 800 Cr Sept 5 Anjo Insurance plc (0892) 360 440 Cr Sept 5 Direct Debit iMoble co. 230 210 Cr Sept 14 Chk 0893 250 40 Dr Sept 18 Sundries 890 850 Cr Sept 21 Standing Order Aires Property Ltd 280 570 Cr Sept 24 Credit Transfer – Ann Carter 480 1,050 Cr Sept 27 Bank charges 80 970 Cr The closing balance shown in two documents are different; cash book balance is $1,170, but the bank statement shows a balance of $970. Let begin by ticking off the items that are in both the cash book and the bank statement. Cash Book (bank column only) Sept 1 Balance  800 Sept 3 Insurance (chk 0892)  360 Sept 16 Sales  890 Sept 11 Drawings (chk 0893)  250 Sept 27 Sales 750 Sept 19 E. Peters (chk 0894) 440 Sept 27 Electricity (chk 0895) 220 Sept 31 Balance c/d 1,170 2,440 2,440 Oct 1 Balance b/d 1,170 Introduction to Accounting Page | 146
  • 148. Peters Bank Ltd Bank Statement for JYPR Ltd Date Details Dr Cr Balance 2011 $ $ $ Sept 1 Balance 800 Cr Sept 5 Anjo Insurance plc (0892) 360 440 Cr Sept 5 Direct Debit iMoble co. 230 210 Cr Sept 14 Chk 0893 250 40 Dr Sept 18 Sundries 890 850 Cr Sept 21 Standing Order Aires Property Ltd 280 570 Cr Sept 24 Credit Transfer – Ann Carter 480 1,050 Cr Sept 27 Bank charges 80 970 Cr You will now revise or update your cash book on the 1st October 2011. This is done by including in the cash book the items from the bank statement that are not included Revised Cash Book (bank column only) Sept 1 Balance 800 Sept 3 Insurance (chk 0892) 360 Sept 16 Sales 890 Sept 11 Drawings (chk 0893) 250 Sept 27 Sales 750 Sept 19 E. Peters (chk 0894) 440 Sept 27 Electricity (chk 0895) 220 Sept 31 Balance c/d 1,170 2,440 2,440 Oct 1 Balance b/d 1,170 Oct 1 Direct Debit iMobile co. 230 Oct 1 Credit Transfer 480 Oct 1 Standing Order 280 Oct 1 Bank charges 80 Oct 1 Balance c/d 1,060 1,650 1,650 Oct 1 Balance b/d 1,060 JYPR Ltd cash book is now updated. You can now prepare the bank reconciliation statement. To do this you include the items in the cash book that was not recorded in the bank statement. Introduction to Accounting Page | 147
  • 149. JYPR Ltd Bank Reconciliation Statement as at 1st October 2011 $ $ Balance per revised cash book 1,060 Add Un-presented cheques E. Peters (chk 0894) 440 Electricity (chk 0895) 220 660 1,720 Less unrecorded deposits 750 Balance per bank statement 970 OR JYPR Ltd Bank Reconciliation Statement as at 1st October 2011 $ $ Balance per bank statement 970 Add unrecorded deposits 750 1,720 Less Unpresented cheques E. Peters (chk 0894) 440 Electricity (chk 0895) 220 660 Balance per revised cash book 1,060 There are instances where both your bank statement and your cash book may record an overdraft. When this occurs you follow the same method to revise your cash book but your reconciliation statement would be done as follows. Name of business Bank Reconciliation as at (date) Overdraft per revised cash book Add un-recorded deposits Less un-presented cheques Overdraft per bank statement OR Name of business Introduction to Accounting Page | 148
  • 150. Bank Reconciliation as at (date) Overdraft per bank statement Add un-presented cheques Less un-recorded deposit Overdraft per revised cash book TOPIC SUMMARY You would have learnt that there are various reasons why the balance in your cash book would be different from the balances on the Bank Statement. Once you have identified the these items you then revise or update your cash book by including in your cash book those items in your bank statement that are not in your cash book. The new total in your cash book is reconciled with your bank statement. You reconcile by starting with either the revised cash book balance or the bank statement balance. Introduction to Accounting Page | 149
  • 151. TOPIC 4.5 PETTY CASH BOOK AND THE IMPREST SYSTEM INTRODUCTION Most business make small cash payments for goods and services in there day to day operations. These payments are too small to incur the bank changes for writing a cheque. This is what a petty cash system is used for making these small payments. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson you will be able to: 1. Write up a petty cash book. 2. Understand the Imprest system. PETTY CASH SYSTEM The petty cash system records small payments, leaving large sum for the cash book. The petty cash is usually kept by a junior clerk. An imprest system is used where fixed sum, or cash float is advanced by the cashier to the petty cashier. The total of the petty payments is refunded to the cashier at the end of the month, leaving the cashier with the same fixed or imprest amount in hand for the petty expenses of the following months. The petty cashier will produce the petty cash vouchers as evidence of the amount spent. The petty cash in hand should them be equal to the original amount with which the period started. This amount is called the “float”. The receipt column is on the debit side of the petty cash book. On the credit side the date and details of each payment is record. Each payment is not only recorded in the total column but also in the analysis column. Analysis column are columns that indicate the various expenditure headings. In order for employees to access the petty cash, a petty cash voucher has to be completed indicating what the funds will be used for and signed by requesting employee and approved by a supervisor or senior cashier. Introduction to Accounting Page | 150
  • 152. Let us look at a worked example. Below are two petty cash vouchers for the month of October 2011 as completed by the petty cashier of JYPR Ltd. No. 10 . No. 7 . PETTY CASH VOUCHER PETTY CASH VOUCHER Date 29 Oct. 2011 Date 20 Oct. 2011 Amount Amount For what required $ For what required $ Petrol 32.00 Postage 20.00 32.00 20.00 Signature __________J. Jackson________ Signature __________V._Peters________ Approved by _____M. Richardson ___ Approved by _____M. Richardson ___ Petty cash vouchers were also completed for the following transactions. 2011 $ Oct 1 The cashier gave $600 as float to the petty cashier Oct 2 Petrol 22 Oct 3 L. Thomas – travelling expenses 24 Oct 10 Refund C Charles sales ledger account over paid 65 Oct 12 Cleaning expenses 50 Oct 15 J Harris – travelling 75 Oct 20 settle of P Phillip’s account in the purchases ledger 35 Oct 22 petrol 30 Oct 27 Cleaning expenses 65 Oct 30 Postage 25 The petty cash book for October 2011 would be as follows: Introduction to Accounting Page | 151
  • 153. Petty Cash Book Voucher Cleaning Motor Travelling Ledger Ledger Receipts Folio Date Details No. Total Expenses Expenses Expenses Postage Folio Accounts $ 2011 $ $ $ $ $ $ 600 CB 1-Oct Cash 2-Oct Petrol 1 22 22 3-Oct L Thomas 2 24 24 10-Oct C Charles 3 65 SL 65 12-Oct Cleaning expenses 4 50 50 15-Oct J Harris 5 75 75 20-Oct P Phillip 6 35 PL 35 20-Oct Postage 7 20 20 22-Oct Petrol 8 30 30 27-Oct Cleaning expenses 9 65 65 29-Oct Petrol 10 32 32 30-Oct Postage 11 25 25 443 115 84 99 45 100 31-Oct Balance c/d 157 GL GL GL GL 600 600 157 1-Nov Balance b/d 443 CB 1-Nov Cash Introduction to Accounting Page | 152
  • 154. The information in the petty cash book is then transferred to the various ledger accounts. Cash Book (Bank Column only) 2011 $ 2011 $ 1-Oct Petty Cash PCB 600 1-Nov Petty Cash PCB 443 General Ledger Motor Expenses 2011 $ 2-Oct Petty Cash PCB 22 22-Oct Petty Cash PCB 30 29-Oct Petty Cash PCB 32 Travelling Expenses 2011 $ 3-Oct Petty Cash PCB 24 15-Oct Petty Cash PCB 75 Cleaning Expenses 2011 $ 12-Oct Petty Cash PCB 50 27-Oct Petty Cash PCB 65 Postage 2011 $ 20-Oct Petty Cash PCB 20 30-Oct Petty Cash PCB 25 Sales Ledger C. Charles 2011 $ 2011 $ 10-Oct Petty Cash PCB 65 1-Oct Balance b/d 65 Purchases Ledger P. Phillip 2011 $ 2011 $ 20-Oct Petty Cash PCB 35 1-Oct Balance b/d 35 Introduction to Accounting Page | 153
  • 155. TOPIC SUMMARY You have just examined the petty book of a JYPR Ltd. The information recorded in the petty cash book is derived from the petty cash vouchers which must be completed and approved before funds can be disbursed. The petty cash funds (float) are disbursed by the petty cashier. At the end of each period the petty cashier reimbursed the amount of the float spent to start the new period. Introduction to Accounting Page | 154
  • 156. TOPIC 4.6 CONTROL ACCOUNTS INTRODUCTION Earlier you learned that certain errors were not revealed in the trial balance. In a large business you would have to check every item in every ledger. This is done with the control accounts. This ensures that it is only the ledgers whose control accounts does not balance that need detailed checking to find errors. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you will be able to: 1. Draw up sales ledger accounts. 2. Draw up purchase ledger accounts. 3. Know the sources of information for control accounts. CONTROL ACCOUNT PRINCIPLES Control accounts are based on simple principle. If the opening balance of an account is known, together with the information on the additions and deductions entered in the account the closing balance can be calculated. The information to draw up control accounts are Sales ledger control Source Opening debtors List of debtors balances drawn up at end of previous period Credit sales Total from the sales journal Return inwards Total from returns inwards journal Cheques received Cash book bank column Cash received Cash book cash column Discount allowed Total of discount allowed column in the cash book Closing debtors List of debtors’ balances drawn up at the end of the period Purchases Ledger Control Source Opening creditors List of creditors balances drawn up at end of previous period Credit purchases Total from the purchases journal Return outwards Total from returns outwards journal Cheques paid Cash book bank column payments side Cash paid Cash book cash column payment side Discount received Total of discount received column in the cash book Closing creditors List of creditors’ balances drawn up at the end of the period Introduction to Accounting Page | 155
  • 157. Control Accounts are prepared in the form as an account with the totals of the debit entries in ledger on the left hand side of the control account, and the totals of the credit entries in the ledger on the right hand side. Worked Example Ann runs a small business selling computer parts to wholesalers. Since he has numerous debtors and creditors she keeps sales and purchases ledgers and maintains both sales and purchases control accounts. The following information is available from Ann’s books for 31 December 2010. 2011 $ 1-Dec sales ledger debit balances 4,756 1-Dec sales ledger credit balances 350 1-Dec purchases ledger credit balances 3,681 1-Dec purchases ledger debit balances 287 Totals for the month ending December 31, 2011 cash sales 6,743 bank sales 9,838 cash purchases 4,231 cheques and cash received from customers 11,742 discount allowed 618 return inwards 371 cheques paid to suppliers 6,000 petty cash paid to suppliers 120 discount received 364 return outwards 278 bad debts written off 446 cheques refunded to customers 280 Dishonoured cheques 194 sales ledger credit set-off with the purchases ledger 335 sales ledger debit balances 2,335 purchase ledger debit balances 165 purchase ledger credit balances 4,021 Let’s look at the solution for this question. Introduction to Accounting Page | 156
  • 158. Ann Sales Ledger Control Account For December 2011 2011 $ 2011 $ 1-Dec balance b/d 4,756 1-Dec balances b/d 350 31- 31- Dec sales 10,967 Dec Cheques and Cash received 11,742 cheques refunded 280 discount allowed 618 dishonoured cheques 194 return inwards 371 bad debts written off 446 sales ledger credit set off 335 balances c/d 2,335 16,197 16,197 1-Jan Balance b/d 2,335 Ann Purchases Ledger Control Account For December 2011 2011 $ 2011 $ 1-Dec balance b/d 287 1-Dec balances b/d 3,681 31- 31- Dec cheques paid 6,000 Dec Purchases 7,559 cheques refunded 120 Balances c/d 165 discount received 364 return outwards 278 sales ledger set off 335 balance c/d 4,021 11,405 11,405 1-Jan Balance b/d 165 1-Jan balance b/d 4,021 Introduction to Accounting Page | 157
  • 159. UNIT REFERENCES Austen, D., Ellis, D., et al (2011). Principles of Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom, Nelson Thornes Lted. Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations. Macmillan Publishers Ltd. Whitcomb, A., & Clarke, G., (202). Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom, Heinemann Educational Publishers Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.). England, Pearson Education Limited Introduction to Accounting Page | 158
  • 160. UNIT SUMMARY In unit four you were able to use different methods to analyse and interpret the financial statement of the business. You looked at accounting ratio that are useful to compare a business with another or with one period to another. You also examined errors that may occur in financial records and how to identify and correct these errors. You also looked a payroll system, how to reconcile your cash book with your bank statement and how control accounts are also used to identify errors in your books. Introduction to Accounting Page | 159
  • 161. UNIT FIVE – FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF OTHER ORGANIZATIONS UNIT INTRODUCTION So far we have look at the complete accounting records of a sole trader. In this unit we would take a introductory look at the accounts of different forms of business such as non- profit organizations, partnership and company. We will begin this unit by taking a look at incomplete records of sole traders and how the financial positions of these can be determined from these incomplete records. UNIT OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this unit you should be able to: 1. Draw up a trading and profit and loss account and balance sheet from records not kept on a double entry system. 2. Deduce the figures of sales and purchases form incomplete records. 3. Draw up income and expenditure accounts and balance sheets for non-trading organizations. 4. Calculate profit and losses from special activities and incorporate them into the final accounts. 5. Determine the financial positions of these non-trading organizations. 6. Understand exactly what a partnership is. 7. What are the main features of a partnership agreement. 8. Draw up final accounts for a partnership. 9. Understand exactly how limited companies differ from other organizations. 10. Calculate how distributable profits are available for dividends are divided between the different classes of shares. 11. Realize the differences between shares and debentures. 12. Draw up the trading and profit and loss accounts for a limited company. 13. Draw up a balance sheet for a limited company. UNIT READINGS The instructor will provide a list of readings. ASSIGNMENTS AND ACTIVITIES The instructor will provide guidance on the type of assignments and instructions. Introduction to Accounting Page | 160
  • 162. TOPIC 5.1 SINGLE ENTRY AND INCOMPLETE RECORDS TOPIC INTRODUCTION We have been able thus far to prepare final accounts of sole traders who keeps a complete set of records. However many small business do not keep complete records and may have difficult determining if there business is making a profit or a loss. In this topic will look at these incomplete records. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Draw up a trading and profit and loss account and balance sheet from records not kept on a double entry system. 2. Deduce the figures of sales and purchases form incomplete records. RECORDS KEEPING Many small businesses do not keep proper financial records which makes it difficult at first glance to determine the financial position of that business. Even with these incomplete records you are still able to determine whether or not this business is making a profit or loss. However there are a couple of things you must remember before you continue. Firstly remember that profit increases capital. As you determined from the balance sheet of sole trader Net Profit = closing capital - Opening capital In the balance you are able to determine this year’s capital by doing the following calculations Opening Capital + Profit - Drawings = closing Capital Usually when using incomplete records you are given two year’s information to derive information about that business. The first year’s information is used to draw up a statement of affairs to calculate the opening capital of the business. The second year’s information is used to determine if the business is making a profit or loss. Let look at a worked example. J. Anderson kept records of her business transactions in a single entry form. Her bank account for the year 2010 is as follows: Introduction to Accounting Page | 161
  • 163. $ $ Balance 1.1.2010 1,890 cash withdrawn from bank 5,400 Receipts from debtors 44,656 trade creditors 31,695 Loan from T. Hughes 2,000 rent 2,750 Rates 1,316 Drawings 3,095 Sundry expenses 1,642 Records of cash paid were: sundry expenses $122, trade creditors $642. Cash sales amounted to $698; cash drawings were $5,289. The following information is also available: 31.12.2009 31.12.2010 $ $ Cash in hand 48 93 Trade creditors 4,896 5,091 Debtors 6,013 7,132 Rent owing - 250 Rates in advance 282 312 Motor van (at valuation) 2,800 2,400 Stock 11,163 13,021 We begin by calculation the capital at the end of 2009. This is done by drawing up a Statement of Affairs as at 31 December 2009. J. Anderson Statement of Affairs As at 31 December 2009 Fixed Assets $ $ Motor Van 2,800 Current assets Stock 11,163 Debtors 6,013 Bank 1,890 Cash 48 Rates prepaid 282 19,396 Less current liabilities Creditors 4,896 14,500 17,300 . Financed by Capital (difference) 17,300 17,300 Introduction to Accounting Page | 162
  • 164. You can now prepare total debtors and total creditors account. The total creditors account will be used to calculate the purchases figure and the total debtors account to calculate the sales figure. Total Creditors’ Account $ $ Cash 642 Balances b/d 4,896 Bank 31,695 Purchases (missing figures) 32,532 Balance c/d 5,091 ____________ 37,428 37,428 Total Debtors’ Account $ $ Balances b/d 6,013 Receipts: Bank 44,656 Sales (missing figure) 46,473 cash 698 Balances c/d 7,132 52,486 52,486 Cash Book Details Cash Bank Details Cash Bank $ $ $ $ Balance b/d 48 1,890 Cash C 5400 Receipt from debtors 44,656 Trade Creditors 642 31,695 cash sales 698 rent 2,750 Loan from Carter 2000 rates 1,316 Bank c 5,400 drawings 5,289 3,095 sundry expenses 122 1,642 Balance c/d 93 2,648 6,146 48,546 6,146 48,546 Introduction to Accounting Page | 163
  • 165. J. Anderson Trading and Profit and Loss Account For the year ended 31 December 2010 $ $ Sales 46,473 Less cost of goods sold Opening Stock 11,163 Add Purchases 32,532 43,695 Less closing stock 13,021 30,674 Gross Profit 15,799 Less Expenses Rent (2,750 + 250) 3,000 Rates (1,315 + 282 -312) 1,286 Sundry expenses 1,764 Depreciation: Motor Van 400 6,450 Net Profit 9,349 TOPIC SUMMARY You would have realized that you are still able to determine the profit or loss from a business that don’t keep complete records. The basic information you are still able to determine the profitability of a business and prepare final accounts of that business. Introduction to Accounting Page | 164
  • 166. TOPIC 5.2 RECEIPTS AND PAYMENTS ACCOUNT TOPIC INTRODUCTION So far we have only look at business that aim is to make a profit. However there a businesses and organizations whose may interest are not to make a profit but to provide a service. We will now have a look at these not profit making businesses. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Draw up income and expenditure accounts and balance sheets for non-trading organizations. 2. Calculate profit and losses from special activities and incorporate them into the final accounts. 3. Determine the financial positions of these non-trading organizations. NON-PROFIT ACCOUNTS Organizations such as schools, clubs and churches do not have trading and profit and loss accounts drawn up as their main purpose is not trading or profit making. The final accounts prepared for these organizations are Receipts and Payments account in place of a Cash Book and the Income and Expenditure Account in place of the trading and profit and loss accounts. The same rules that a apply for the preparation and use of the cash book and trading and profit and loss account still applies to the receipt and payment accounts and the income and expenditure accounts. There are some other differences in the terms used. Profit Making Business Terms Non-Profit Making Organizations Terms Trading And Profit And Loss Accounts Income And Expenditure Accounts Net Profit Surplus Of Income Over Expenditure Net Loss Excess Of Expenditure Over Income Capital Accumulated Fund Accumulated fund = Assets - Liabilities There are instances where non-profit making organization will hold functions or activities to make profit. A trading account for this activity will have to draw up to determine if a profit or loss was made from the activity. That profit or loss is then transferred to the income and expenditure account. Many non-profit organization generate income by charging there members fees to be a part of the organization (subscriptions or membership fees), they Introduction to Accounting Page | 165
  • 167. may also charge new members entrance fees and they may also receive donations from other groups or organizations. Let us look at worked example. On 31 December 2011 the following information for the Sugar Bridge Social Club is made available to you. Balances on the 1st January 2011 $ Bank 3,070 Subscriptions in arrears for 2010 290 Subscription received in advance for 2009 420 Equipment 1,800 In respect of the year to 31 December 2010, the following information is given to you: Subscription received (including 2009 arrears) 5,920 Equipment bought 700 Groundsman’s wages 2,880 Sale of lottery tickets 1,090 Receipts from discos 7,510 Disco cost – including musicians 4,970 Teams’ travelling expenses 1,220 Competition prizes bought 580 Rent of buildings 2,170 Receipt for ground hire 900 Committee expenses 690 Donations from well-wishes 1,500 Subscription due but unpaid at 31 December 2009 amounted to $370. Depreciate equipment 10%. We begin by drawing up the subscription account Subscription Account $ $ Arrears b/d 290 Received in Advance b/d 420 Income and Expenditure account 6,420 cash 5,920 Arrears c/d 370 6,710 6,710 Introduction to Accounting Page | 166
  • 168. Sugar Bridge Social Club Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 21 December 2011 Receipts $ Payments $ Balance b/d 3,070 Equipment 700 Subscriptions 5,920 Pay 2,880 Sale of Lottery tickets 1,090 Disco costs 4,970 Receipts from discos 7,510 travel expenses 1,220 ground hire 900 competitions prizes 580 donations 1,500 committee expenses 690 rent of buildings 2,170 balance c/d 6,780 19,990 19990 Sugar Bridge Social Club Income and Expenditure Accounts For the year ended 31 December 2011 Income $ $ Subscriptions 6,420 Sale of lottery tickets 1,090 Receipts from discos 7,510 less cost of disco 4,970 2,540 ground hire 900 donations received 1,500 12,450 Less expenditure Groundsman's pay 2,880 team's travelling expenses 1,220 competitions prizes 580 rent 2,170 committee's expenses 690 depreciation 250 7,790 surplus of income over expenditure 4,660 Introduction to Accounting Page | 167
  • 169. TOPIC SUMMARY Not all businesses are trading or profit making business. Some businesses are in operation to other as service to the community. These non-profit organizations however do keep records of their financial transactions. Instead of a cash book they have a receipt and payments account, instead of capital they have accumulated fund and instead of trading and profit and loss account they have income and expenditure account. Introduction to Accounting Page | 168
  • 170. TOPIC 5.3 PARTNERSHIP ACCOUNTS INTRODUCTION A partnership is formed when two or more person decide to go into business together. The terms and conditions of the partnership should be determined by all parties before the business venture begins. The partnership act gives guidelines on the formation and dissolving of partnership agreement. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. Understand exactly what a partnership is. 2. Describe the main features of a partnership agreement. 3. Draw up final accounts for a partnership. PARTNERSHIP AGREEMENTS In the earlier units we had a look at sole trader businesses. However many businesses that are set up to make a profit have more than one owner. This could be: To raise the capital required to support business growth. Gain the experience and abilities needed to operate the business. Expand the product line. Share management. The Partnership Agreement A partnership arrangement has the following desire outcomes. It is formed to make a profit It must follow the laws as laid out in the partnership act Normally there is a minimum of two partners and a maximum of twenty partners Each partner (except for limited partners) must pay his or her share of any debts that the partnership cannot pay. Unlimited liability partners can be forced to sell their private possessions to pay their share of the debts. Limited liability partners are not liable for the debts of the business. They have the following characteristics 1. Their liability is limited to the capital they have put in the business. They can lose the capital but they cannot be asked for any more money 2. They are not allowed to take part in the management of the business A partnership agreement usually contains the following information The capital to be contributed by each partner Introduction to Accounting Page | 169
  • 171. The ratio in which profits or losses should be shared The rate of interest if any to be paid on capital before profits The rate of interest if any to be charged on partner’s drawings Salaries to be paid to partners Arrangements for the admission a new partners Procedures to be carried out when a partner dies or retires. If there is not agreement in place then the partnership act states that Profits and losses will be shared equally There is no interest on capital No interest is to be charged on drawings Salaries are not allowed Capital Accounts The value of the partners holding in the business will consist of: The original capital put into the business by the partner. His or her spare of the profits, interest on capital (if any), salary (if any), less interest on drawings (if any) and drawings themselves. This is the amount of undrawn profits. Each partner will have an account that contains both sets of information. The balance on this account would fluctuate each year as drawings rarely equal profits. This is called fluctuating Capital Account. On the other hand, we could keep the original capital figure in an account for each partner. These we would keep at the same figure and we would call these fixed capital accounts. We would should the share of profits and interest on capital for each partner in a separate account called Current Account. Introduction to Accounting Page | 170
  • 172. Jack and Jill are in partnership, sharing profits and losses equally. The following is their trial balance as at trial balance as at 30 June 2011. Dr. Cr. $ $ Building at cost 50,000 Fixtures at cost 11,000 Provision for depreciation: fixtures 3,300 Debtors 16,243 Creditors 11,150 Cash at bank 677 Stock at 30 June 2010 41,979 Sales 123,650 Purchases 85,416 Carriage outwards 1,288 Discount allowed 115 Loan interest: Williams 4,000 Office expenses 2,416 Wages 18,917 Bad debts 503 Provision for Bad debts 400 Loan from J. Williams 40,000 Capital: Jack 35,000 Jill 29,500 Current Accounts Jack 1,306 Jill 298 Drawings: Jack 6,400 Jill 5,650 ___________ 244,604 244,604__ Additional information for Jack and Jill. Stock 30 June 2011; $56,340. Expenses to be accrued: office expenses, $96; wages $200. Depreciate fixtures 10% on reducing balance basis. Depreciate buildings $1,000. Reduce provision for bad debts to $320. Partnership salary: $800 Jack. Interest on drawings $180, Jack, $120. Interest on capital account balances at 10%. Introduction to Accounting Page | 171
  • 173. Jack and Jill Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 30 June 2011 $ $ $ Sales 123,650 less cost of goods sold: Opening stock 41,979 Add Purchases 85,416 127,395 Less closing stock 56,340 71,055 gross profit 52,595 add reduction in Provision for bad debts 80 52,675 less expenses Pay (18,917 + 200) 19,117 Office expenses (2,416 + 96) 2,512 Carriage outwards 1,288 Discount Allowed 115 Bad Debts 503 Loan interest 4,000 Depreciation: fixtures 770 buildings 1,000 1,770 29,305 Net Profit 23,370 Add Interest on drawings Jack 180 Jill 120 300 less interest on capital: Jack 3,500 Jill 2,950 6,450 Less Salary: Jill 800 7,250 16,420 Balance of profits shared: Jack 8,210 Jill 8,210 16,420 Introduction to Accounting Page | 172
  • 174. Jack and Jill Balance Sheet as at 30 June 2011 Fixed Assets Cost Depreciation $ $ $ Buildings 50,000 1,000 49,000 Fixtures 11,000 4,070 6,930 61,000 5,070 55,930 Current Assets Stock 56,340 Debtors 16,243 Less Provision for bad debts 320 15,923 bank 677 72,940 Less current liabilities creditors 11,150 expenses owing 296 11,446 working capital 61,494 117,424 Less Long-term loan from J. Williams 40,000 77,424 Financed by capital Jack 35,000 Jill 29,500 64,500 Current Accounts Jack Jill Balance 1.7.2010 1306 298 Add interest on capital 3,500 2,950 Add Salary 800 - Add balance of profits 8,210 8,210 13816 11458 Less Drawings 6,400 5,650 Less Interest on Drawings 180 120 7,236 5,688 12,924 77,424 TOPIC SUMMARY When two or more individuals come together to do business a partnership is formed. Each partner is required to make contribution the business’ capital. A partner can have limited or unlimited liability but at least on partners should have unlimited liability. Introduction to Accounting Page | 173
  • 175. TOPIC 5.4 COMPANY ACCOUNTS TOPIC INTRODUCTION So you have looked at the financial records for a sole trade and a partnership business. You can examine the financial records of another form of business a company. Limited liability companies are needed because of the disadvantages of the partnership business. A partnership can have a maximum of twenty persons who may not be able to raise the capital needed to fund a very large corporation. Also if a partnership falls the partners can lose part or all of his private and business assets. Limited companies enable large businesses to be formed and help the owners safeguard their private assets TOPIC OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this topic you should be able to: 1. understand exactly how limited companies differ from other organizations 2. calculate how distributable profits are available for dividends are divided between the different classes of shares 3. realize the differences between shares and debentures 4. draw up the trading and profit and loss accounts for a limited company 5. draw up a balance sheet for a limited company TYPE OF COMPANY ACCOUNTS There are two types of limited companies public company and private company. A private company must have a minimum of two and a maximum of fifty members. It must also ask people to buy shares privately it cannot do so publicly. The public company can have at least seven members and can have as many members as it wants. It can also advertise its shares to the public for purchase. The capital of a limited liability company is divided into shares. To be a member or shareholder of a limited liability company you must purchase shares. Once the shareholder have paid up fully for their shares their liability in limited to those shares. If the company loses all its assets, the shareholder can only lose their shares. They cannot be forced to pay anything of their private money in respect of the company’s losses. An individual who purchase shares in a company is called a shareholder. A shareholder has the right to attend general meetings of the company and vote at these meetings. Shareholders use their vote to appoint directors who manages the business on behalf of the shareholders. A shareholder receives a share of the profits known as a dividend. A company is a “separate legal entity” from its members. This means that a company is not considered to be the same as its members. A company and sue and be sued by even its own shareholders. Introduction to Accounting Page | 174
  • 176. TYPES OF SHARES There are two types of shares: Preference shares – these get an agreed percentage rate of dividend before the ordinary shareholders. Ordinary shareholders- receive the reminder of the total profits available after preference share holders have received their dividend. Preferences Shares can be further divided into: Cumulative preference shares – these have an agreed maximum percentage dividend. Any shortage of dividend paid in one year can be carried forward to the next year. The arrears of cumulative preference share must be paid before ordinary shareholders receive their dividend. Non-cumulative preference shares – these receive a dividend up to an agreed percentage each year. Any shortage is lost and cannot be carried forward to the next year. Normally preferences as 5% preference shares the percentage that is shown is the rate of dividend that the shareholder will receive. So if a shareholder has $2000 5% preference share then they will receive 5% x 2000 = 100 in dividend. A company has different types of share capitals. Authorized share capital known as nominal or registered capital. It is the total of the share capital that the company is allowed to issue to the public. Issued share capital is the total of the actual share capital that has been offered to the public. Called-up share capital is the total amount asked for on all the shares. It may be only part of the amounts payable on each share. Uncalled share capital is the total amount that is to be received in future but which has not yet been asked for. Calls in arrears the total amount for which payments have been asked for but has not yet been paid by shareholders. Paid up capital is the total amount of share capital that has been paid for by shareholders. FINAL ACCOUNTS The trading account of a limited company is no different from that of a sole trader or a partnership. There are some differences in the profit and loss account. There are two main expenses that would only be found in company accounts. Introduction to Accounting Page | 175
  • 177. Directors’ remuneration. Directors are legal employees of company appointed by the shareholders. Their remuneration is charged to the main profit and loss account. Debenture interest. Debenture is the money a company receives as a loan. The lender is paid interest at an agreed percentage this is known as the debenture interest. Under the profit and loss account for a company is an appropriation account. The appropriation account shows how the net profits are to be used. The following is recorded in the appropriation account Credit side Net profit from the year – this the net profit brought down from the profit and loss account Balance brought forward from last year – any profits that remain from the last year is also brought forward. Debit side Transfer to reserves – directors may decide that some of the profits should not be included in the calculation of how much should be paid out as dividends. These profits are transferred to the reserve account. There may be a specific reason for the transfer, such as a need to replace fixed assets; in this case the amount would be transferred to a fixed assets replacement reserve. Or the reason may not be specific; in this case an amount would be transferred to a general reserve account. Amounts written off as goodwill. Amounts written off as preliminary expenses. When a company is formed there are many kinds of expenses concerned with its formation e.g. legal expense and various government taxes. Taxation payable on profits. Dividends out of the remainder of the profits. Balance carried forward to the next year. Introduction to Accounting Page | 176
  • 178. Worked Example C. Black Ltd has an authorized share capital of 90,000 ordinary shares of $1 each and 10,000 10% preference shares of $1 each. The company’s trial balance extracted after one year of trading was as follows on 31 December 2011. $ Net profit for 31 December 2011 11,340 Debentures 30,000 issued ordinary share capital, fully paid 60,000 issued preference share capital, fully paid 10,000 creditors 3,550 debtors 4,120 cash 2,160 stock 8,800 provision for bad debts 350 provision for depreciation: equipment 4,500 Equipment at cost 45,000 Premises at cost 50,000 bank (use missing figure) ? The directors decide to transfer $1,500 to the general reserve and to recommend a dividend of 12 ½ % on the ordinary shares. The preference dividend was not paid in until after January 2012 C. Black Ltd Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 December 2011 $ $ Net Profit b/d 11,340 Less Appropriation transfer to general reserve 1,500 preference dividend 10% 1,000 Proposed ordinary dividend 12 1/2 % 7,500 10,000 retained profits carried forward 1,340 Introduction to Accounting Page | 177
  • 179. C. Black Ltd Balance Sheet as at 31 December 2011 Fixed Assets $ $ $ Premises at cost 50,000 equipment at cost 45,000 less Depreciation 4,500 40,500 90,500 Current Assets Stock 8,000 Debtors 4,120 less provision 350 3,770 bank 9,660 cash 2,160 23,590 less current liabilities creditors 3,550 Proposed dividends 8,500 12,050 12,340 102,840 less long-term liability Debentures 30,000 72,840 Financed by share capital Authorized 100,000 Issued: 60,000 ordinary shares $1 60,000 60,000 preference shares $1 10,000 70,000 Reserves General reserve 1,500 Retained profits 1,340 2,840 72,840 TOPIC SUMMARY You have completed your examination of the final accounts of Limited Liability Company. Be sure to take not of the difference in their final accounts to the final accounts of sole trader and partnership businesses. Remember that a company raises capital by offer shares individuals. Shareholders will in turn receive dividend on the amount of shares that they purchase Introduction to Accounting Page | 178
  • 180. UNIT REFERENCES Austen, D., Ellis, D., et al (2011). Principles of Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom, Nelson Thornes Lted. Holdip, G., & Lamorell, C. (2010). Principles of Accounts for CSEC Examinations. Macmillan Publishers Ltd. Whitcomb, A., & Clarke, G., (202). Accounts for CSEC. United Kingdom, Heinemann Educational Publishers Wood, F., & Robinson, S. (2007). Principles of Accounts for the Caribbean (5th ed.). England, Pearson Education Limited Introduction to Accounting Page | 179
  • 181. UNIT SUMMARY Throughout this unit you were introduced of different forms of business and the financial records of these businesses. You should be able to identify the difference between a sole trader, partnership and company. You should also be able to identify how each form of business raises its capital. As you move along in your studies you would come upon complicated forms of these financial records. However before you move along be sure that you are able to master the information provided in this unit. Introduction to Accounting Page | 180
  • 182. FINAL ASSIGNMENT/PROJECT The final assignment/project will be provided by your instructor. The ideal project is should be based on the following. Ideally the final project for this course will require you to prepare final accounts for a sole trader from a list of transaction and source documents. The course has been designed to provide your guidance and activities that will prepare you to complete the final project assigned by your instructor. The instructor should post final project instructions here. Introduction to Accounting Page | 181
  • 183. COURSE SUMMARY This course has provided the entrepreneur the basic accounting principles and practices to manage the day to day finances of a small business. The ideal business environment is one where the entrepreneur works with a bookkeeper and account to effectively manage the financial activities of the company. The second course in the diploma programme will add to your knowledge of financial management and provide guidance on how to effectively create, implement and manage a small business financial plan that allows the business to grow and succeed in accordance with the company’s strategic plan. Introduction to Accounting Page | 182